You have my permission to distribute this book to as many people as you want by emailing copies to people and downloading

and handing out copies of this book. However, you do not have my permission to sell this book or the information found in it! If you cite information from my book I ask that you cite me and provide a link to where you got the information from.

About Prophecy Proof Insights Prophecy Proof Insights is a website devoted to providing you insights and information that you wont hear in church. My website is unique because it features innovative, Bible prophecy-related information and information from sources few people know about or would ever bother to look from. Much of the information on my website is so innovative that mainstream Bible prophecy teachers are completely unaware that such information exists. When you visit my website you will be amazed by how much detailed information there is about the future. With this information you will be able to take steps to prepare and protect yourself, your friends, and family from a very turbulent future.

My Official Website: http://www.prophecyproof.org . On my official website you can read and download not only my complete reports but also executive summaries of my reports.

My Blog: http://prophecyproof.blogspot.com/ . The purpose of my blog is to share with you my insights on political, economic, financial, the ongoing spiritual warfare, and all sorts of other issues.

Social Networking Profile Pages . Facebook: http://www.facebook.com/pages/Prophecy-Proof/111842772414 . MySpace: http://www.myspace.com/prophecyproof . Twitter: http://www.twitter.com/prophecyproof . LinkedIn: http://www.linkedin.com/pub/wayne-croley/16/42/457

About the Author I am a recent graduate of California State University, Sacramento, an AACSB accredited business school, with a Master of Business Administration degree (concentration in Finance). I also hold a degree in Managerial Economics (with highest honors) and a degree in Political Science (with high honors) from the University of California, Davis, one of Americas most prestigious universities.

Special Thanks A special thanks to Julie K. who designed my amazing book cover. If you are interested in hiring Julie to work on a design project, photo editing project, etc you can contact her at jlknight@oakland.edu

The imaginary used in the cover came from a photo taken by Ian Murdock.

Scripture taken from the King James Version of the Bible module found on www.esword.net 1 1In one instance I use the Literal Translation of the Holy Bible.

Statement of Faith As a precautionary measure, here are many of the things I believe

. I believe God created everything: the universe, the earth, etc. . I believe man was created in the image of God, but unlike God, man is sinful by nature. . I believe the Devil (Satan) exists and is very active at this moment preparing for the arrival of Antichrist. . I believe Jesus Christ is God, who came in human flesh, born of a virgin birth, and lived a sinless life. . I believe in the death, burial, resurrection, and ascension of Jesus Christ . I believe Jesus Christ is the only way to get to Heaven as He died for our sins. . I believe in the Trinity: Father, Son, and Holy Spirit. . The Bible is divinely-inspired, inerrant, and should be regarded as the authoritative source of information when compared to non-biblical sources. . I believe Jesus Christ will return to rescue the Elect. . I believe Jesus Christ will return again following the end of the 70th Week of Daniel to redeem the surviving Jewish people who endured great hardship.

Special Note I quote a lot of New Age sources and mention a lot of New Age concepts, but I am definitely not a New Ager. My beliefs are practically the same type of beliefs that you will find with many Baptist churches. The presence of these sources is just to reinforce what the Bible already makes abundantly clear (to read more about why I use these sources, read Chapter 5). However, my views on certain prophecy topics are quite different than what is commonly taught. This can be seen throughout this book.

Table of Contents 1. Introduction to Prophecy Proof Insights of the Future ..................................................... 13 2. Why Should You Listen to Me? .......................................................................................... 15 3. How to Forecast the Future................................................................................................. 17 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 17 Bible Prophecy ...................................................................................................................... 17 Why Study Prophecy ......................................................................................................... 17 The Nature of Bible Prophecy ........................................................................................... 18 How to Interpret Prophecy ................................................................................................. 19 Science and Technology ........................................................................................................ 20 Economics, Finance, and Politics .......................................................................................... 20 Enemy Messages ................................................................................................................... 21 Using this Knowledge to Forecast ......................................................................................... 21 Example: Global Hyperinflation ........................................................................................ 22 4. An Overview of Satans Strategy in the Ongoing Spiritual Conflict ................................. 24 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 24 Past Attempts to Stop Christ .................................................................................................. 24 Destroy the Human Gene Pool........................................................................................... 24 Use Nephilim to Exterminate the Jews .............................................................................. 27 The Beast Empires............................................................................................................. 28 The Temptation and Crucifixion of Christ ......................................................................... 29 Contemporary Attempts to Stop Christ .................................................................................. 29 False Religions Teachings ................................................................................................. 29

New Age Movement: Satans Masterpiece ............................................................................ 31 Sanat Kumara aka Satan .................................................................................................... 32 Maitreya: The Messianic Figure ........................................................................................ 32 Mahachohan: Counterfeit Holy Spirit ................................................................................ 32 Ascended Masters: Elite Fallen Angels .............................................................................. 33 UFOs: Low-Level Fallen Angel Intrusion .......................................................................... 35 Future Attempts to Stop Christ .............................................................................................. 37 The Coming Strong Delusion ............................................................................................ 37 Antichrist and Armageddon ............................................................................................... 38

5. Messengers of Evil: The Sources I Am Unafraid to Cite ................................................... 39 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 39 Madame Helena P. Blavatsky ................................................................................................ 39 Alice Bailey .......................................................................................................................... 40 Benjamin Creme ................................................................................................................... 41 Cremes Unnatural Power .................................................................................................. 41 Why Cite These Individuals? ................................................................................................. 44 6. The Blessings and Curses .................................................................................................... 46 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 46 The Blessings ........................................................................................................................ 46 The Curses ............................................................................................................................ 46 7. The 70 Weeks of Daniel ....................................................................................................... 49 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 49 The Vision ............................................................................................................................ 49 The First 69 Weeks of Daniel ................................................................................................ 50 The Prophetic Week .............................................................................................................. 51 Attempts to Verify the Prophecy ........................................................................................... 52 Sir Robert Anderson .......................................................................................................... 52 Harold Hohner ................................................................................................................... 53 My Solution to the Problem ................................................................................................... 53 The 70th of Week of Daniel .................................................................................................. 55 Appendix: The Solution Necessary Conditions..................................................................... 56

8. The Prophecy of Adolf Hitler and the Seven Beast Empires ............................................. 67 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 67 The Vision ............................................................................................................................ 67 The Seven Kings and Kingdoms ........................................................................................ 68 Identifying the First Six Kings ............................................................................................... 72 Nebuchadnezzar II ............................................................................................................. 72 Haman ............................................................................................................................... 73 Antiochus Epiphanies IV ................................................................................................... 74 Pharaoh Ahmoses I ............................................................................................................ 75 Sennacherib ....................................................................................................................... 76

Nero ................................................................................................................................. 77 Finding the 7th King .............................................................................................................. 77 A Curses Hidden Importance ............................................................................................ 77 Adolf Hitler ....................................................................................................................... 79 9. The Evil of Adolf Hitler ....................................................................................................... 81 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 81 The Spirit of Antichrist Empowers ........................................................................................ 81 A Channel for Evil Charisma ............................................................................................. 82 Hitlers Eyes ...................................................................................................................... 84 Demonic Support .................................................................................................................. 85 Messiah/Fuhrer ..................................................................................................................... 87 1000 Year Reich Not Exactly ................................................................................................ 88 The Pagan Empire ............................................................................................................. 89 The Ultimate Enemy of the Jews ........................................................................................... 90 New Religion ........................................................................................................................ 91 Almost Immortal ................................................................................................................... 94 Conclusion ............................................................................................................................ 95 10. The Antichrists Empire .................................................................................................... 96 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 96 Nations vs. Kingdoms ........................................................................................................... 97 The First Three Kingdoms ..................................................................................................... 98 Tubal ................................................................................................................................ 99 Meshech ............................................................................................................................ 99 Rosh ............................................................................................................................... 100

The Other Seven Kingdoms................................................................................................. 105 Syria ............................................................................................................................... 106 Cush ............................................................................................................................... 106 Put .................................................................................................................................. 106 Persia .............................................................................................................................. 107 Gomer ............................................................................................................................. 107 Iraq ................................................................................................................................. 107 Togarmah ........................................................................................................................ 107

Where is China? .................................................................................................................. 111 The Destruction of the Empire ............................................................................................. 112 11. The Roadmap to the Rise of the New World Order ....................................................... 113 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 113 The Agents of Change ......................................................................................................... 113 Cosmic Love (Spirit of Antichrist) ................................................................................... 114 The Planetary Hierarchy .................................................................................................. 115 10 Seed-Groups ............................................................................................................... 117 The New Group of World Servers ................................................................................... 118 The United Nations ......................................................................................................... 119 Non-Government Organizations ...................................................................................... 120 The Catalysts of Change ...................................................................................................... 121 Appendix ............................................................................................................................ 125 Where Are We At Today? (Aug 2009) ............................................................................ 125 Marketing the New World Order ..................................................................................... 127 12. The First Half of the 70th Week of Daniel ....................................................................... 129 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 129 The Seven Seals .................................................................................................................. 129 The First Seal and the Covenant with Death ........................................................................ 130 The Details of the Covenant with Death .............................................................................. 130 The 2nd Seal: Antichrist at War ........................................................................................... 132 Peace in Unsuspecting Israel ............................................................................................... 133

War in Heaven and the Fallen Angel Invasion ..................................................................... 134 The Antichrists Return to Jerusalem ................................................................................... 137 13. The Antichrist Revealed .................................................................................................. 139 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 139 What Precisely is the Antichrist? ......................................................................................... 139 Maitreya: The Antichrist Spirit ........................................................................................ 141 The False Resurrection ........................................................................................................ 145 The Antichrists Ability ....................................................................................................... 148 Identifying the 8th Kings Body ........................................................................................... 150 The Fatal Wound ............................................................................................................. 150

Instant Recognition.......................................................................................................... 151 Will Not Love of Women ................................................................................................ 152 Other Return Indicators ................................................................................................... 152 A Final Comment on Restoration .................................................................................... 153 Conclusion .......................................................................................................................... 153 Appendix: Calculating the Number of Maitreyas Name...................................................... 154 14. The False Prophets Identity Revealed ........................................................................... 157 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 157 The Beast of the Earth ......................................................................................................... 157 Meet the False Prophet ........................................................................................................ 158 Sanandas Role ................................................................................................................ 159 15. Specifics of the New World Order .................................................................................. 162 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 162 The NWO Components ....................................................................................................... 162 Component 1: Economy .................................................................................................. 163 Component 2: Politics ......................................................................................................... 168 One-World Government .................................................................................................. 168 The Assembly to Rule: The U.N. ..................................................................................... 171 Component 3: Religion........................................................................................................ 173 Maintaining the New World Order ...................................................................................... 173 16. New Age Movement: One World Religion ..................................................................... 174 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 174

The Great Harlot ................................................................................................................. 174 The Origins of the Mystery Religion ............................................................................... 175 The Mystery Religions Legacy ....................................................................................... 177 The New Age Religious Synthesis ....................................................................................... 179 Restoring the Mystery Religion ....................................................................................... 179 Teachings of the New Age Religion .................................................................................... 180 Self Divinity .................................................................................................................... 180 The Restoration of Mysteries ........................................................................................... 181 Reincarnation .................................................................................................................. 182 New Revelations through Time ....................................................................................... 182

The Dispelling of Glamour .............................................................................................. 182 Worship in the New Age ..................................................................................................... 182 The New World Calendar ................................................................................................ 183 Idol Worship ................................................................................................................... 184 Initiation and the Mark of the Beast ..................................................................................... 185 Babylon the Great City ........................................................................................................ 187 The Two Witnesses ............................................................................................................. 189 The Identity of these Individuals...................................................................................... 189 17. The Great Tribulation ..................................................................................................... 191 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 191 Persecution of Non-Initiates ................................................................................................ 192 Numerous Traps .................................................................................................................. 194 At Least 25% Will Die ........................................................................................................ 196 18. Rapture Warning ............................................................................................................ 197 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 197 Rapture Positions ................................................................................................................ 197 No Rapture ...................................................................................................................... 197 Pre Tribulation Rapture ................................................................................................... 198 Mid-Tribulation Rapture .................................................................................................. 201 Post-Tribulation Rapture ................................................................................................. 202 Pre-Wrath Rapture ........................................................................................................... 202 The Pre-Wrath Logic ....................................................................................................... 203

Matthew 24 Applies to Everyone ..................................................................................... 203 Matthew 24 Analysis ....................................................................................................... 204 New Age Viewpoint of the Rapture ..................................................................................... 212 The Aftermath of the Rapture .............................................................................................. 215 Appendix ............................................................................................................................ 215 Key Pre-Tribulation Verses ............................................................................................. 215 The Counterfeit Rapture Theory ...................................................................................... 217 19. After the Rapture ............................................................................................................ 219 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 219 The 144,000 ........................................................................................................................ 219

The 7th Seal and the 7 Trumpets .......................................................................................... 220 Some Jews Fight Back ........................................................................................................ 220 The Two Witnesses Die and Rise ........................................................................................ 221 Saving the Jews ................................................................................................................... 221 The Judgment of the Elect ................................................................................................... 222 The 7 Bowl Judgments and Armageddon ............................................................................ 223 The Millennium Kingdom ................................................................................................... 225 The Sheep and the Goats ................................................................................................. 225 Make Things New? ......................................................................................................... 226 A 1000 Years Later to Eternity ............................................................................................ 226 20. When Will the End Times Begin? ................................................................................... 228 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 228 The Sabbath Year Defined................................................................................................... 228 The Jubilee Year Defined .................................................................................................... 229 Why the Jubilee Year Matters ............................................................................................. 230 Building the Jubilee Finder .................................................................................................. 233 Finding the Anchor Date ................................................................................................. 233 How to Find Other Sabbath/Jubilee Years ........................................................................... 238 Find Pre 28 A.D. Sabbath/Jubilee Years .......................................................................... 238 Find Pre 28 A.D. Sabbath/Jubilee Years .......................................................................... 238 Find the 1sr Jubilee .......................................................................................................... 239 Accounting for Sabbath and Jubilee Years ........................................................................... 240

Destruction of the 2nd Temple......................................................................................... 240 Ezras Sabbath Year Reading .......................................................................................... 242 Josiahs Jubilee Year Reading ......................................................................................... 243 Ezekiels Jubilee Year ..................................................................................................... 244 Alexanders Tax Exemption ............................................................................................ 246 St. Jeromes Jubilee Year ................................................................................................ 246 The List of Sabbath & Jubilee Years ................................................................................... 247 How to Read the List ....................................................................................................... 247 Fallen Angel Confirmation .................................................................................................. 250 Conclusion .......................................................................................................................... 251

Appendix ............................................................................................................................ 252 21. What Can You Do About it All? ..................................................................................... 254 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 254 Get Saved ............................................................................................................................ 254 Warn Others ........................................................................................................................ 255 Contribute Your Insights ..................................................................................................... 255 Make Preparations ............................................................................................................... 255 Preparing for Hyperinflation ............................................................................................ 255 Preparing for Nuclear War ............................................................................................... 256 Preparing for Other Disasters ........................................................................................... 256 Preparing for the Great Tribulation .................................................................................. 256 A Message to Messianic Jews ............................................................................................. 258 A Forecast of the Future ....................................................................................................... 260 Current 5-Year Forecast ...................................................................................................... 260 Political/Geopolitical ....................................................................................................... 260 Economic ........................................................................................................................ 260 Social .............................................................................................................................. 261 Long-Range Forecast .......................................................................................................... 261 Political/Geopolitical ....................................................................................................... 261 Economic & Finance ....................................................................................................... 261 Social .............................................................................................................................. 261 Spiritual Forecast of the Future............................................................................................ 262 Simplified End Times Timeline ............................................................................................ 263

Glossary of Terms ................................................................................................................. 272 Index .............................................................................................................................. 283

1. Introduction to Prophecy Proof Insights of the Future Before I established my websites, my blog, and published by reports on Scribd and Docstoc I thought of ways that I could make money with the information I provide to my readers. I think there is potential to make a lot of money from this information because there is a large demand for end timesrelated information-especially innovative information like I have. However, after a lot of thought and reflection, I decided that giving all of this information away for free is the right thing to do. The Bible clearly states that a person that has biblical information should not sell it

o Pro 23:23 Buy the truth, and sell it not, also wisdom, and instruction and understanding. o Mat 10:8 Heal sick ones, cleanse lepers, raise dead ones, cast out demons. You freely received, freely give.

After making this decision, I wrote several research reports about what the future holds for us and made them available for the public to read for free. If you have read one of my reports you have likely noticed that I refer to other reports that I have written. I understand that it can be confusing and difficult to completely absorb information if you do not know which order to read my reports and if you are unfamiliar with the concepts that I talk about in my other reports. As a response, this book was created to help anyone to absorb the information found in my reports in a far easier manner than if they read all of my reports separately. If you have not read my reports you may be asking yourself, .Why should I read this persons research?. You should read my research because it features innovative, Bible prophecy-related information and information from sources few people know about or would ever bother to look from. The difference between my research versus the research of nearly all other people who claim to know what the Devil and his minions are up to is that I get my information directly from the source. Most people just quote a rumor they hear or even make up stuff. I, on the other hand, have read countless messages, articles, and books from the

messengers of evil and incorporate information from these sources only when their statements DO NOT contradict the Bible. As a result, much of my information is unlikely to found anywhere else on the Internet or taught in church. A lot of the information that I provide will probably not comply with the teachings of other so-called mainstream .prophecy experts.. However, unlike many so-called .experts., I have nothing to lose by providing you with my information. I am not under any pressure to regurgitate someone elses teachings or tow the line of some religious organization who is

interested in providing a sanitized message. I seek to present to you with the most accurate information that I can. The first edition of this book is just that: .the first edition.. There is likely going to be updated editions of this book in the future as I continue to discover new information, refine my research reports, add new reports, fix typos, and change the structure of this book. I acknowledge that I could spend some more time refining this edition to improve its structure, how it flows, and writing more details about other end time concepts (particularly more about the seven seals, the seven trumpets and the seven bowl judgments) before I release it, but getting this information out to people is of vital importance. There is not much time before some major events that I write about in this book begin to occur and once these events begin it will become much more difficult to prepare for other oncoming events. Therefore, I ask for you to withhold your literary critiques and to understand that it is far more important to help inform people about the future than it is to write a literary masterpiece. If you get confused about the order of events look at the Simplified End Times Timeline in the back of the book. This timeline shows the chronological order that I believe the events that I describe in this book will occur. Future updated editions of this book are likely going to be restructured to make it clearer within the narrative that I expect future events to follow the order that is given in the Simplified End Times Timeline. I strongly encourage you to provide everyone you know with copies of this book. The book is free, but the information in this book will have an immeasurable value for you and for those you give this information to.

2. Why Should You Listen to Me? The biggest hurdle I feel I face is to get people to believe what I have to say. Why should you listen to someone you do not know when someone you know and perhaps even trust is giving you information? Here are several reasons why you should consider the information and insights I provide:

. I have very strong educational credentials. I have obtained an advanced degree and was THE TOP student in two separate majors at one of the most prestigious universities in the U.S. while I was an undergrad. A person does not reach this level of achievement without having a high-level of intellect and work ethic.

. I was trained during my college years to conduct research at an academic research level. The research that I have conducted is deep and goes well beyond the depth of research that most others have done. In fact, this book includes information from historical sources that few have ever accessed because my undergraduate universitys library is one of the largest in North America.

. I examine every teaching I hear and test it myself with scripture and historical sources. I will not offer my support for another persons position without first fully analyzing their arguments and testing their arguments myself. I practically look at every Bible verse that is related to teaching before I draw a conclusion about the validity of the teaching. My habit of examining every teaching critically and exhaustively is perhaps best seen in my chapter about the 70 Weeks of Daniel where I disprove the work of two men that so many people have blindly cited in the past.

. I present arguments of those who disagree with me and explain to you why those positions are wrong. Therefore, you are not just given one side of an issue.

. I have no agenda besides that I want you to be prepared for what is coming. Unlike many people, I do not charge money for access to my reports, this book, and my research findings.

. Unlike most prophecy teachers, I am young. Youth is an asset, not a liability. Youth enables people to think of new ideas and to not be caught up with orthodox and rigid teachings of the past. I have not built a reputation through decades of teaching particular positions so it is far easier for me to think of and propagate new ideas than someone who is so caught up in what they teach that they cannot see the flaws of their teachings and someone who would have a lot of explaining to do after they realize their teachings were

wrong. The Bible makes it clear in Joel 2:28 and Acts 2:17 that young people are the ones who will prophesize while older people dream in the end times. While we are not living in the end times and I am not a prophet, the Bible indicates us that we should pay special attention to young people in the future.

I am free to think independently and speak out because I am not under the pressure to regurgitate the teachings of other people. A lot of religious teachers are under pressure to tow the line because they do not want to lose their position within the religious organization they belong to. A person could lose friends, their ability to feed their family, etc if they speak out against what is pushed upon them to teach. Even if a person manages to overcome this fear, they still do not take the time I take to investigate the teachings of prominent religious teachers because they do not have the time to critique the teachings themselves and/or feel there is no reason to critique these teachings due to these teachers stature. I see a lot of herd mentality in religious organizations because humans tend to find safety in numbers. However, like in investing, this herd mentality will ultimately lead to slaughter of many in the herd because the herd is wrong. People do not think, people do not care to think, people are afraid to think I hope you will listen to me, consider what I have to say, and to test what I have to say to see what I say is correct. I guarantee that if you do all three of these things that you will learn some things that were never taught to you in church.

3. How to Forecast the Future "About the time of the end, a body of men will be raised up who will turn their attention to the Prophecies, and insist upon their literal interpretation, in the midst of much clamor and opposition.-Sir Isaac Newton

Introduction My goal in this chapter is to introduce you to how I study and understand the end times and to put some perspective in understanding the impact of events that occur in our world. With this framework you will be able to classify the importance of events and hopefully learn not to be so caught up in events that will not have any impact on us one or two years from now.

Bible Prophecy The Bible is the key information source that I use to try to understand what will occur in the present and in the future. The Bible is a completely reliable source and contains prophecies that are precise and accurate. Biblical prophecies about the future will ultimately be fulfilled one day, so any forecast of the future must take into account all the events predicted by the Bible. Bible prophecy is such an important factor to consider that I provide a mini-guide to approaching prophecy below.

Why Study Prophecy The topic of the end times is often treated paradoxically by the public. Many people are fascinated by fictional accounts from books and television shows, but if you attempt to start a conversation about the realities of the end times many people become uncomfortable. The decision to study prophecy is something that you cannot force upon someone since it requires the person to be willing to accept that they may never be the same once they start. I had to

overcome this hurdle to become mentally prepared to start studying prophecy. Here is a list of items to consider if you are deciding whether you want to study prophecy:

1. Are you willing to make the sacrifice of becoming more aware about what you face and what you will face?

o Ecc 1:18 For in much wisdom is much grief; and he who increases knowledge increases pain.

2. People have and are trying to acquire the knowledge of prophecy. You might be the one who finds the next breakthrough

o Dan 12:4 But you, O Daniel, shut up the words and seal the book, to the end time. Many shall run to and fro, and knowledge shall be increased.

3. You will gain the knowledge to help others. The reward for helping others is great!

o Dan 12:3 And those who act wisely shall shine as the brightness of the firmament, and those turning many to righteousness as the stars forever and ever.

4. You will be able to resist others who will try to mislead you and pass .the test.

o Dan 12:10 Many shall be purified and made white and tested. But the wicked shall do wickedly. And not one of the wicked shall understand, but the wise shall understand.

5. Having the spirit of prophecy is being a witness to Jesus

o Rev 19:10 And I fell before his feet to worship him, but he said to me, Behold! Stop! I am a fellow-slave of yours, and of your brothers, having the testimony of Jesus. Worship God. For the testimony of Jesus is the spirit of prophecy.

The Nature of Bible Prophecy Bible prophecy is a source of information that makes it easier to anticipate end time events and long-term trends than near-term, future events. I define the end times as a time when major prophetic events described in the scriptures are occurring with frequency. This will be a unique time in history because major prophetic events have occurred throughout time, but there have been long periods of time before the next event occurs. Some conditions have taken hundreds or even over a thousand years to arrive before a prophecy is fulfilled. Longterm trends are not as easy to predict as end time events because they are not always directly referenced in the Bible. However, we can make very good educational guesses about what kind of long-term events and developments will happen before the end times begin based on clues the Bible gives. For instance, I can forecast that paper money will be devalued to the point that it will no longer be used by citing the lack of references to a paper money system in Bible

EndTime Events Long Term Trends and Events Can Be Identified From Scriptural Clues Near-Term Future: Nearly Anything Can Happen prophecy. Near-term, future events, like the passage of particular law, are the most difficult type of events to predict because a million different things can happen before a long-term trend takes hold.

The following diagram shows the relationship of time to accuracy of predicting; smaller the swath, greater the accuracy

How to Interpret Prophecy People often fall into a trap of interpreting a verse subjectively so that they can claim the verse supports their beliefs. The human mind is subjected to error, but the Word of God is not. Thus, I base 99% of my interpretation of a verse(s) upon evidence provided by other verses since scripture is inerrant. There is a Biblical basis for treating the Bible as an inerrant document because we have two passages from both the Old and New Testaments that state the inerrancy of the scripture:

o Psa 119:160 The sum of Your Word is true; every one of Your righteous judgments

endures forever.

o Joh 10:34 Jesus answered them, Has it not been written in your Law, "I said, you are gods"? o Joh 10:35 If He called those gods with whom the Word of God was, and the Scripture cannot be broken,

However, this does not mean there could be a mistranslation by the transcriber. People make mistakes so we have to make sure that we catch all of the mistakes made in the translation from Hebrew to English or Greek to English. I use the King James Version of the Bible throughout my book because I believe it is the most faithful to the original Hebrew and Greek. There is a slight caveat to interpreting Bible verses literally. A few passages in the Bible, like the description of the harlot in Revelation 17, call on the reader to use a non-literal interpretation or .spiritualized. interpretation to understand the meaning of the prophecy. The Bible will tell you when a non-literal interpretation is needed, so you should not seek a nonliteral or spiritualized interpretation of a particular passage unless the Bible instructs to.

Science and Technology I feel that the use of Bible prophecy can be further legitimized and understood with the use of science. However, to the extent that science begins to conflict with the Bible is when I rule out science and rely exclusively upon the Bible. You may call this decision rule selfserving, but you must realize that much of science is based on theory. The key characteristic of any scientific theory is that the explanation can be disproved. Though our society has a high regard for scientists we should not expect them to be able to explain everything. There were many occasions in biblical times when a society turned to those who they regarded as their .wisest. to explain why a destructive event was happening to them to instead find that these people from not so wise after all. We can exploit the technology that we have to improve our productivity in studying the

Bible and communicating information to each other. However, I do not believe in the Bible Code nor do I advocate using the Bible Code as a way of understanding new prophetic truths. There are people in this world that have the ability to use their mind to increase the knowledge of the Church instead of relying on a machine.

Economics, Finance, and Politics It is very important to have an understanding of each of these fields to be able to anticipate what is going to happen in the future. All three of these fields are interrelated because developments in the economy, the world of finance, or politics affect the others. For instance, a

government running up massive debts will eventually lead to a decline in the value of the currency and higher interest rates. Too much government debt racked up by reckless spending will lead to a complete collapse of the currency and perhaps major global repercussions. The interactions between these three fields will be the catalyst that will shape the world so the end times can begin and is best seen in my Roadmap to the Rise of the New World Order chapter.

Enemy Messages Messages provided by New Age sources and fallen angels, can be a very valuable source of information in helping to understand some of the finer details of what is likely going to happen in the future. Very few ever dare to consider messages from these sources because most people are afraid to access the messages and feel it is not even worth their time since the enemy does lie a lot. However, I believe that it is possible to find some very useful information from New Age sources and fallen angels. I fully explain why in my chapter about the messengers of evil. You should NOT attempt to study the messages given by fallen angels and other New Age sources unless you already have a high-level of biblical understanding because the lies that these messengers of evil tell are quite complex. You need a high-level of biblical understanding to know when lies are being told and to uncover potential useful information from their web of lies. Information that can potentially be useful is details that confirm what the Bible teaches. For instance, details given by a prominent New Age source about the future existence of an international organization that is slated to control the supply of raw materials correspond to Revelation 6:5-6 where items like wheat will be rationed. This type of information given by this source provides us with details to better envision what the Bible indicates to us about the future.

Using this Knowledge to Forecast The following outline is the top-down approach that I use to forecast the future.

Start with understanding Bible prophecy because all events eventually lead to the events prophesized in the Bible. . For Bible prophecy to be fulfilled some events must take place, these are long-term events and trends. Use scriptural clues to identify which events must take place before the end times begin. o Knowing what trends and events must take place in the long-run can help us identify possible drivers that make these events happen.

. Use knowledge of finance, economics, and politics to identify how longrun trends and events can develop. . If possible, use scientific and/or technological knowledge to understand how long-run trends and events can occur . Search through enemy messages to find details that help explain how long-term trends and events can develop.

Example: Global Hyperinflation Here I give an example of how all of this knowledge can be used to make a future forecast. In this example I illustrate how I am able to predict that there will be global hyperinflation.

Forecast Sources Evidence The Bible The Bible does not mention that paper money will be used in the end times. Rev 6:5-6, Zephaniah 1:18, and Ezekiel 7:19 Identifiable Long-Term Trend(s) based on Scriptural Clues Above Events must take place so that a need to replace paper money develops Science and Technology The technology to support a global bartering and credit system exists Economics, Politics, and Finance Knowledge

Hyperinflation is an economic phenomenon where the value of paper money is destroyed.

Hyperinflation is caused by the out of control creation of too much money and credit. . Governments across the planet are now willing to engage in a competitive devaluation of their currencies (a money printing campaign) so that no country will not gain an advantage in trade over their own. . Governments across the world are also printing money to try to bail out their economies and to pay off the massive debts they owe. The Content of Enemy Messages A very prominent New Age source say paper currencies will be superseded by a new global currency system.

A high-level fallen angel says that currency across the world will be devalued

Therefore, my forecast that there will be global hyperinflation is based on not only the Bible and Antichristian sources, but also the interaction of finance, economics, and politics. In addition, the technology exists to support the establishment of a system that supersedes paper money.

Each forecast source points to the same event, so the event must happen before the end times begin.

4. An Overview of Satans Strategy in the Ongoing Spiritual Conflict

Introduction Satans biggest desire is to be worshipped like God by everyone. Regardless of how hard Satan tries to become everyones object of worship, he will fully never accomplish his goal because God will never allow this to happen. Nevertheless, Satan is trying to accomplish his goal by attempting to pull people away from God and pull people towards him. Satan also faces eternal punishment in the lake of fire. Obviously Satan does not want this outcome so he is attempting to thwart Gods plans any way he can in futile hopes that he change the outcome. Since the fall of Satan from grace he has been in conflict with God. Satan, the serpent, was told in Genesis 3:15 that the seed or offspring of the woman would one day bruise his head. Since that time Satan sought to prevent the coming of the seed (Jesus Christ) that would bruise his head. The Jews eventually became the primary target of Satan when he realized that they were Gods chosen people and the people where the seed of the woman would arise from. In this chapter I will briefly touch on some of the things Satan has tried to prevent the rise of Christ and eventual reign of Christ, including his attempt to destroy the human gene pool and his attempts to eliminate the Jewish race. I will also briefly touch on a couple of major activities Satan is currently doing to draw people away from God before I give an overview of what Satan has planned for the future.

Past Attempts to Stop Christ Destroy the Human Gene Pool Although I have already mentioned how the seed or offspring of the woman would one

day bruise the head of the serpent or Satan, I want to focus on Genesis 3:15 again because it refers to something that is spoken far less about. Genesis 3:15 not only refers to the seed of the woman, but also the seed of the serpent. This means that Satan has his own .offspring..

o Gen 3:15 And I will put enmity between thee and the woman, and between thy seed and her seed; it shall bruise thy head, and thou shalt bruise his heel.

Revelation Chapter 12 summarizes the long battle between Satan and the Jewish people, particularly the element of the Jewish race where Christ originated from. Revelation 12:3-4 describes a red dragon that is later identified as Satan, initially bringing down a third of the stars in heaven to Earth. These are not literal stars that are not being knocked down as an actual star crashing onto Earth would burn it up. Although there is a debate about the complete interpretation of Revelation 12, Bible scholars agree that the stars that the red dragon knocked down to Earth were angels. This account is also consistent with the widely held belief that Satan led the fallen angels revolt against God.

o Rev 12:3 And there appeared another wonder in heaven; and behold a great red dragon, having seven heads and ten horns, and seven crowns upon his heads. o Rev 12:4 And his tail drew the third part of the stars of heaven, and did cast them to the earth: and the dragon stood before the woman which was ready to be delivered, for to devour her child as soon as it was born. o Rev 12:5 And she brought forth a man child, who was to rule all nations with a rod of iron: and her child was caught up unto God, and to his throne.

After the fall of a 1/3 of the total angels created, Satan appears to have enlisted them to corrupt the human gene pool. Satan sought to corrupt the gene pool so badly that Christ would be unable to appear on Earth as everyone on Earth would technically no longer be human. Genesis 6:1-2 reports that the sons of God married ordinary women. There has been a debate about who are the .sons of God.. Many seminaries teach that the .sons of God. were those from the noble line of Seth. However, this incorrect because the Bible establishes in Jude 1:6, Job 1:6-7, Job Chapter 2:1-2, and 2 Peter 2:4-5 that the .sons of God. were angels that left their original estate, which means they are the fallen angels. In addition, the noble line of Seth could not be the sons of God because they were wiped out in the Great Flood. Therefore,

Genesis 6:1 and 6:2 report that fallen angels married women

o Gen 6:1 And it came to pass, when men began to multiply on the face of the earth, and daughters were born unto them, o Gen 6:2 That the sons of God saw the daughters of men that they were fair; and they took them wives of all which they chose.

The Lord was very unhappy with the mating between fallen angels and mortal women. In fact, the Lord shortened the average humans lifespan to 120 years in response (Gen 6:3). The offspring between the fallen angels and women were .giants. and men of renown or name. Some theologians go as far to say that the mythologies of many civilizations like Greece and Rome were based on the activities of these .giants.. Interestingly, the word .giants. in Genesis

6:4 is actually mistranslated. The Hebrew word used in Genesis 6:4 where the word .giants. appears is .Nephilim., which means fallen ones.

o Gen 6:4 There were giants in the earth in those days; and also after that, when the sons of God came in unto the daughters of men, and they bare children to them, the same became mighty men which were of old, men of renown.

The result of the union between fallen angels and human women created offspring that helped create a world of chaos. This is not to say that the fallen angels also helped to cause chaos. It is very likely that the fallen angels played a big role in creating this chaos. In fact, the Book of Enoch, a book that is not part of the biblical canon, but was thought of highly by several New Testament figures like Peter and Jude, reports that fallen angels introduced many evil practices to our planet.

o Gen 6:5 And GOD saw that the wickedness of man was great in the earth, and that every imagination of the thoughts of his heart was only evil continually.

o Enoch 7:1. And all the others together with them took unto themselves wives, and each chose for himself one, and they began to go in unto them and to defile themselves with them, and they taught them charms and enchantments, and the cutting of roots, and made them acquainted with plants.

The Lord was so upset that He regretted making man and decided to destroy everyone except Noahs family. Many theologians believe that Noah was .perfect. not because he never sinned, but because he and his family were the only ones who were not corrupted Nephilim.

o Gen 6:6 And it repented the LORD that he had made man on the earth, and it grieved him at his heart. o Gen 6:7 And the LORD said, I will destroy man whom I have created from the face of the earth; both man, and beast, and the creeping thing, and the fowls of the air; for it repenteth me that I have made them. o Gen 6:8 But Noah found grace in the eyes of the LORD. o Gen 6:9 These are the generations of Noah: Noah was a just man and perfect in his generations, and Noah walked with God.

We know that the Lord eventually flooded the earth with a massive deluge for 40 days and 40 nights. What is less talked about is that the Lord punished the pre-flood fallen angels by locking

them up in a place called Tartarus (a special Greek word for the word .hell. in the King James Version of the Bible), which is probably located in a spiritual realm somewhere deep in the earth.

o 2Pe 2:4 For if God spared not the angels that sinned, but cast them down to hell, and delivered them into chains of darkness, to be reserved unto judgment; o 2Pe 2:5 And spared not the old world, but saved Noah the eighth person, a preacher of righteousness, bringing in the flood upon the world of the ungodly;

o Jud 1:6 And the angels which kept not their first estate, but left their own habitation, he hath reserved in everlasting chains under darkness unto the judgment of the great day.

Use Nephilim to Exterminate the Jews The Bible is adamant that there were Nephilim after the Flood as .The giants were in the earth in those days, and even afterwards. (Genesis 6:4). This implies that there were still fallen angels after the flood since Nephilim are human/angelic hybrids. How can we reconcile the fact that the God imprisoned the fallen angels that left their first estate with the fact that there may have been post-flood fallen angels? I believe the answer is that more angels fell from Heaven after the flood. There is proof in the Book of Job that there were more angels after the flood. According to Answering Genesis, .Job was probably written in the first centuries after the worldwide Flood, soon after the Tower of Babel... The book of Job is filled with allusions to early life after the Tower of Babel. As Bible commentator Henry M. Morris notes, Job .contains more references to creation, the Flood and other primeval events than any book of the Bible except Genesis.... 2 Job 1:6-7 and Job 2:1-2 describe heavenly scenes where Satan and his angels, the sons of God, presented themselves in front of God.

2 Taylor, Paul. S. .Dinosaurs-Alive After Babel?. Answering Genesis. 13 Feb 2008. Last accessed 11 Jan 2009. http://www.answersingenesis.org/articles/am/v3/n2/dinosaurs-alive-after-babel.

o Job 1:6 Now there was a day when the sons of God came to present themselves before the LORD, and Satan came also among them. o Job 1:7 And the LORD said unto Satan, Whence comest thou? Then Satan answered the LORD, and said, From going to and fro in the earth, and from walking up and down in it.

o Job 2:1 Again there was a day when the sons of God came to present themselves before the LORD, and Satan came also among them to present himself before the LORD. o Job 2:2 And the LORD said unto Satan, From whence comest thou? And Satan answered the LORD, and said, From going to and fro in the earth, and from walking up and down in it.

Moreover, we have confirmation throughout the Old Testament that there were Nephilim on the earth after the flood. The following table lists the different races of giants and notorious giants described in the Bible.

Races Verse Emim Deut 2:10-11 Horim Deut 2:12 Rephaim Genesis 14:5 Zamzummim Deut 2:18-21 Anak Numbers 13:33 Arba Joshua 14:15 Og King of Bashan Deut 3:11 Goliath & His Brothers 1 Samuel 17:4, 2 Samuel 21:15-22

The post-flood Nephilim appears to have been scattered throughout Canaan as an attempt by Satan to prevent the Israelites entry into the land and an attempt to wipe Israelites out. This tactic failed because the Israelites eventually settled into the land of Canaan.

The Beast Empires I will discuss the topic of beast empires in a future chapter. However, at this point all you need to know is that Revelation 12 and Revelation 17 show that Satan has used several rulers/empires to try to prevent the birth and eventual eternal reign of Jesus Christ. To prevent the birth of this child and his eventual reign, Satan has persecuted and attempted to annihilate the Jewish people. Therefore, the appearance of Anti-Semitism throughout history is not a coincidence, but a satanically-inspired phenomenon.

The Temptation and Crucifixion of Christ Satan tried to thwart Gods plan by tempting His Son Jesus Christ when He was on Earth two thousand years ago. Satan offered Jesus control over the entire planet in exchange for Him to worship Satan.

o Mat 4:8 Again, the devil taketh him up into an exceeding high mountain, and sheweth him all the kingdoms of the world, and the glory of them; o Mat 4:9 And saith unto him, All these things will I give thee, if thou wilt fall down and worship me.

If Satan had succeeded God would have lost His Son and there would be no redemption for mankind. Fortunately, Jesus rejected the offer and sent Satan away by quoting scripture.

o Mat 4:10 Then saith Jesus unto him, Get thee hence, Satan: for it is written, Thou shalt worship the Lord thy God, and him only shalt thou serve. o Mat 4:11 Then the devil leaveth him, and, behold, angels came and ministered unto him.

Satan later sought to ruin Gods plan by seeking to destroy Jesus Christ. He went as far as to possess Judas Iscariot and have Judas turn in Christ so that He could be crucified. However, Satans move failed when Christ rose from the dead three days after being crucified and ascended to Heaven. Satan knows that Christ is prophesized to return again and will eventually establish a kingdom on Earth. Therefore, Satan has been busy trying to make it so Christ will not have a kingdom to inherit by going back to persecuting the Jews and trying to turn people away from God.

Contemporary Attempts to Stop Christ False Religions Teachings One way Satan has sought to deceive individuals and pull them away from God is to utilize his fallen angels to provide individuals with deceptive messages and religious teachings. Paul wrote in 1 Timothy 4:1-3 that in the latter times, which is the time period where I think we live in now, deceiving spirits will attempt to make people depart from faith with unbiblical teachings.

o 1Ti 4:1 Now the Spirit speaketh expressly, that in the latter times some shall depart from the faith, giving heed to seducing spirits, and doctrines of devils; o 1Ti 4:2 Speaking lies in hypocrisy; having their conscience seared with a hot iron; o 1Ti 4:3 Forbidding to marry, and commanding to abstain from meats, which God hath created to be received with thanksgiving of them which believe and know the truth.

A major reason why fallen angels can deceive people is that people are usually unaware that they are dealing with a fallen angel(s). Paul warns that satanic representatives like fallen angels have the ability to transform or masquerade themselves as benevolent ministers of light.

o 2Co 11:13 For such are false apostles, deceitful workers, transforming themselves into the apostles of Christ. o 2Co 11:14 And no marvel; for Satan himself is transformed into an angel of light. o 2Co 11:15 Therefore it is no great thing if his ministers also be transformed as the ministers of righteousness; whose end shall be according to their works.

Dr. Scott Johnson notes that .transform. as used here is not figurative, but physical: .The literal word is .metaschematizo - to change the figure of, to transform, to assume the form of another,. and has the same root as .metamorphosis,. and relates specifically to the outward physical appearance..3 The Bible provides further evidence that angels can take on other physical forms. In fact, Hebrews 13:2 says that people can mistake angels as people. 3 Johnson, Scott. .UFOs, Aliens, Fallen Angels, Nephilim, and The Days of Noah.. 19 Aug 2007. Last Accessed 11 Jan 2009. http://media.sermonaudio.com/mediapdf/82007142704.pdf.

o Heb 13:1 Let brotherly love continue.

o Heb 13:2 Be not forgetful to entertain strangers: for thereby some have entertained angels unawares.

Genesis 19:1-5 describes an instance where the people of Sodom mistaken angels for humans. In fact, the angels look so human that the people of Sodom were attracted to them.

o Gen 19:1 And there came two angels to Sodom at even; and Lot sat in the gate of Sodom: and Lot seeing them rose up to meet them; and he bowed himself with his face toward the ground; o Gen 19:2 And he said, Behold now, my lords, turn in, I pray you, into your servant's house, and tarry all night, and wash your feet, and ye shall rise up early, and go on your ways. And they said, Nay; but we will abide in the street all night. o Gen 19:3 And he pressed upon them greatly; and they turned in unto him, and entered into his house; and he made them a feast, and did bake unleavened bread, and they did eat.

o Gen 19:4 But before they lay down, the men of the city, even the men of Sodom, compassed the house round, both old and young, all the people from every quarter: o Gen 19:5 And they called unto Lot, and said unto him, Where are the men which came in to thee this night? bring them out unto us, that we may know them.

Fallen angels ability to physically transform into many types of forms, including human form, makes them extremely dangerous beings not only today but also in the future.

New Age Movement: Satans Masterpiece The best example of Satans use of fallen angels to spread false religious teachings to people is the New Age Movement. The New Age Movement is an attempt to synthesize all of the worlds religions to create a one-world religious system and government. Followers of the movement promote the unification of Eastern Religions with Western Religion as they claim that all paths lead to God. However, in the process of merging East with West the concepts of Christianity become heavily diluted to the point that it is hardly recognizable anymore in the New Age Religion. The New Age Movements ability to incorporate concepts of many religions is helping it to rise in prominence and to attract believers from all types of religions. I believe the most information about Satans future plans can be gleaned from New Age information sources because it seems Satan and his minions are focusing much of their efforts on making this religious movement mainstream, which is not only diverting people away from Christianity and Judaism, but is also conditioning people for the global appearance of the Antichrist, the False Prophet, and fallen angels. For instance, Ken Carey, a highlyregarded New Age thinker, claims to receive several messages from a spiritual being. In the late 1970s the spiritual being revealed to Carey when the forces of evil began to work prominently in the world to build up the New Age Movement and what they planned to do in the following decade:

.'By the time of the eighties revelations, knowledge of our existence and our work will be widespread, especially among the younger generation, the prime focus of our efforts at that time... Your religions are exploding beyond the confines of their dogma in the rediscovery of Spirit... There is a new vibrational pattern on your planet. Tune into it and learn an effective way of dealing with the closing years of history'.. 4 4 Ibid.

The forecasts for the 1980s by this spiritual being appear to have come true. The New Age Movement became far more prominent and well-known in the 1980s and, as I will discuss a later in this book, the first public appearance of a major New Age spiritual figure came in 1988. In

addition, the Third Wave Movement of the Holy Spirit began in the mid 1980s, which brought on a renewed commitment to signs and wonders in Christian evangelism (from my research many of signs and wonders that manifest in religious services are generated by evil spirits). The New Age Movement is broad, complex and details about this spiritual movement can fill up an entire book. I am going to try to keep this as simple as I can when describing concepts to you. I will go more into depth about the New Age Movement in a later chapter, but for now I highlight three individuals who appear to make up an unholy trinity and a group of their top assistants.

Sanat Kumara aka Satan Sanat Kumara is akin to the godhead of this unholy trinity. Sanat Kumara is known as the .Lord of the World., which is a title that the Bible gives to Satan in John 12:31-32, John 14:29-30, 2 Corinthians 4:3-4, and Ephesians 2:1-3. Satan is known as the ruler of this world because he has dominion over all the kingdoms of the earth. This is demonstrated when Satan offered Jesus all the kingdoms of the earth and glory if He worshipped him.

Maitreya: The Messianic Figure The Christ in the New Age Movement is an entity known as Maitreya or the .World Teacher.. New Age followers believe that The Christ appears in human form to us to help guide us at the start of each new age. They claim that Maitreya represents the coming figure expected by all religions, including the Imam Mahdi (Islam), Krishna (Hinduism), Maitreya Buddha (Buddhism), the Messiah (Judiasm), and the Christ (Christianity). I believe that Maitreya is a real spiritual being. However, Maitreya is not a messiah, but Satans highest-ranking fallen

angel and the spirit of Antichrist spoken of in 1 John 4. You will learn about more Maitreya a little bit later in this book.

Mahachohan: Counterfeit Holy Spirit Mahachohan is considered to be the Holy Spirit type figure in is this unholy trinity. One of the most prominent New Age authors in history described Mahachohan as the leading figure assigned to bring the New World Order: .He is the Lord of Civilization and His is the task of bringing in the new civilization for which all men wait..5 5 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 667

Ascended Masters: Elite Fallen Angels New Age theology states that Ascended Masters are a group of perfected human beings who help guide humanity in its evolutionary process. When I first read about Ascended Masters I immediately suspected that they are high-level fallen angels. My suspicion was shared and later confirmed by several people, including author Peter Goodgame whose work on the Ascended Masters can be accessed by clicking this link. We should consider the Ascended Masters to be Satans top lieutenants in charge of implementing his diabolical plan. In fact, one Ascended Master reveals that the Ascended Masters are the administrator of their gods (Satan) plan:

.Meanwhile, We, the Teachers, the Elder Brothers of men, act to bridge the gulf between the Kingdoms. Thus can We safely oversee the congruence of men and angels. We are the "go-betweens"; the willing helpers of both men and the Devic [angelic] forces; the ever-present Administrators of God's Plan and Purpose; the alleviators of suffering and the Agents of God's Love..6 6 The Master (through Creme, Benjamin). .The Masters Enter Mans Domain.. 13 Jan 2009. Last Accessed 13 Jan 2009. http://www.mcn.org/1/Miracles/angormast.html 7 Creme, Benjamin. .Benjamin Cremes Lecture in Osaka Japan.. 19 June. 2006. Last Accessed 13 Jan 2009. http://www.shareintl.org/background/bcreme/bc_osaka.htm. 8 Creme, Benjamin. .50 Frequently Asked Questions.. 02 Nov. 2006 Last Accessed 13 Jan 2009. http://www.share-international.org/background/faq/faq_main.htm.

In addition to their normal tasks, the Ascended Masters are in charge of gaining and maintaining control over people of different faiths. A very prominent figure in the New Age Movement, who I will discuss in-depth in the next chapter, proclaimed that there will eventually be 40 Ascended Masters operating in the world at some point in time: .Eventually, about 40 Masters will return

and live openly among us. The Masters will guide and advise humanity; they have not come to take over the world. They are teachers, an advisory body that can prevent us from making too many and too terrible mistakes..7 This figure also tells us that .certain Masters have been designated for particular posts in specific centers-the five major spiritual centers and two minor ones..8 The following table shows the names of some noteworthy Ascended Masters:

Ascended Master (Counterfeit) For Detailed Information Maitreya www.share-international.org Jesus Sananda Immanuel (Jesus of Nazareth) http://www.scribd.com/doc/13358138/-ENDTIMEPLAYER-SANANDA Mahachohan http://www.tsl.org/masters/mahachohan.asp St. Germain http://www.scribd.com/doc/13358804/ENDTIMEPLAYER-ST-GERMAIN Koot Hoomi http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Koot_Hoomi El Morya http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/El_Morya Djwhal Khul http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Djwal_Khul Lanto (Confucius) http://www.tsl.org/Masters/Lanto.asp Paul the Venetian http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Paul_the_Venetian Serapis Bey

http://www.tsl.org/Masters/Serapis.asp Hilarion http://www.tsl.org/Masters/Hilarion.asp Maha Chohan http://www.tsl.org/Masters/MahaChohan.asp Afra http://www.tsl.org/Masters/Afra.asp Lady Nada http://www.tsl.org/Masters/Nada.asp Lady Magda (Mary Magdalene) http://www.ascension-research.org/magda.html Master Mary (Virgin Mary) http://www.ascension-research.org/mary.html

Master Mary I want to focus particularly on Master Mary who according to the very prominent New Age figure is behind all the Mary apparitions: .The visions of the Virgin Mary are created as thought-forms by the Master who was the Madonna, the mother of Jesus, 2,000 years ago. She is a disciple of Maitreya, and now a very advanced Master indeed. This Master creates these

visions of the Madonna which are always seen by more than one person..9 (You can see an artist depiction of Master Mary by clicking this link). In addition, this individual says the Master Mary is responsible for other phenomena like weeping statues and bleeding statues: .But the visions seen by more than one person, the weeping statues, the moving statues, the statues which bleed real blood, and so on, are created by the Master who was the mother of Jesus..10 I believe it is important to give special attention to Master Mary because the Virgin Mary is a huge part of Catholicism and there are often reports of her appearing at a location and reports of strange phenomenon involving statues and images of her. 9 Leach, Monte. .Do You Believe in Miracles? Interview with Benjamin Creme.. 18 June 2006. Last Accessed 13 Jan. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/archives/signsmiracles/sm_mlbcinterview.htm. 10 Ibid. 11 Samples, Kenneth R. .Apparitions of The Virgin Mary: A Protestant Look at a Catholic Phenomenon.. Christian Research Journal Vol. 26, Spring 1991. 26 One of the most famous Virgin Mary apparitions came in 1981 in a town in BosniaHerzegovina named Medjugorje. In 1981 people from across the world made a pilgrimage to this small town to see what the inhabitants claimed to be the Virgin Mary. In 1991 the Christian Research Institute published a detail article analyzing the theological significance of the messages given in this apparition. The author analyzing the messages found several disturbing themes: .There is also the problem of some messages sounding pluralistic (i.e., implying the salvific validity of all religions). In 1981, a priest asked the visionaries: .Are all the religions good?. Their answer was that the Lady says .all religions are good before God.. On another occasion a message came forth stating that .you are not true Christians if you do not respect other religions. and that .division among the religions is caused by man, not God..11

The messages given by apparitions support the notion that the speaker was not the Virgin Mary, but the fallen angel who posed as Mary. The teachings that .all religions are good before God. and .that division among the religions is caused by man, not God. are unbiblical and consistent with New Age teachings. Therefore, I believe this prominent New Age figure is being somewhat truthful when saying that the Virgin Mary apparitions and other Virgin Mary relatedphenomenon are caused by an Ascended Master, a fallen angel, who as Paul warned us can transform themselves into a minister of light.

UFOs: Low-Level Fallen Angel Intrusion UFOs is a controversial topic because many Christians are skeptical about their existence and some people who believe in UFOs cling to weird conspiracy theories. After spending a lot of time examining the UFO phenomena, I believe that UFOs is a real phenomenon. As a Bible-

believing Christian, how can I reconcile my Biblical beliefs with my belief that UFOs exist? After some time contemplating this dilemma I found an explanation Aliens and UFOs are simply bad news. After a lot of research, I have concluded that aliens and UFOs are evil with deep ties to the Ascended Masters. First, consider Ephesians 2:13 and note that Paul wrote that Satan is the .prince of the power of the air.:

o Eph 2:1 And you hath he quickened, who were dead in trespasses and sins; o Eph 2:2 Wherein in time past ye walked according to the course of this world, according to the prince of the power of the air, the spirit that now worketh in the children of disobedience: o Eph 2:3 Among whom also we all had our conversation in times past in the lusts of our flesh, fulfilling the desires of the flesh and of the mind; and were by nature the children of wrath, even as others.

This passage is very important to know because it reveals that Satan rules over the entities that exist in the air. Since Satan has authority over what prevails in the air he has the power to decide whether UFOs should exist in the air. The fact that UFOs are allowed to operate on a fairly wide-scale basis for at least the past 60 years should give you some indication whose side UFOs are on. Another consideration that makes me believe that UFOs are evil is something that seems to be common in UFO abduction cases that I have read. People who claim to have experience abduction attempts report that the abduction immediately stops when they mention the Lord Jesus Christs name. A major UFO cult has formed around a mysterious figure named Ashtar, who heads up a UFO fleet called the Ashtar Command. I have uncovered with my research that Ashtar is an Ascended Master with a lot of authority. He allegedly is .the commander of 24,000,000

extraterrestrials..12 However, Ashtar is not the most senior member of the UFO hierarchy. According to a person an Ashtar-contactee, Ashtar is .Second only to the Beloved Commander Jesus-Sananda in responsibility for the airborne division of the Brotherhood of Light..13 Therefore, I would not be surprised that aliens themselves are in-fact lower-ranking fallen angels because they seem to be following orders from the highest-ranking fallen angels, the Ascended Masters. 12 Editors of Publications International, Ltd. .Ashtar, Master of the Universe.. 14 Jan. 2009. Last Accessed 14. Jan. 2009. http://science.howstuffworks.com/ashtar.htm. 13 Ibid. 14 .UFOs-FAQ.. 18 June. 2006. Last Accessed 14 Jan. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/ARCHIVES/UFOs/faq_UFOs.htm. What is the main purpose of UFOs? The very prominent New Age figure reveals that UFOs are currently working on paving the way for Maitreya: .There is a relationship. What the UFOs are doing, put very broadly and simply, is preparing a platform for Maitreya..14 The New Age figure does not go into further detail about what he means when he says that UFOs are

.preparing a platform for Maitreya.. Although I do not have any direct evidence, I suspect that aliens and UFOs are being used to shaken the beliefs of non-suspecting Christians. Many Christians are skeptical about whether UFOs exist because there is no direct evidence in the Bible that they actually exist (there is a lot of indirect evidence though). Therefore, the appearance of Aliens/UFOs could cause unsuspecting Christians to begin questioning their beliefs and possibly discredit Christian leaders who say that they do not exist. This would pave the way for Maitreya as many people would be less critical to messengers who preach ideas that do not have a biblical basis.

Future Attempts to Stop Christ The Coming Strong Delusion During the end times Satan will try to stop Christ by attempting to convert everyone on Earth into a follower of his. Satan will try to persuade unsuspecting people to follow him primarily through the use of lying signs and wonders. He will give off lying signs and wonders through false christs, including the Antichrist, and false prophets, including the False Prophet. The magnitude of the lying signs and wonders will be so strong that if it were possible even the entire elect would be deceived.

o Mat 24:24 For there shall arise false Christs, and false prophets, and shall shew great signs and wonders; insomuch that, if it were possible, they shall deceive the very elect.

While Satan will use these lying signs and wonders for his own selfish purposes he is actually helping to fulfill Gods plan. The Apostle Paul tells us in 2 Thessalonians 2:8-12 that God is

going to allow Satan to perform all sorts of lying signs to weed out those who do not believe the truth of His word (brackets added by me to provide clarification).

o 2Th 2:8-12: And then "the Lawless One" [Antichrist] will be revealed,His coming is according to the working of Satan in all power and miraculous signs and lying wonders And because of this, God will send to them [those who deny the word of God] a working of error [strong delusion], for them to believe the lie that all may be judged, those not believing the truth, but who have delighted in unrighteousness.

Antichrist and Armageddon The spiritual conflict will be the most intense during the end times. Satan will literally be kicked out of Heaven along with his angels and will be relegated to Earth after being defeated in a war between him and his angels and Michael and his angels (Rev. 12:7-9). After being expelled to Earth, Satan will empower his representative Antichrist (Rev 13:2). Those who resist Satan and Antichrist are likely to lose their life, but those who submit will lose out for eternity as they will be cast into the lake of fire. The Battle of Armageddon will be Satans last ditch effort to stop Christ during the end times. The spiritual warfare will come to a head as Antichrist will gather all the armies of Earth to the site of Megiddo, Israel to battle Christ and His forces. The battle will end in a complete rout of Antichrists forces, the casting of Antichrist and the False Prophet in the lake of fire, and the imprisonment of Satan for a 1000 years. Satan will be given one last opportunity after the 1000 years are up to try to stop Christ, but he will fail again. We are approaching the end of a spiritual conflict that began before the creation of Adam and Eve. The road to the end times and the Battle of Armageddon will be a bumpy-one full of many dangers for Christians and Jews. Many will fall away by abandoning their religious beliefs to follow false religious teachings and/or fall for Satans lying signs and wonders. However, my intention is to give you the knowledge so that you will not be one of these people.

5. Messengers of Evil: The Sources I Am Unafraid to Cite

.Know your enemy and know yourself and you can fight a hundred battles without disaster. Sun Tzu, The Art of War.

Introduction Before I go into detail about several prophetic concepts I would like to first take a step back and talk about three individuals whose names you will see a lot in this book. Like the Lord, the forces of evil utilize human messengers to write down their messages and to spread their messages to as many people as possible. Throughout this book I refer to three individuals when I include statements and predictions from the side of evil. These individuals are not kooks as they are the most prominent people that the forces of evil have used to record and spread their messages. Here I provide background about these individuals in case you are unfamiliar with them and show that these individuals are credible to cite.

Madame Helena P. Blavatsky Madame Helena P. Blavatsky is the founder of the New Age in my mind. Blavatsky, born and raised in the Russian Empire, traveled the world seeking greater occult knowledge. While visiting London in 1851, Blavatsky first encountered an Ascended Master who went by the name .Master Morya.. Blavatsky claimed that Morya was the being that she had visions of since her childhood and that Morya told her of the future work that she would perform under his guidance.15 15 Zirkoff, Boris de. .Who is Helena Petrovna Blavatsky?: A Sketch of Her Life and Workf for Theosophy..

Theosophia., Summer 1968. Los Angeles California. Pg 4. http://www.blavatskyarchives.com/longseal.htm. Blavatsky travelled the world for several more years gaining more and more occult knowledge while under the guidance of Morya and other Ascended Masters. In 1875 Blavatsky founded the Theosophical Society, which still remains one of the premiere occult organizations today that supposedly teaches divine secrets. Blavatsky is most well-known for writing the occult books Isis Unveiled and The Secret Doctrine. Of these two books, The Secret Doctrine is perhaps the more important work because it has influenced many prominent people including, Adolf Hitler. In fact, Hitler held Blavatskys book in such high regard that he kept a copy of it in his personal library and kept a copy of the book next to his bed. Blavatskys works appear to be satanically-inspired since she claimed to have received special training from the Ascended Masters and to have received help from them, particularly an Ascended Master named Koot

Hoomi, when writing them.16 In fact, there is a photo of Blavatsky posing with Koot Hoomi and two other Ascended Masters, which can be accessed by clicking this link. 16 Judge, William Q. .Authorship of the Secret Doctrine.. The Path. 1893. http://www.blavatsky.net/theosophy/judge/articles/authorship-of-secret-doctrine.htm. 17 Bailey, Alice. The Unfinished Autobiography. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co., 1951. 36 18 Ibid. 164 19 Bailey, Alice. A Treaty on Cosmic Fire. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 Introduction 20 Bailey, Alice. The Unfinished Autobiography. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co., 1951 168177

Alice Bailey At the age of 15 Alice Bailey was visited by a stranger, an encounter she never would forget: "I was sitting in the drawing room reading. The door opened and in walked a tall man dressed in European clothes...but with a tall turban on his head.... He told me there was some work that it was planned that I could do in the world but that it would entail my changing my disposition very considerably".17 Bailey later identified this stranger as an Ascended Master named Koot Hoomi after she joined the Theosophical Society, the same organization that Blavatsky founded. In 1919 Bailey began authoring books with an Ascended Master named Djwhal Khul. Bailey claimed that the contents of her books were telepathetically dictated by Djwhal Khul (basically, Bailey wrote the words that Djwhal Khul placed into her mind):

"I remain in full control of my senses of perception.... I simply listen and take down the words that I hear and register the thoughts which are dropped one by one into my brain.... I have never changed anything that the Tibetan [Djwhal Khul] has ever given to me.... I do not always understand what is given. I do not always agree. But I record it all honestly

and then discover it does make sense and evokes intuitive response".18

The mental link between Bailey and Djwhal became so strong that the working relationship between them can be characterized as possession. Baileys husband Foster Bailey described the mental link between DK and his wife: "During the long course of the work the minds of the Tibetan and A.A.B [Alice Bailey] became so closely attuned that they were in effect so far as much of the production of the teaching was concerned a joint single projecting mechanism".19 With Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul, Bailey authored 24 books from 1919 to 1949 and founded several occult organizations, including Lucis Trust (formerly known as Lucifer Trust) and the Arcane School. Bailey saw her work as the continuation of Blavatskys work, and her work is the backbone of the teachings of many New Age teachers, including the next person featured in this chapter.20

Benjamin Creme Benjamin Creme is a British artist and official spokesperson for Maitreya, a being he and his predecessors claim is the long-awaited Messiah for Christians, Jews, Muslims, Hindus, and Buddhists and a being who I consider to be the spirit of Antichrist spoken of in 1 John 4. Creme says that he was personally contacted by one of the Ascended Masters and was trained to spread the news that the Maitreya and his Ascended Masters counterparts would appear on Earth soon: .I was contacted by one of these Masters way back in January, 1959, and from then on was prepared and eventually sent into the world to make known the fact of the return to the world of this group of perfected men..21 21 Creme, Benjamin. .Breaking the Biggest Story in History.. 19. Jun. 2006. Last Accessed. Jul. 8. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/background/bcreme/BC_pressconf.htm. 22 Newman, Hannah. .The Rainbow Swastika-The gods of the New Age.. 14. Apr. 2001. Last Accessed Jul. 8. 2009. http://philologos.org/__eb-trs/nac.htm. 23 .Benjamin Crmes Work.. 2 Nov. 2006. Last Accessed. Jul. 8. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/background/bcreme/BC_work.htm. Creme began extensive training in 1972 under the guidance of an unnamed Ascended Master who Creme claims is a being that is so high up the spiritual totem pole that we would be unable to comprehend it.22 By this time Creme already possessed in-depth knowledge of Blavatsky, Bailey, and other occult authors works. However, Cremes training would equip him to be the main man who has deceived millions into believing that Maitreya and the Ascended Masters are benevolent beings. In 1975 Creme claims to begin being overshadowed, a process where a person permits a spirit to temporary possess them, by Maitreya, which continues to this day.23 Since 1977 Creme has preached the message of Maitreya and his Ascended Master

counterparts. He has written several books and runs a UN sponsored organization called Share International. Creme also travels around the world to provide his message to people in person. Two Christians personal experiences attending Cremes lectures demonstrate that Creme is not your ordinary false teacher.

Cremes Unnatural Power A Christian man who goes by the name .Eastwood. infiltrated a lecture held by Creme in Atlanta, Georgia in November 1997. Eastwood listened closely to Cremes entire presentation and concluded that Creme was not a crazy person with a crazy message: .By this point in the evening, I had already decided that Creme was not a kook, nor was he in it for the cash. I truly believed that he truly believed in what he was divulging. I had already been amazed at the beautiful complexity of Maitreya's lies long before I had

decided to go to Atlanta, and I had already attributed them to a mind more sordid and evil than a man's. For me, I was hearing the twisted Gospel of Satan himself, and the lecture had done nothing to dissuade me..24 24 Eastwood. .What I Saw in Atlanta Part 3.. 2005. Jul. 10. Last Accessed. Jul. 8. 2009. http://web.archive.org/web/20070213232626/home.sprynet.com/~eastwood01/hotlant3.ht m. 25 Ibid. 26Ibid. 27 Ibid. 28 Miller, PJ. .Maitreya to Produce a .Christmas Miracle.. 15. Dec. 2009. Last Accessed Jul. 8. 2009. http://endtimespropheticwords.wordpress.com/category/benjamin-creme/.

Creme announced to the audience after the presentation that he would have Maitreya .overshadow. him right in front of the audience. Eastwood paid close attention to audience and Cremes movements and realized that he Creme was paying close attention to him: .It wasn't long at all before I was the object of Benjamin Creme deep, unearthly gaze. His eyes seemed to be looking through the back of my head. I blinked to clear my vision, but it was still there. Perhaps I had been staring too long, and my vision was turning blurry? I glanced away, a few feet from his head, to the potted plant next to him. It was gone. I looked back at Benjamin, and WHAM! There it was again... The man was bathed in a strange glow. It was golden in color, and it extended to my peripheral vision. It was as if there were two layers of images. One was the normal image of a man sitting with his palm facing me, and the second was the same image, yet golden toned and softly defocused. The two images appeared to move against each other slightly in a random pulsing behaviour. The overall look was a bit similar to the old Hollywood pin-up glamour queens of the 1940's... in perfect, yet soft focus..25

Eastwood believes that the most likely explanation for what he saw was that Creme was being the recipient of demonic power: .If this man was receiving the demonic power right in front of me, that was to be the best explanation available. More testing confirmed it... the glow was real,

and it came out of Benjamin Creme..26 Finally, Eastwood ends his story with this sentence summarizing his impressions of the unforgettable experience: .This is real. I still don't know what it is for sure, but it is very, very real..27 Constance Cumbey is a Christian lawyer and author of books about dangers of the New Age Movement. In a recent blog entry, Cumbey reminded readers that she personally attended one of Cremes lectures nearly 30 years ago: .I personally witnessed a large Detroit audience of hundreds of relatively sophisticated and even wealthy people go under Benjamin Cremes spell when he was promoting this same .Christ. [Maitreya] in 1981..28 Cumbey also wrote about her experience extensively in her book The Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow. In her book, Cumbey noted the evil presence she felt at the lecture when she wrote:

.With a wave of the hand, Creme seemed to instantly mesmerize a vast majority of the crowd. As he spoke, the audience's collective trance deepened..29 29 Cumbey, Constance. The Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow. Lafayette: Huntington House Publishers 1985: 94 30 Ibid. 94 31 Miller, PJ. .Maitreya to Produce a .Christmas Miracle.. 15. Dec. 2009. Last Accessed Jul. 8. 2009. http://endtimespropheticwords.wordpress.com/category/benjamin-creme/. 32 Ibid. 33 .The Star Sign.. 9. Jun. 2009. Last Accessed Jul. 8. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/maitreya/Ma_starsign.htm.

.Clearly Creme had a power that was not his own - an evil, hypnotic presence..30

Near the end of the appearance, Creme instructed the people to recite the Great Invocation, a New Age prayer that calls upon Maitreya to appear, as he prepared to have Maitreya overshadow him right in front of the audience. Unlike Eastwood, Cumbey recited portions of the Lords Prayer (Psalm 23) aloud and said .May Jesus Christ return to earth and end the evil present in this room tonight. as the people around them finished their prayer..31 After finishing her prayer, .according to Cumbey, the =spookiest thing of the evening happened actually it didnt happen. Creme .waited and waited;. but, the =overshadowing never occurred. He finally .dismissed the crowd and said, =That will be all..32 Creme and Maitreya may be powerful, but Cumbey demonstrated that they are not as powerful as Jesus Christ. Cumbey summarized her impressions from the experience when she wrote: .Only upon witnessing that did I have any notion as to how Hitler had pulled off his bewitching of the German public: mass hypnosis

A final indication that Creme is not your ordinary false teacher can be seen with an event that is currently ongoing. Back in December 2008, Creme proclaimed that there would be a star seen around the world that would shine day and night. He claimed that the star would be a sign of the coming emergence Maitreya as a player on the world stage. In fact, he compared it to the Star that the three wise men saw during the night when Jesus was born.33 When I read this I was very skeptical that such a thing would appear. However, soon after the announcement a uniquelooking .star. was reported in the night time sky in Europe followed by scattered reports of a star shining during the day. In the following months the .star. was seen across the planet day and night, including in California. The various reports of the .star. made me wonder whether it was really a star or something else. The .star. was reported to not flash, but change its level of brightness. In addition, the stars colors were known to change and that the star was often seen moving in the sky. The following link features more background information/propaganda from Cremes website about the star and documented reports and photos of .star. sighting. Around March I

concluded that this .star. was really a UFO. In May Creme admitted that the entity up in the sky really isnt a star, but a UFO. In fact, Creme admitted that there were four UFOs creating the star sign:

.There is no pretence. Knowing the nature of the =star, as four gigantic spaceships from several planets of our System, I had great difficulty in deciding just how to present it to the general public and media. I decided to follow my Masters example. He had called it a .star-like luminary of brilliant power., and related it to the =star which led the =three wise men to the birthplace of Jesus. Some of us know that that =star was a spacecraft too, but is accepted by millions as a miracle star..

.It was just before Christmas so I called it a =Christmas star, sure that that would be more interesting and magnetic than a prediction about a UFO. In Britain at least, people are much more skeptical of UFOs than in the USA, for example. Of course, at each lecture I make it clear that what looks like a star is, in fact, one of four huge spacecraft...

The star sign is another clear indication that Creme is truly what he proclaims to be: a spokesman for Maitreya and the other Ascended Masters. Recall that Ephesians 2:2 says that the Devil is .the ruler of the authority of the air. so he has a lot of say over what appears in the sky. The fact that UFOs posing as stars appeared in the sky shortly after Creme predicted they would show up makes it clear that the Devil approves of Cremes activities and is supporting him with his resources.

Why Cite These Individuals? I demonstrated that Blavatsky, Bailey, and Creme are three major messengers of evil. However, why include quotes from these messengers in my book when the Devil is the father of lies? The reason is that I believe there is some truthful information embedded in these messengers web of lies

I suspect that Satan has already devised a plan for what things he wants to achieve and to implement in the future because he will only have a very short period of time to fool people on Earth, implement certain policies, and to kill those who oppose him. Without a plan already in place, Satan will unlikely be able to maximize the number of people he fools and the number of opponents he kills in the limited time he will be given. I believe a large portion of Satans future plans have been leaked by fallen angels to the world through the messages they have given to a few, select channelers and occultists like the

three people I mentioned here. The ordinary person will be unable to undercover many relevant details of the plan because the ordinary person does not have a command of Bible prophecy to know what things to look for. It was somewhat difficult for me to undercover many details of the plan because the messages that the fallen angels have given to channelers and occultists are filled with many deceptions and lies. However, I believe there are some truthful aspects to the messages given because there are some things described in them that matchup with what is prophesized in the Bible. I suspect that Satan has allowed his angels to reveal some truthful information to people so people receiving this information can prepare the world (i.e. create political and economic rules and institutions) that Satan/Antichrist will need to quickly establish control of the world. In addition, Satans angels have to tell some truth since people would stop believing their messages if they continuously told lies to them-they would lose complete credibility. A historical analogy that I believe matches the deception strategy of Satan is the major deception that the Allies pulled on the Nazis during World War 2. The Allies utilized German double agents to fool the Nazis into believing that they had a reliable source working for them. These double agents retained their credibility with Nazi intelligence by tipping them off with truthful information, which at times included sensitive information about Allie plans. These agents tried to retain their credibility with Nazi intelligence up until D-Day. As D-Day approached, these double agents reported to the Nazis false information about Allie plans to open up a second front. The unsuspecting Nazis believed these double agents and had positioned their main forces at Calais instead of Normandy based on this information combined with other deceptions that the Allies had pulled (such as creating a fictitious army). By the time the Nazis realized that they had been double-crossed it was too late. In essence, Satan is having his angels transmit some truthful information to people in an effort to double-cross those who were

receptive to this information during the end times as the Allies double-crossed Nazi intelligence to deceive the Nazis from guessing the correct location of D-Day. With this in mind, I will now begin to discuss specific prophetic concepts and provide you information and insights about the future and end times that you wont hear in church.

6. The Blessings and Curses

Introduction The people of Israel are at the center of the spiritual conflict. Satan wants to destroy the Jewish peoples relationship with God while God wants His people to be obedient. Before the people of Israel entered the promise land they were given a choice between obeying and staying faithful to the Lord, which would result in them receiving blessings, or disobeying which would result in them being cursed.

The Blessings The reward for obedience would be great for Israel. The following table lists some of the benefits Israel would receive for remaining obedient to God. Benefit Verse Timely Rain Leviticus 26:4 Plentiful Food and Bumper Crops Leviticus 26:4-5 Peace and Protection from Enemies Leviticus 26-6-7 A Robust Population Leviticus 26:9 Having Gods presence in the land Leviticus 26:11-12

The Curses . In contrast, Israel would receive punishment each time they disobeyed. The following table lists just some of the curses Israel would receive if they disobeyed God. Israel would not face all of these curses at one time, but .the curses become progressively worse as Israel permits herself to be deceived by Satan and persists to greater disobedience and fails to return to God in obedience..34 34 Kampen, Robert Van. The Sign. (Updated Edition). Wheaton: Crossway Books, 1999: 79

Curse Verse Enemies will pillage Israels food supply Leviticus 26:16-17 Poor crop yields and famine Leviticus 26:17-18 Wild animal attacks Leviticus 26:22 Pestilence and devastating enemy attacks Leviticus 26:25-26 Expulsion from the land of Israel Leviticus 26:38-39

The people of Israel were warned several times by several prophets to repent and change their ways and were punished each time they ignored the warnings. Despite all the punishment the people of Israel endured, they never changed their ways. As a result, they received the final curse that called for the Jews to be dispersed from their land and spread throughout the earth. This dispersal came in 70AD, and the period when the Jews were living outside of Israel is known as the Diaspora. After the final curse is completed the Jews would be brought back to their land where they would have control of it

o Deu 30:1 And it shall come to pass, when all these things are come upon thee, the blessing and the curse, which I have set before thee, and thou shalt call them to mind among all the nations, whither the LORD thy God hath driven thee, o Deu 30:2 And shalt return unto the LORD thy God, and shalt obey his voice according to all that I command thee this day, thou and thy children, with all thine heart, and with all thy soul; o Deu 30:3 That then the LORD thy God will turn thy captivity, and have compassion upon thee, and will return and gather thee from all the nations, whither the LORD thy God hath scattered thee. o Deu 30:4 If any of thine be driven out unto the outmost parts of heaven, from thence will the LORD thy God gather thee, and from thence will he fetch thee: o Deu 30:5 And the LORD thy God will bring thee into the land which thy fathers possessed, and thou shalt possess it; and he will do thee good, and multiply thee above thy fathers.

The return of Jews to the land of Israel began in the early 20th century, but did not happen in mass until the recreation of the state of Israel in 1948. Therefore, the final curse that began in 70AD concluded in 1948. The next part of the prophecy calls the Jews that returned to a restored Israel to undergo a period of transformation where they will be judged or purged during the end time.

o Deu 30:6 And the LORD thy God will circumcise thine heart, and the heart of thy seed, to love the LORD thy God with all thine heart, and with all thy soul, that thou mayest live.

o Eze 34:16 I will seek that which was lost, and bring again that which was driven away, and will bind up that which was broken, and will strengthen that which was sick: but I will destroy the fat and the strong; I will feed them with judgment.

o Eze 36:24 For I will take you from among the heathen, and gather you out of all countries, and will bring you into your own land. o Eze 36:25 Then will I sprinkle clean water upon you, and ye shall be clean: from all your filthiness, and from all your idols, will I cleanse you. o Eze 36:26 A new heart also will I give you, and a new spirit will I put within you: and I will take away the stony heart out of your flesh, and I will give you an heart of flesh.

When the purging and cleansing of the Jewish people is complete God will inflict the curses on Israels enemies.

o Deu 30:7 And the LORD thy God will put all these curses upon thine enemies, and on them that hate thee, which persecuted thee.

He will also gather the Jews who will be dispersed from Israel during the end times and bring

them back in the land where they will be peace again in Israel forever.

o Eze 34:12 As a shepherd seeketh out his flock in the day that he is among his sheep that are scattered; so will I seek out my sheep, and will deliver them out of all places where they have been scattered in the cloudy and dark day.

o Deu 30:8 And thou shalt return and obey the voice of the LORD, and do all his commandments which I command thee this day. o Deu 30:9 And the LORD thy God will make thee plenteous in every work of thine hand, in the fruit of thy body, and in the fruit of thy cattle, and in the fruit of thy land, for good: for the LORD will again rejoice over thee for good, as he rejoiced over thy fathers.

Although the people of Israel have been very stubborn, the Lord has a plan to get His people to become obedient, and the time to finish the implementation of His plan is approaching.

7. The 70 Weeks of Daniel

God gave the prophecies, not to gratify men's curiosity by enabling them to fore know things, but that after they were fulfilled they might be interpreted by the event, and His own providence, not the interpreters, be thereby manifested to the world.-Sir Isaac Newton

Introduction The 70 Weeks of Daniel is one of the most important prophetic concepts that you need to understand. Daniels 70 weeks is a prophecy that is almost fulfilled and will not be completely fulfilled until the end times. Understanding this prophecy will not only give you key understanding about the end times, but also a realization of how powerful and precise Biblical prophecy is. In this chapter I show that Daniels first 69 weeks have been precise to the exact date. However, the argument that I present significantly deviates from the flawed works of the past. I not only present the weakness of others works, but a new interpretation that makes the prophecys timeframe work.

The Vision As Daniel prayed to God he was interrupted by the angel Gabriel. Gabriel told Daniel that he will help him understand the vision that he will present him.

o Dan 9:20 And whiles I was speaking, and praying, and confessing my sin and the sin of my people Israel, and presenting my supplication before the LORD my God for the holy mountain of my God; o Dan 9:21 Yea, whiles I was speaking in prayer, even the man Gabriel, whom I had seen in the vision at the beginning, being caused to fly swiftly, touched me about the time of the evening oblation.

o Dan 9:22 And he informed me, and talked with me, and said, O Daniel, I am now come forth to give thee skill and understanding. o Dan 9:23 At the beginning of thy supplications the commandment came forth, and I am come to shew thee; for thou art greatly beloved: therefore understand the matter, and consider the vision.

Gabriel told Daniel that 70 weeks have been given to the people of Israel and the city of Jerusalem to end their disobedience, atone for their sins, and to be saved.

o Dan 9:24 Seventy weeks are determined upon thy people and upon thy holy city, to finish the transgression, and to make an end of sins, and to make reconciliation for iniquity, and to bring in everlasting righteousness, and to seal up the vision and prophecy, and to anoint the most Holy.

The First 69 Weeks of Daniel Gabriel provided Daniel great detail about the first 69 weeks. The first week will begin when the call comes to rebuild Jerusalem. The rebuilding process will last for seven weeks, and after that there will be an additional 62 weeks which will end when the Messiah (Christ) is .cut off.. This timeframe clearly has been fulfilled as Christ was crucified and ascended to heaven nearly 2,000 years ago.

o Dan 9:25 Know therefore and understand, that from the going forth of the commandment to restore and to build Jerusalem unto the Messiah the Prince shall be seven weeks, and threescore and two weeks: the street shall be built again, and the wall, even in troublous times. o Dan 9:26 And after threescore and two weeks shall Messiah be cut off, but not for himself: and the people of the prince that shall come shall destroy the city and the sanctuary; and the end thereof shall be with a flood, and unto the end of the war desolations are determined.

Jerusalem had long been destroyed by the time Daniel received the vision (6th century

B.C.). The call to rebuild Jerusalem that Gabriel spoke of came in the month of Nisan during Artaxerxes Longimanuss 20th year of the reign.

o Neh 2:1 And it came to pass in the month Nisan, in the twentieth year of Artaxerxes the king, that wine was before him: and I took up the wine, and gave it unto the king. Now I had not been beforetime sad in his presence. o Neh 2:5 And I said unto the king, If it please the king, and if thy servant have found favour in thy sight, that thou wouldest send me unto Judah, unto the city of my fathers' sepulchres, that I may build it.

Most scholars agree that 20th year of Artaxerxes was either in 445BC or 444BC while Christs crucifixion occurred between 26-36AD; corresponding to the reign of Pontius Pilate.

The Prophetic Week Clearly Gabriel did not mean 69 literal weeks where each week is 7 days in length. The Hebrew translation of the word .week. in Daniel is sha^bu^a., which actually means .seven.. Therefore we can also refer to Daniels prophecy as .the 70 sevens.. The length of a prophetic week can be determined by analyzing the structure of the 70th week of Daniel. Daniels 70th week is divided into two halves. In the first half Antichrist will make and keep a covenant with Israel, but will break it halfway through the seven.

o Dan 9:27 And he shall confirm the covenant with many for one week: and in the midst of the week he shall cause the sacrifice and the oblation to cease, and for the overspreading of abominations he shall make it desolate, even until the consummation, and that determined shall be poured upon the desolate.

The 2nd half of the week is a period of severe persecution. This period of time will last for .time, times, and a half.. The Hebrew word for time is .mo^.e^d., which also can mean .a year.. Nearly every commentator who analyzes Daniels 70 week prophecy agrees that .time, times, and an half. means 3 years. Therefore a prophetic week is a seven year period.

o Dan 12:7 And I heard the man clothed in linen, which was upon the waters of the river, when he held up his right hand and his left hand unto heaven, and sware by him that liveth for ever that it shall be for a time, times, and an half; and when he shall have accomplished to scatter the power of the holy people, all these things shall be finished.

o Dan 7:25 And he shall speak great words against the most High, and shall wear out the saints of the most High, and think to change times and laws: and they shall be given into his hand until a time and times and the dividing of time.

In Revelation 12:14 we learn that 3 prophetic years is the equivalent of 1260 days. If we divide 1260 days by 3 years we will find that a prophetic year is 360 days long.

o Rev 12:14 And to the woman were given two wings of a great eagle, that she might fly into the wilderness, into her place, where she is nourished for a time, and times, and half a time, from the face of the serpent.

o Rev 12:6 And the woman fled into the wilderness, where she hath a place prepared of God, that they should feed her there a thousand two hundred and threescore days.

Similarly, 3 years is also defined as 42 months since seven years is the equivalent to 84 months. Therefore a prophetic month is 30 days long since 1260 days divided by 42 months equals 30 days/month.

o Rev 11:2 But the court which is without the temple leave out, and measure it not; for it is given unto the Gentiles: and the holy city shall they tread under foot forty and two months. o Rev 11:3 And I will give power unto my two witnesses, and they shall prophesy a thousand two hundred and threescore days, clothed in sackcloth.

Summary: . 7 Prophetic Years in a Prophetic Week . 360 Days in a Prophetic Year . 30 Days a Prophetic Month, . 12 Months a Prophetic Year . 30Days/Month x 42 Months = 1260 Days

Attempts to Verify the Prophecy Many attempts have been made in the last several centuries to demonstrate the preciseness of the first 69 weeks of Daniels prophecy. Two of the most famous attempts were a study done by Sir Robert Anderson and another by Harold Hohner.

Sir Robert Anderson Sir Robert Anderson was an 19th Century English pastor who wrote about the coming of Christ in his book The Coming Prince. Anderson provided great insight about the 70 week prophecy, including instructions on how to calculate a prophetic year. He set March 14, 445BC as the start date of the 1st week of Daniel, which meant that April 1, 32AD was the end date of the 69th week. He claimed that 32AD was likely the end year since Passover occurred on a

Thursday. Furthermore, he wrote that Palm Sunday, which commemorates Christs entry into Jerusalem, occurred on April 6. Unfortunately, Andersons argument falls apart when you consider how Nisan, the month of the Hebrew calendar when Passover falls on, 32AD was really laid out. Palm Sunday actually occurred on April 8 while Passover was on Monday. A year that has a nonThursday/Friday Passover cannot be the year of Christs crucifixion because it contradicts the biblical text, which will be discussed in more detail soon. Despite these errors, Andersons work provided a strong foundation for others to build on.

Harold Hohner Harold Hohner was a professor of Biblical Studies at Dallas Seminary when he wrote his acclaimed book Chronological Aspects of the Life of Christ. Hohner understood that Andersons end date did not comply with a Friday crucifixion date, so he aimed for 33AD, which could support a Friday crucifixion. He moved the start date of the 1st week of Daniel to March 4, 444BC, which meant that March 30, 33AD was his estimated end of Daniels 69th week. Although March 30, 33AD was a Monday and not the crucifixion date, Hohner admitted that the start of the 1st week of Daniel could had been later, which would change his end date. Nevertheless, Hohner showed that Daniels 69 weeks could fit into a timeframe that included the 20th year of Longimanus and a year that could support a Friday crucifixion date Although Hohners study is a significant improvement over Andersons, his predicted start date of the 1st week of Daniel is impossible. The problem with March 4, 444BC is that it was not in the Hebrew month of Nisan! 444 BC was the the 11th year of the 19 year cycle on the Hebrew calendar, which meant it was a leap year. As a consequence, there was an additional month added before the month of Nisan, so March 4, 444BC was actually start of the Adar II.35 The only source that Hohner cited to .defend. his start date, Herman H. Goldstines New and

Full Moons, 1001 B.C. to A.D. 1651, listed the Gregorian dates when a new moon was present. Although a Hebrew month began at the appearance of the new moon, Goldstine did not indicate which Jewish month it was when each new moon appeared. 35 The first day of Nisan was not until April 3 of that year. 36Walker, John. Calendar Converter. 2006. 1 Aug. 2006. http://www.fourmilab.ch/documents/calendar/.

My Solution to the Problem I used Fourmilabs calendar converter software36, which is the in public domain, to calculate the start and end dates of Daniels first 69 weeks. I made calculations using the Julian calendar system rather than the Gregorian calendar system, which is the system we use. The

Julian calendar system was first used in the Roman Empire and is still utilized by astronomers today to perform arithmetic with dates.37 It is an effective and efficient system to perform arithmetic with dates because each date is represented by a number. A Julian day is approximately the same length as a Gregorian day, so there will be little problem transitioning from Gregorian to Julian days (and vice versa). 37 Ibid.

Fourmilab also gives a corresponding Hebrew date for each Julian date that is shown. Therefore, I know the actual date on the Hebrew calendar when the 1st week of Daniel began and the 69th week ended. The Gregorian representation on B.C. years will be a year ahead of what it should be since the software accounts for a year 0. In reality there was never a year .0. as we went from 2 B.C., 1B.C. to 1A.D. 2A.D... Before I show the results of the calculation, here are the conditions that the calculation must comply with. A deeper discussion of these conditions is available in the appendix. . The start of 1st Week must be in the month of Nisan in either 445 or 444BC . A crucifixion year between: 26-36AD . A Crucifixion date that falls on the 14th of Nisan and that falls on a Friday . The End of 69th Week must be 40 Days after the resurrection date . These calculation should be able to be replicated by others

To begin the actual calculation I converted the 69 prophetic weeks into prophetic days. First I converted 69 prophetic weeks into prophetic years and then prophetic years into prophetic days. The key assumption I made is to equate the length of a Hebrew day to a prophetic day

Calculation of # of Days in 69 Prophetic Weeks . One Prophetic Week = 7 Prophetic Years

. One Prophetic Year = 360 Days . 69 Weeks of Seven Prophetic Years = 483 Prophetic Years . 69 Weeks X 360 Days X 7 = 173,880 Days38

The only realistic year among the three that had Nisan 14 on a Friday from 26-36AD (26, 33, and 36AD) that could comply with the conditions set earlier is 33AD. In 33AD Nisan 14 occurred on April 1 on the Gregorian calendar. Next add two days to get Sunday Nisan 16 (April 3), which was the resurrection date. Afterwards add 39 more days to get Iyyar 26 (May 13), which was Christs ascension date. Finally employ Forumilab to subtract 173380 days to find the start date of the 1st week of Daniel.

The 69 Week Timeframe (Arithmetic Dates are in Parentheses) Event Our Calendar Hebrew Calendar Julian Calendar Crucifixion April 1, 33AD Nisan 14, 3793 April 3, 33AD (1733203.5) Resurrection April 3, 33AD Nisan 16, 3793 April 5, 33AD Ascension May 13, 33AD Iyyar 26, 3793 May 15, 33AD (1733245.5) Start of the 1st Week April 19, 444 BC39 Nisan 23, 3317 April 24, 444 BC (1559365.5)

Christ was .cut off. on May 13, 33A.D., which was 483 prophetic years or exactly 69 prophetic weeks after the decree came to rebuild Jerusalem on April, 19 444BC late in the month of Nisan. This is the only timeframe that truly satisfies the conditions that were established by the text. The only way to fit Daniels 69 week timeframe is to not claim that Christs crucifixion date was the end of the 69th week. This is a bittersweet tradeoff because we can no longer point to Daniel and claim that the Bible predicted that Christ the Messiah would be crucified at the end of Daniels 69th week. However, we can still say that Jesus is the Messiah because the prophecy refers to him as having that role. In return we gain precision that reveals Christs true crucifixion date and fits Daniels 69 week timeframe so we can dispel critics about the prophecys accuracy. In addition, we can now point out that Jesus is the Son of God since Daniels 69th week ended on the day he was taken away to Heaven. The next accurate prediction of Daniel called for the destruction of the city and the temple of Jerusalem. This was achieved by the Romans in 70AD.

o Dan 9:26 And after threescore and two weeks shall Messiah be cut off, but not for himself: and the people of the prince that shall come shall destroy the city and the sanctuary; and the end thereof shall be with a flood, and unto the end of the war desolations are determined.

The 70th of Week of Daniel The 70th week of Daniel is a period that is to come in the future. It is an extremely

important period because end time events will occur during this time. As was mentioned earlier, this final seven year period will start out .good. for Israel because a covenant with Antichrist will be upheld. However exactly halfway through the week, at 3 years, the covenant will be

broken and Israel will be in big trouble. We will see later that the Jews will be scattered by Antichrist.

o Dan 9:27 And he shall confirm the covenant with many for one week: and in the midst of the week he shall cause the sacrifice and the oblation to cease, and for the overspreading of abominations he shall make it desolate, even until the consummation, and that determined shall be poured upon the desolate.

A man clothed in linen later explains to Daniel that the power that scattered the Jews halfway through the 70th week will last for another 3 years, or a time (year) + times (two years) + half (half a year). Once this is done the desolator (Antichrist) will meet his fate.

o Dan 12:6 And one said to the man clothed in linen, which was upon the waters of the river, How long shall it be to the end of these wonders? o Dan 12:7 And I heard the man clothed in linen, which was upon the waters of the river, when he held up his right hand and his left hand unto heaven, and sware by him that liveth for ever that it shall be for a time, times, and an half; and when he shall have accomplished to scatter the power of the holy people, all these things shall be finished.

Appendix: The Solution Necessary Conditions After a few years of reflection and countless hours of relentless calculation, I believe that I am the first to show a calculation that precisely proves of the accuracy of Daniels first 69 weeks. My calculation is so precise that it reveals the start and end dates of Daniels first 69 weeks while fitting the timeframe within a set of limitations established by the biblical text.

Before I perform the calculation I discuss the conditions that the calculation must comply with.

Start of the 1st Week Timeframe As was mentioned earlier, most scholars agree that the call to rebuild Jerusalem either came in 445 or 444BC during the 20th year of Longimanuss reign.

Start of 1st Week in the Month of Nisan The call to rebuild Jerusalem during Longimanuss 20th year came during the Jewish month of Nisan.

o Neh 2:1 And it happened in the month Nisan, in the twentieth year of Artaxerxes the king, that wine was before him. And I took the wine and gave to the king. And I had never been sad to his face.

Crucifixion Timeframe: Pontius Pilate was in charge of Jerusalem at the time of Christs crucifixion. Pilate was in control of Jerusalem from 26-36AD, so it is within this ten year timeframe that the crucifixion date must occur.

Crucifixion on the 14th of Nisan If we know when Christs crucifixion occurred we can get a general timeframe of when the 69th week ended. The precise date that the crucifixion occurred has been debated for centuries. The overwhelming evidence that I present shows that crucifixion of Christ came on the 14th of Nisan; hours after he attended the Passover Seder. However, the actual date that Nisan 14 occurs changes every year because the Hebrew year differs in length as part of a 19 year cycle. There are seven leap years that include a 13th month which is 30 days long to correct for the movement of the sun. There are only three years during Pilates ten year reign of Jerusalem when Nisan 14 occurred on a Friday, 26AD, 33AD, and 36AD.4041 40 26AD Friday; 27AD Wednesday; 28AD Monday; 29AD Saturday; 30AD Wednesday; 31AD Monday; 32AD Monday; 33AD Friday; 34AD Monday; 35AD Monday; 36AD Friday 41 Kaluach-Hebrew/Civil Calendars. 5 Aug. 2006. 9 Mar. 2004. http://www.kaluach.org/Kaluach3. There is debate whether the Passover Seder is eaten early on Nisan 14 or during late in the day. This distinction is important because the answer will determine if Christ was crucified

on Nisan 14 during Passover (Lev 23:5, Num 28:16, Num 33:3-4) or Nisan 15 during the Feast of Unleavened Bread. To answer this question we must understand that a Jewish day does not start nor ends at the same time ours does. The Jewish day begins at sunset and lasts until the next sunset. Leviticus 23:32 describes the Jewish Sabbath as being from Friday evening to Saturday evening.

o Lev 23:32 It shall be unto you a sabbath of rest, and ye shall afflict your souls: in the ninth day of the month at even, from even unto even, shall ye celebrate your sabbath.

The Bible clearly instructs the Jews to eat the Passover Seder early on Nisan 14. The Jews were instructed to sacrifice the Passover lamb after the sun had set.

o Deu 16:6 But at the place which the LORD thy God shall choose to place his name in, there thou shalt sacrifice the passover at even, at the going down of the sun, at the season that thou camest forth out of Egypt.

o Deu 16:1 Observe the month of Abib, and keep the passover unto the LORD thy God: for in the month of Abib the LORD thy God brought thee forth out of Egypt by night.

o Exo 12:5 Your lamb shall be without blemish, a male of the first year: ye shall take it out from the sheep, or from the goats: o Exo 12:6 And ye shall keep it up until the fourteenth day of the same month: and the whole assembly of the congregation of Israel shall kill it in the evening.

o Num 9:5 And they kept the passover on the fourteenth day of the first month at even in the wilderness of Sinai: according to all that the LORD commanded Moses, so did the children of Israel.

o Jos 5:10 And the children of Israel encamped in Gilgal, and kept the passover on the fourteenth day of the month at even in the plains of Jericho.

The Passover Seder could not be eaten late on Nisan 14 because the Lord instructed the Jews to

eat it at night. Since a new Hebrew day begins at sunset and ends at sunset (the next .day.) the only way that the Seder could be held eaten without contradicting Gods laws was to eat shortly after the Passover lamb is sacrificed. In fact, the Jews were instructed to eat the Passover lamb the same night it was killed.

o Exo 12:8 And they shall eat the flesh in that night, roast with fire, and unleavened bread; and with bitter herbs they shall eat it.

Passover is the first of two major celebrations that occur within an eight-day span on the Hebrew calendar. The Feast of Unleavened Bread begins just one day after Passover. The Feast of the Unleavened Bread is a celebration which lasts for seven days. The first and seventh days are holy days where there will be no work done.

o Lev 23:6 And on the fifteenth day of the same month is the feast of unleavened bread unto the LORD: seven days ye must eat unleavened bread. o Lev 23:7 In the first day ye shall have an holy convocation: ye shall do no servile work therein. o Lev 23:8 But ye shall offer an offering made by fire unto the LORD seven days: in the seventh day is an holy convocation: ye shall do no servile work therein.

o Num 28:17 And in the fifteenth day of this month is the feast: seven days shall unleavened bread be eaten. o Num 28:18 In the first day shall be an holy convocation; ye shall do no manner of servile work therein:

The proximity of the Feast of Unleavened Bread and Passover has psychologically linked these distinct holidays together into a single, eight-day long celebration: .Because the Feast of Unleavened Bread (a seven-day holiday) begins the day after Passover (a one-day holiday), often the two holidays are blurred together and collectively referred to as .the eight days of Passover.. In days of the Second Temple (in Jesuss time), it was also common to call all eight days the Feasts of Unleavened Bread..42 One possible reason Jews have blended these two holidays together is that they are instructed to eat unleavened bread for eight nights: unleavened bread on the night of Passover and seven consecutive days afterward. 42 Howard, Kevin., and Marvin Rosenthal. The Feasts of the Lord. Orlando: Zions Hope, Inc, 1997. 65

o Exo 12:18 In the first month, on the fourteenth day of the month at even, ye shall eat unleavened bread, until the one and twentieth day of the month at even.

The psychological link between the Feast Unleavened Bread and Passover can also been seen in both the Old and New Testament. In Deuteronomy 16:1-3 the time of Passover is broadened into a period that encompasses the Feast of Unleavened Bread and the regular Passover celebration.

o Deu 16:1 Observe the month of Abib, and keep the passover unto the LORD thy God: for in the month of Abib the LORD thy God brought thee forth out of Egypt by night. o Deu 16:2 Thou shalt therefore sacrifice the passover unto the LORD thy God, of the flock and the herd, in the place which the LORD shall choose to place his name there. o Deu 16:3 Thou shalt eat no leavened bread with it; seven days shalt thou eat unleavened bread therewith, even the bread of affliction; for thou camest forth out of the land of Egypt in haste: that thou mayest remember the day when thou camest forth out of the land of Egypt all the days of thy life.

In Luke 2:41-2:43 the Feast of the Unleavened Bread is called the .Feast of the Passover., which lasted for several days.

o Luk 2:41 Now his parents went to Jerusalem every year at the feast of the passover. o Luk 2:42 And when he was twelve years old, they went up to Jerusalem after the custom of the feast. o Luk 2:43 And when they had fulfilled the days, as they returned, the child Jesus tarried behind in Jerusalem; and Joseph and his mother knew not of it.

In Acts 12 the term .Feast of Unleavened Bread. is used interchangeably with .Passover..

o Act 12:1 Now about that time Herod the king stretched forth his hands to vex certain of the church. o Act 12:2 And he killed James the brother of John with the sword. o Act 12:3 And because he saw it pleased the Jews, he proceeded further to take Peter also. (Then were the days of unleavened bread.) o Act 12:4 And when he had apprehended him, he put him in prison, and delivered him to four quaternions of soldiers to keep him; intending after Easter to bring him forth to the people.

Understanding the psychological association of the Feast of the Unleavened Bread and Passover as a single celebration is important because it helps harmonize potential contradictions in the chronologies of Matthew, Mark, and Luke. Matthew 26:17 blends these two holidays together when he wrote that it was the .first day of the Feast of Unleavened Bread.. It is .the first day. in the sense that it is the first day (Passover) in the .eight days of the Feast of

Unleavened Bread.. Matthew 26:17-19 indicates that this .first day. is indeed Passover as his disciples asked Christ where they should prepare the Passover meal.

o Mat 26:17 Now the first day of the feast of unleavened bread the disciples came to Jesus, saying unto him, Where wilt thou that we prepare for thee to eat the passover? o Mat 26:18 And he said, Go into the city to such a man, and say unto him, The Master saith, My time is at hand; I will keep the passover at thy house with my disciples. o Mat 26:19 And the disciples did as Jesus had appointed them; and they made ready the passover.

Luke and Mark provide additional detail to support that the first day of the Feast of Unleavened Bread is the one-day Passover holiday. On this day the Passover lamb was to be killed, which as was ordained by Exodus 12:6 to occur on the 14th of Nisan.

o Mar 14:12 And the first day of unleavened bread, when they killed the passover, his disciples said unto him, Where wilt thou that we go and prepare that thou mayest eat the passover?

o Luk 22:7 Then came the day of unleavened bread, when the passover must be killed.

o Exo 12:6 And ye shall keep it up until the fourteenth day of the same month: and the whole assembly of the congregation of Israel shall kill it in the evening.

Also understanding how John uses specific language helps to clarify potential contradictions within his and other gospels chronology. At first glance, John 18:28 indicates that the Caiaphas had not ate their Passover Seder yet.

o Joh 18:28 Then led they Jesus from Caiaphas unto the hall of judgment: and it was early; and they themselves went not into the judgment hall, lest they should be defiled; but that they might eat the passover.

We easily can misinterpret John 18:28 and conclude that the crucifixion either occurred on Nisan

13 or near the start of Nisan 15, which would contradict the instructions given to the Jews and the accounts given in the other gospels. When comparing Johns references to Passover in 13:2 and 18:28 we find an important distinction which tells us when he refers to the Passover Feastthe Feast of the Unleavened Bread-and the Passover Seder. The context that Passover is used in John 18:28 is one of .eight other examples of =pasxa in John's Gospel and in all of them the feast is meant, not the supper. If we follow John's use of the word, it is the feast here, not the meal of John 13:2 which was the regular Passover meal. This interpretation keeps John in harmony with the Synoptics (Matthew, Mark, and Luke)..43 Therefore, the Caiaphas were not concerned about eating the Passover lamb, but worried about eating the Passover Feast, that is, the Feast of the Unleavened Bread. 43 Robertsons Word Pictures of the New Testament. John 18:28 6 Aug. 2006. 6 Aug. 2006. http://www.studylight.org/com/rwp/view.cgi?book=joh&chapter=18&verse=28.

Since it was the day of Passover, Peter and John asked Christ where he wanted them to prepare the Passover meal. Jesus and his apostles ate a Passover Seder after the meal was prepared since the Passover lamb had to be eaten the same night.

o Luk 22:8 And he sent Peter and John, saying, Go and prepare us the passover, that we may eat. o Luk 22:9 And they said unto him, Where wilt thou that we prepare?

At the Last Supper Christ told his apostles that this Passover meal will be his last until the kingdom of God is established.

o Luk 22:15 And he said unto them, With desire I have desired to eat this passover with you before I suffer: o Luk 22:16 For I say unto you, I will not any more eat thereof, until it be fulfilled in the kingdom of God.

Another indication that crucifixion occurred on Nisan 14 was that Pontus Pilate invoked a Passover custom when he offered to release Christ.

o Joh 18:39 But ye have a custom, that I should release unto you one at the passover: will ye therefore that I release unto you the King of the Jews? o Joh 18:40 Then cried they all again, saying, Not this man, but Barabbas. Now Barabbas was a robber.

o Mar 15:6 Now at that feast he released unto them one prisoner, whomsoever they desired.

o Mar 15:7 And there was one named Barabbas, which lay bound with them that had made insurrection with him, who had committed murder in the insurrection.

A final indicator that Nisan 15 could not have been the crucifixion date is that business transactions were conducted on the date of Christs crucifixion. The night of the Last Supper Christ sent Judas to purchase food for the upcoming Passover meal.

o Joh 13:29 For some of them thought, because Judas had the bag, that Jesus had said unto him, Buy those things that we have need of against the feast; or, that he should give something to the poor.

It was illegal in Israel to perform commerce on a holy day such as the official first day of the Feast of Unleavened Bread.

o Neh 10:31 And if the people of the land bring ware or any victuals on the sabbath day to sell, that we would not buy it of them on the sabbath, or on the holy day: and that we would leave the seventh year, and the exaction of every debt.

Crucifixion Date on a Friday The crucifixion occurred just before the coming of the Sabbath Day, which began Friday night since a Hebrew day began at sunset. Luke 23:54 shows the crucifixion date was on a Friday since it was the day when Jews prepared for the Sabbath.

o Luk 23:54 And that day was the preparation, and the sabbath drew on.

John 19:31 reveals an additional detail about the nature of the upcoming Sabbath. Christs crucified body was removed on the preparation day for the upcoming Sabbath, which would a high Sabbath. The upcoming Sabbath had extra importance since it coincided with the first day of the Feast of the Unleavened Bread, a holy day.

o Joh 19:31 The Jews therefore, because it was the preparation, that the bodies should not remain upon the cross on the sabbath day, (for that sabbath day was an high day,) besought Pilate that their legs might be broken, and that they might be taken away.

Therefore, the crucifixion date was not only the preparation day for the upcoming Sabbath, but also the day of preparation for the Feast of the Unleavened Bread (as was shown earlier).

o Joh 19:14 And it was the preparation of the passover, and about the sixth hour: and he saith unto the Jews, Behold your King!

o Joh 19:15 But they cried out, Away with him, away with him, crucify him. Pilate saith unto them, Shall I crucify your King? The chief priests answered, We have no king but Caesar. o Joh 19:16 Then delivered he him therefore unto them to be crucified. And they took Jesus, and led him away.

Finally, another way to verify that the crucifixion occurred on Friday is do some math. Christs rose from the dead three days (Matthew 27:62-63) after he was crucified, and since this happened on Sunday morning (Luke 24:1) we should subtract three Jewish days to find the day of the week he was crucified. From Friday afternoon we have one day, when we get to Friday evening we start the second day, and Saturday evening starts the third day.

End of 69th Week: Add 40 Days from Resurrection Date It would be great to prove that the end of Daniels 69th week ended on the exact date of Christs crucifixion. However, this cannot be done since the subtraction of 173,880 days will not place the start date of the 1st week in the month of Nisan. Since Christs crucifixion date cannot work as the end of the 69th week of Daniel we must look for another way to make the timeframe fit between Nisan of Longimanuss 20th year and the day that the Messiah was .cut-off.. Most commentators believe that the term .cut-off. in Daniel 9:26 refers to Christs crucifixion. This is why nearly every attempt to show how precise Daniels 69 weeks has focused on Christs crucifixion date. If we take examine the Hebrew text we find that the term .cut-off. does not necessarily refer to the death of the Messiah44: 44 The term .cut-off. is the Hebrew word .... (ka^rath). Ka^rath has several meanings ranging from .to destroy. to .take away. though in most verses it meant the former. Isaiah 53:8 also references to the cut off of the Messiah: He was taken from prison and from justice; and who shall consider His generation? For He was cut off out of the

land of the living; from the transgression of My people, the stroke was to Him.. However, Isaiah 53:8 uses a different Hebrew word, .... (ga^zar), to depict the cut off of the Messiah, which in this context means separated. Therefore .cut-off. does not have to mean .killed. as there were other instances where the term was used and it meant something other then kill/destroy. 45 Delitzsch, F. and Carl, F. Keil. Commentary on the Old Testament in Ten Volumes. Trans. James Martin. Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1983.

.a correct rendering of .....; for it shows that ..... does not denote the putting to death, or cutting off of existence, but only the annihilation of His place as Maschiach among His people and in His kingdom. For if after His .cutting off. He has not what He should have, it is clear that annihilation does not apply to Him personally, but only that He has lost His place and function as the Maschiach..45

The Jewish concept of a Messiah is different from the Christian depiction. While Christians view the Messiah as a savior, Jews see him as .the instrument by whom God's kingdom is to be established in Israel and in the world..46 At the end of Daniels 69th week Christ told his disciples that it was not yet time for him to establish the messianic kingdom of Israel. 46 .Messiah.. International Standard Bible Encyclopedia. Fully Rev. 1979 47 Tanakh: The Holy Scriptures. Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society, 1985. 1487 48 Jamieson, Robert, A.R. Fausset, and David Brown. A Commentary, Critique, and Explanatory, on the Old and New Testaments. Hillsdale: S.S. Scranton and co, 1878.

o Act 1:6 When they therefore were come together, they asked of him, saying, Lord, wilt thou at this time restore again the kingdom to Israel? o Act 1:7 And he said unto them, It is not for you to know the times or the seasons, which the Father hath put in his own power. o Act 1:8 But ye shall receive power, after that the Holy Ghost is come upon you: and ye shall be witnesses unto me both in Jerusalem, and in all Judaea, and in Samaria, and unto the uttermost part of the earth.

Therefore, Christ was not supposed to serve as messianic ruler in first coming, but he will have a messianic kingdom in the future since he is called the Messiah by Gabriel. A similar interpretation of the term .cut-off. is presented in the Jewish Publication Societys translation of Daniel 9:26: .And after those 62 weeks, the anointed one will disappear and vanish.47 The notion that the Messiah would disappear is not blasphemous!!! Revelation 12:5 depicts Christ, the future ruler of all the nations, as being taken up to heaven:

o Rev 12:5 And she brought forth a man child, who was to rule all nations with a rod of iron: and her child was caught up unto God, and to his throne.

Finally, interpreting .cut-off. as meaning that Christ was taken away before he could establish his kingdom makes even more sense when you consider the next phrase in Daniel 9:26. The next phrase reads .but not for Himself., but is better translated as .there shall be nothing to Him..48 This phrase relates to the fact that Christ left Earth without his messianic kingdom. With .cutoff. not referring to Christs crucifixion we can reference his ascension date as the date when he was cut-off.

After Christ rose from the dead he spent forty days on Earth before he ascended to Heaven. I will count his resurrection date as the first of forty days to calculate the date when he ascended to heaven.

o Act 1:1 The former treatise have I made, O Theophilus, of all that Jesus began both to do and teach, o Act 1:2 Until the day in which he was taken up, after that he through the Holy Ghost had given commandments unto the apostles whom he had chosen: o Act 1:3 To whom also he shewed himself alive after his passion by many infallible proofs, being seen of them forty days, and speaking of the things pertaining to the kingdom of God: . o Act 1:9 And when he had spoken these things, while they beheld, he was taken up; and a cloud received him out of their sight. o Act 1:10 And while they looked stedfastly toward heaven as he went up, behold, two men stood by them in white apparel; o Act 1:11 Which also said, Ye men of Galilee, why stand ye gazing up into heaven? this same Jesus, which is taken up from you into heaven, shall so come in like manner as ye have seen him go into heaven.

The Calculation Must Be Replicated by Others A critical part of my calculation is to make it replicable. My work is replicable to the extent that someone can reproduce the same results. This means that I provide anyone who wants to replicate my calculations with in-depth details of the procedures that I used to find the start and end dates of Daniels first 69 weeks so that others can reproduce the same result.

8. The Prophecy of Adolf Hitler and the Seven Beast Empires

The Jew is always with us. But it is easier to combat him in the flesh than an invisible daemon. The Jew was the enemy of the Roman Empire, even of Egypt and Babylon; but I have been the first to go all out against him..-Adolf Hitler

Introduction Revelation chapter 17 is considered one of the most difficult chapters to understand in the entire Bible. I have never seen a chapter with so many varying interpretations about its meaning in my years of studying prophecy. In this chapter I give you an easy to understand explanation regarding perhaps the most overlooked part of one of the Bibles most difficult chapters: the verse in Revelation 17 that accounts for one of historys most infamous figures: Adolf Hitler.

The Vision Revelation 17 begins with a vision of a woman riding on a beast with seven heads and ten horns.

o Rev 17:1 And there came one of the seven angels which had the seven vials, and talked with me, saying unto me, Come hither; I will shew unto thee the judgment of the great whore that sitteth upon many waters: o Rev 17:2 With whom the kings of the earth have committed fornication, and the inhabitants of the earth have been made drunk with the wine of her fornication. o Rev 17:3 So he carried me away in the spirit into the wilderness: and I saw a woman sit upon a scarlet coloured beast, full of names of blasphemy, having seven heads and ten horns.

Although John is somewhat fascinated by the woman, I focus on the beast in this chapter. The beast is symbolic because the angel will reveal what the beast represents.

o Rev 17:7 And the angel said unto me, Wherefore didst thou marvel? I will tell thee the mystery of the woman, and of the beast that carrieth her, which hath the seven heads and ten horns.

In Revelation 17:8 it is apparent that John no longer sees the vision of the beast when the angel reveals:

o Rev 17:8 The beast that thou sawest was, and is not; and shall ascend out of the bottomless pit, and go into perdition: and they that dwell on the earth shall wonder, whose names were not written in the book of life from the foundation of the world, when they behold the beast that was, and is not, and yet is.

In Revelation 17:9 the angel begins to provide great detail about the beast:

o Rev 17:9 And here is the mind which hath wisdom. The seven heads are seven mountains, on which the woman sitteth.

The seven heads of the beast, which are compared to mountains, are often thought of representing Rome. Rome was built upon seven hills and some Bible versions even go as far as to replace the word .mountains. with the word .hills.. However, this interpretation is incorrect because these seven mountains symbolize seven kingdoms and are also equated to seven kings in verse 17:10.49 Five past kingdoms dissolved before Johns time, one kingdom and king is power during Johns time, and another had not yet appeared on the earth. The importance of these seven kingdoms is revealed in verse 11 as one of the leaders from these kingdoms will serve again as an eighth king. 49 Later I will reconfirm that kings and kingdoms can be used interchangeably when I discuss Daniel 7.

o Rev 17:10 And there are seven kings: five are fallen, and one is, and the other is not yet come; and when he cometh, he must continue a short space. o Rev 17:11 And the beast that was, and is not, even he is the eighth, and is of the seven, and goeth into perdition.

The Seven Kings and Kingdoms To identify these kingdoms and kings, every detail needs to be exhausted. First we turn to study the dragon in Revelation 12 since it will give us an indication of whom these seven kings are affiliated with. The vision of dragon associates each king/kingdom with Satan (verse 12:9) since each horn is used to help describe him.

o Rev 12:3 And there appeared another wonder in heaven; and behold a great red dragon, having seven heads and ten horns, and seven crowns upon his heads.

o Rev 12:9 And the great dragon was cast out, that old serpent, called the Devil, and Satan, which deceiveth the whole world: he was cast out into the earth, and his angels were cast out with him.

Satan has used his kings/kingdoms in an attempt to prevent the birth and eventual eternal reign of the special child (Christ). To prevent the birth of this child and his eventual reign, Satan has persecuted and attempted to annihilate the Jewish people.50 50 The end times are simply another futile attempt by Satan to thwart Christs reign by using an empire to destroy Israel

o Rev 12:4 And his tail drew the third part of the stars of heaven, and did cast them to the earth: and the dragon stood before the woman which was ready to be delivered, for to devour her child as soon as it was born. o Rev 12:5 And she brought forth a man child, who was to rule all nations with a rod of iron: and her child was caught up unto God, and to his throne.

Next we study another beast in Revelation, which provides us more details about the seven kingdoms/kings and the 8th king alluded to in Revelation 17:11. Revelation 13:1 begins with the appearance of beast from the sea. Like in Revelation 17 the beast has seven heads which represent kingdoms/kings and ten horns which represent ten kings that share their power.

Unlike in Revelation 17, the ten kings have authority of kings since the horns have crowns on their heads. This indicates that the vision in Revelation 13 is farther into the future than the vision of Revelation 17.

o Rev 13:1 And I stood on the sand of the sea. And I saw a beast rising up out of the sea, having ten horns and seven heads, and ten royal bands on its horns, and a blasphemous name on its heads.

o Rev 17:12 And the ten horns which thou sawest are ten kings, which have received no kingdom as yet; but receive power as kings one hour with the beast.

The most striking thing about the beast from the sea is that Satan will empower the beast, so it is an evil entity. Another very notable thing is that this beast originates from the same place

as the four beasts Daniel saw in chapter 7. The beast from the sea has the qualities of the first three special beast empires described in Daniel 7: speed, power, and a large appetite. Its feet will crush like a bear, its speed is like a leopard, and its appetite is like a lion.

o Rev 13:2 And the beast which I saw was like unto a leopard, and his feet were as the feet of a bear, and his mouth as the mouth of a lion: and the dragon gave him his power, and his seat, and great authority.

o Dan 7:2 Daniel spake and said, I saw in my vision by night, and, behold, the four winds of the heaven strove upon the great sea. o Dan 7:3 And four great beasts came up from the sea, diverse one from another. o Dan 7:4 The first was like a lion, and had eagle's wings: I beheld till the wings thereof were plucked, and it was lifted up from the earth, and made stand upon the feet as a man, and a man's heart was given to it. o Dan 7:5 And behold another beast, a second, like to a bear, and it raised up itself on one side, and it had three ribs in the mouth of it between the teeth of it: and they said thus unto it, Arise, devour much flesh. o Dan 7:6 After this I beheld, and lo another, like a leopard, which had upon the back of it four wings of a fowl; the beast had also four heads; and dominion was given to it.

The fourth beast has similar qualities to the one in Revelation 13 since it uses its feet to crush, it uses it mouth to consume its prey

o Dan 7:7 After this I saw in the night visions, and behold a fourth beast, dreadful and terrible, and strong exceedingly; and it had great iron teeth: it devoured and brake in pieces, and

stamped the residue with the feet of it: and it was diverse from all the beasts that were before it; and it had ten horns.

o Dan 7:19 Then I would know the truth of the fourth beast, which was diverse from all the others, exceeding dreadful, whose teeth were of iron, and his nails of brass; which devoured, brake in pieces, and stamped the residue with his feet;

Although each beast in the vision of Daniel 7 represents a kingdom, king and kingdom are used interchangeably in verses 7:17 and 7:23. This does not occur because someone subjectively chose to use the word .king. verse 17 and .kingdom. in verse 23. The word .melek. is used in verse 17, and .melek. in Chaldee51 mean .king.. The word .malku^. is used in verse 23, and 51 Parts of the Book of Daniel is written in Chaldee in addition to Hebrew.

.malku^. in Chaldee can mean dominion or kingdom. The interchangeability between king and kingdom indicates that each king represents (or is affiliated with) a different kingdom.

o Dan 7:17 These great beasts, which are four, are four kings, which shall arise out of the earth.

o Dan 7:23 Thus he said, The fourth beast shall be the fourth kingdom upon earth, which shall be diverse from all kingdoms, and shall devour the whole earth, and shall tread it down, and break it in pieces.

The 4th beast of Daniel 7 also has ten horns that represent ten kings like the beast of Revelation 13. However Daniels fourth beast has another horn grow out of it as each king is affiliated with their kingdom. This eleventh horn is a man that biblical scholars call Antichrist whom somehow will appear greater than even the most powerful men in the world.

o Dan 7:20 And of the ten horns that were in his head, and of the other which came up, and before whom three fell; even of that horn that had eyes, and a mouth that spake very great things, whose look was more stout than his fellows.

Daniels fourth beast represents an empire comprised of ten kings and the vaunted 8th king.

o Dan 7:23 Thus he said, The fourth beast shall be the fourth kingdom upon earth, which shall

be diverse from all kingdoms, and shall devour the whole earth, and shall tread it down, and break it in pieces. o Dan 7:24 And the ten horns out of this kingdom are ten kings that shall arise: and another shall rise after them; and he shall be diverse from the first, and he shall subdue three kings.

The only difference between Daniels fourth beast and Johns beast from the sea was the eleventh horn that grew out of Daniels beast. However, the 8th king will (re)appear on the scene like the eleventh horn of Daniels fourth beast appears. Therefore Daniels fourth beast is the same beast as in Revelation 13. The beast from the sea represents Satans 8th and final empire.

o Rev 13:3 And I saw one of his heads as it were wounded to death; and his deadly wound was healed: and all the world wondered after the beast.

o Dan 7:8 I considered the horns, and, behold, there came up among them another little horn, before whom there were three of the first horns plucked up by the roots: and, behold, in this horn were eyes like the eyes of man, and a mouth speaking great things.

It is widely accepted by biblical scholars that the first three beasts described in Daniel 7 are kingdoms that have already come. The first beast represents the ruler of the kingdom of Babylon. The second beast stands for the Persian Kingdom while the third kingdom represents the Grecian Kingdom. It can be inferred that the leaders of these kingdoms are three of the heads upon the beast that represents Antichrist since he has characteristics of the three.

Identifying the First Six Kings Nebuchadnezzar II Nebuchadnezzar was the king of the Babylonian Empire from (Circa) 605BC to (Circa) 562BC. He is considered the most powerful king of the Babylonian Empire and the most powerful ruler of the era. In Daniels interpretation of Nebuchadnezzars dream he identifies Nebuchadnezzar as the first king of four future, powerful kingdoms:

o Dan 2:37 Thou, O king, art a king of kings: for the God of heaven hath given thee a kingdom, power, and strength, and glory. o Dan 2:38 And wheresoever the children of men dwell, the beasts of the field and the fowls of the heaven hath he given into thine hand, and hath made thee ruler over them all. Thou art this head of gold.

Nebuchadnezzar ransacked the temple in Jerusalem three times; each time plundering treasures from it.

o 2Ch 36:6 Against him came up Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon, and bound him in fetters, to carry him to Babylon. o 2Ch 36:7 Nebuchadnezzar also carried of the vessels of the house of the LORD to Babylon, and put them in his temple at Babylon.

In Nebuchadnezzars final invasion of Jerusalem, he ordered his men to destroy the temple along with the rest of the city of Jerusalem.

o 2Ki 25:8 And in the fifth month, on the seventh day of the month, which is the nineteenth year of king Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon, came Nebuzaradan, captain of the guard, a servant of the king of Babylon, unto Jerusalem: o 2Ki 25:9 And he burnt the house of the LORD, and the king's house, and all the houses of Jerusalem, and every great man's house burnt he with fire.

In addition to calling for the destruction of Jerusalem, Nebuchadnezzar called for the deportations of all the inhabitants of Jerusalem.

o Jer 52:28 This is the people whom Nebuchadrezzar carried away captive: in the seventh year three thousand Jews and three and twenty: o Jer 52:29 In the eighteenth year of Nebuchadrezzar he carried away captive from Jerusalem eight hundred thirty and two persons: o Jer 52:30 In the three and twentieth year of Nebuchadrezzar Nebuzaradan the captain of the guard carried away captive of the Jews seven hundred forty and five persons: all the persons were four thousand and six hundred.

Haman Not much is known about Haman the Agigite, but he is despised to this day. When Hamans name is mentioned during the reading of Megillah in synagogues, it is customary for children to stomp their feet and shake noise-makers (International Jewish Encyclopedia). The only Biblical description of Haman is found in the Book of Esther. In the accounts in Esther, Haman received worship by nearly everyone in the King Ahasureuss court (Est 3:2). The

exception to this was Mordecai, and when Haman learned that he was a Jew, he became bent on destroying the entire Jewish race (Est 3:6). To gain the approval of King Ahasureus, Haman offered the king a bribe:

o Est 3:8 And Haman said unto king Ahasuerus, There is a certain people scattered abroad and dispersed among the people in all the provinces of thy kingdom; and their laws are diverse from all people; neither keep they the king's laws: therefore it is not for the king's profit to suffer them. o Est 3:9 If it please the king, let it be written that they may be destroyed: and I will pay ten thousand talents of silver to the hands of those that have the charge of the business, to bring it into the king's treasuries. o Est 3:10 And the king took his ring from his hand, and gave it unto Haman the son of Hammedatha the Agagite, the Jews' enemy.

Although Haman was not the real Persian king, King Ahasureus made Haman de facto ruler of the land as he gave him all the empires resources to persecute the Jews.

o Est 3:11 And the king said unto Haman, The silver is given to thee, the people also, to do with them as it seemeth good to thee. o Est 3:12 Then were the king's scribes called on the thirteenth day of the first month, and there was written according to all that Haman had commanded unto the king's lieutenants, and to the governors that were over every province, and to the rulers of every people of every province according to the writing thereof, and to every people after their language; in the name of king Ahasuerus was it written, and sealed with the king's ring. o Est 3:13 And the letters were sent by posts into all the king's provinces, to destroy, to kill, and to cause to perish, all Jews, both young and old, little children and women, in one day, even upon the thirteenth day of the twelfth month, which is the month Adar, and to take the spoil of them for a prey. o Est 3:14 The copy of the writing for a commandment to be given in every province was published unto all people, that they should be ready against that day.

Antiochus Epiphanies IV Antiochus Epiphanies IV (Epiphanies was for him an abbreviation of .Theos Epiphanies. or God-Manifest52) ruled in Syria from 175 to 164BC despite his Greek heritage. Antiochus was the descendant of one of the four generals who worked with Alexander the Great as he carved out his global empire.53 Antiochus was an enthusiastic pagan who sought to convert everyone in his empire into pagans. Many Jews resisted Antiochuss attempts to convert them, which made them his primary target of his wrath.54 In 167BC Antiochus stormed the temple of Jerusalem and established a statue dedicated to Zeus. In addition to defiling the temple, .Jews were put to death for studying the Torah. Sacred scrolls were torn to shreds and put to the torch.

According to historian Moshe Pearlman, Antiochuss actions were unprecedented: .By his declaration of war on the Jewish religion, with the explicit aim to stamping out Judaism, Antiochus IV Epiphanies became the first leader in history to engage in religious persecution.. 52 Pearlman, Moshe. The Maccabees. New York: Macmillan Publishing Co. Inc., 1973. 44 53 Daniel 8 gives a detail description of how Alexanders empire was divided amongst his four generals to the rise of Antiochus Epiphanies IV. 54 Daniel 11:1-11:34 provides details of Antiochuss career, including his persecution of the Jews. Daniel 2 and 7 provides us with the identity of only three kings/kingdoms through 165BC; a time when the Roman Empire was establishing itself as the next great world power. From Revelation 17:10 we know that the Roman Empire is the 6th kingdom, therefore we still need to identify other two kings/kingdoms. The three kingdoms identified in Daniel came in succession to the rise of the Roman Empire. Therefore, we must look before the Babylonian Empire for the identity of the two unidentified kings/kingdoms. Going back in time, the Bible

depicts two large kingdoms that oppressed the Jews. One kingdom was Egypt and the other was Assyria.

Pharaoh Ahmoses I The true identity of the Pharaoh is unknown because the date of the Exodus is disputed. However, Ahmoses I probably was the Pharaoh who called for the oppression of the Jewish people and twice ordered the extermination of all newly born Jewish sons.55 Ahmoses I expelled the Hyskos, the people who probably befriended the Jews while they ruled Lower Egypt, and ruled for approximately 25 years at the beginning 18th Dynasty. Since Ahmoses I ruled Egypt for such a long time he undoubtedly had time to observe the changes in the Jewish population after various policies were implemented. 55 The identification of Ahmoses I as the Pharaoh of Egypt at the time of the birth of Moses is derived from a special excel program that I made called the .Jubilee Finder..

o Exo 1:8 Now there arose up a new king over Egypt, which knew not Joseph. o Exo 1:9 And he said unto his people, Behold, the people of the children of Israel are more and mightier than we: o Exo 1:10 Come on, let us deal wisely with them; lest they multiply, and it come to pass, that, when there falleth out any war, they join also unto our enemies, and fight against us, and so get them up out of the land. o Exo 1:11 Therefore they did set over them taskmasters to afflict them with their burdens. And they built for Pharaoh treasure cities, Pithom and Raamses. o Exo 1:12 But the more they afflicted them, the more they multiplied and grew. And they were grieved because of the children of Israel. o Exo 1:13 And the Egyptians made the children of Israel to serve with rigour: o Exo 1:14 And they made their lives bitter with hard bondage, in morter, and in brick, and in

all manner of service in the field: all their service, wherein they made them serve, was with rigour. o Exo 1:15 And the king of Egypt spake to the Hebrew midwives, of which the name of the one was Shiphrah, and the name of the other Puah: o Exo 1:16 And he said, When ye do the office of a midwife to the Hebrew women, and see them upon the stools; if it be a son, then ye shall kill him: but if it be a daughter, then she shall live. o Exo 1:19 And the midwives said unto Pharaoh, Because the Hebrew women are not as the Egyptian women; for they are lively, and are delivered ere the midwives come in unto them. o Exo 1:20 Therefore God dealt well with the midwives: and the people multiplied, and waxed very mighty.

o Exo 1:22 And Pharaoh charged all his people, saying, Every son that is born ye shall cast into the river, and every daughter ye shall save alive.

Sennacherib Sennacherib was the king of Assyria during a time of great distress in Israel. A decade earlier Shalmanser IV put down a revolt in Northern Israel and deported 10 of the 12 Jewish tribes. Now Sennacherib sought to break the royal line of Israel and sought the destruction of Jerusalem after King Hezekiah refused to pay him tribute. He sent men to Jerusalem to persuade the Jews to abandoned Hezekiah and God. In return Sennacherib promised the Jews a new life much like the one described in Messianic prophecy.

o 2Ki 18:17 And the king of Assyria sent Tartan and Rabsaris and Rabshakeh from Lachish to king Hezekiah with a great host against Jerusalem. And they went up and came to Jerusalem. And when they were come up, they came and stood by the conduit of the upper pool, which is in the highway of the fuller's field. o 2Ki 18:27 But Rabshakeh said unto them, Hath my master sent me to thy master, and to thee, to speak these words? hath he not sent me to the men which sit on the wall, that they may eat their own dung, and drink their own piss with you? o 2Ki 18:28 Then Rabshakeh stood and cried with a loud voice in the Jews' language, and spake, saying, Hear the word of the great king, the king of Assyria: o 2Ki 18:29 Thus saith the king, Let not Hezekiah deceive you: for he shall not be able to deliver you out of his hand: o 2Ki 18:30 Neither let Hezekiah make you trust in the LORD, saying, The LORD will surely deliver us, and this city shall not be delivered into the hand of the king of Assyria. o 2Ki 18:31 Hearken not to Hezekiah: for thus saith the king of Assyria, Make an agreement

with me by a present, and come out to me, and then eat ye every man of his own vine, and every one of his fig tree, and drink ye every one the waters of his cistern: o 2Ki 18:32 Until I come and take you away to a land like your own land, a land of corn and wine, a land of bread and vineyards, a land of oil olive and of honey, that ye may live, and not die: and hearken not unto Hezekiah, when he persuadeth you, saying, The LORD will deliver us. o 2Ki 18:33 Hath any of the gods of the nations delivered at all his land out of the hand of the king of Assyria? o 2Ki 18:34 Where are the gods of Hamath, and of Arpad? where are the gods of Sepharvaim, Hena, and Ivah? have they delivered Samaria out of mine hand? o 2Ki 18:35 Who are they among all the gods of the countries, that have delivered their country out of mine hand, that the LORD should deliver Jerusalem out of mine hand?

Nero Recall that the angel of Revelation 17 told John that one of the six kings was alive (.one is.). If the Book of Revelation was written during the time of Nero, which appears likely, then he is the 6th king.56 In addition to being the king alive at Johns time, Nero was a severe persecutor of Jews and Christians. Nero is responsible for the deaths of Paul and Peter and ordered a war against the Jews in Judea. Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul (via Alice Bailey) admitted that Nero was influenced by Shamballa energy-a satanically-inspired power.57 Meanwhile, Benjamin Creme said that .Antichrist energy. was released during the time of Nero.58 56 I think there is stronger evidence to conclude that Revelation was written during the time of Nero than the time of Domitian. However, I still believe that the events of Revelation are futuristic. To learn more, read Matthew McGee, who argues that Revelation was written during the time of Nero, yet still believes the events of Revelation are still unfulfilled, by clicking this link: 57 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 346 58 Creme, Benjamin. .The Ageless Wisdom Teachings.. 19 Jun. 2006. Last Accessed 17 Jul. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/background/awteachings/AWT_main.htm/

Finding the 7th King A Curses Hidden Importance Recall that the final curse that the people Israel received for disobeying God, the expulsion from their land, was in effect from 70AD to 1948. This final curse was in effect for 1878 years so there must be an important reason why this dispersal lasted for such a long time. To answer why the dispersal lasted so long, first recall that each week of Daniels 70 Weeks must occur as the gentiles dominate Israel and Jerusalem. From the time that the order to

rebuild the temple was given in Jerusalem to the destruction of Jerusalem was exactly 69 prophetic weeks.

o Dan 9:24 Seventy weeks are determined upon thy people and upon thy holy city, to finish the transgression, and to make an end of sins, and to make reconciliation for iniquity, and to bring in everlasting righteousness, and to seal up the vision and prophecy, and to anoint the most Holy. o Dan 9:25 Know therefore and understand, that from the going forth of the commandment to restore and to build Jerusalem unto the Messiah the Prince shall be seven weeks, and threescore and two weeks: the street shall be built again, and the wall, even in troublous times. o Dan 9:26 And after threescore and two weeks shall Messiah be cut off, but not for himself: and the people of the prince that shall come shall destroy the city and the sanctuary; and the end thereof shall be with a flood, and unto the end of the war desolations are determined.

The Roman Empire was the 6th empire of Satans eight empires. Since kings are associated with their empires, any proceeding leader in the Roman Empire is eliminated from consideration. Now the possible timeframe of this 7th kings appearance is between 476 and 1948AD, and when he came he remained in power for only a short time.

o Rev 17:10 And there are seven kings: five are fallen, and one is, and the other is not yet come; and when he cometh, he must continue a short space.

Since the Roman Empire was responsible for the dispersal of the Jews that caused the Diaspora, only the 8th empire and king can deal with the Jews in Israel. This will occur during the 70th week of Daniel.

o Rev 17:11 And the beast that was, and is not, even he is the eighth, and is of the seven, and goeth into perdition.

At that time, the 8th King of Revelation 17 will invade Israel

o Eze 38:11 And thou shalt say, I will go up to the land of unwalled villages; I will go to them that are at rest, that dwell safely, all of them dwelling without walls, and having neither bars nor gates, o Eze 38:12 To take a spoil, and to take a prey; to turn thine hand upon the desolate places that are now inhabited, and upon the people that are gathered out of the nations, which have gotten cattle and goods, that dwell in the midst of the land.

Therefore, the 7th king and his empire must have terrorized the Jews during the Diaspora since any terrorizing/domination of them after 1948 would be associated with the 70th week of Daniel. Deuteronomy 30:3 holds an important statement; the Lord will have pity for his people when the captivity ends. The issue is: .why was the late 1940s the time period when the land of Israel was returned to the Jews?. An accumulation of problems for nearly 1900 years resulting from the Jewish peoples displacement was not likely the sole factor in the Lords pity for the Jews. What is the difference between 1750 years of banishment and 1800 years? There had to be something that prolonged this final curse. To identify the reason, we now need to focus upon the time period when the curse ended because something happened to end the curse.

o Deu 30:3 That then the LORD thy God will turn thy captivity, and have compassion upon thee, and will return and gather thee from all the nations, whither the LORD thy God hath scattered thee.

Adolf Hitler a few years prior to the recreation of Israel terrorized the world; particularly the Jews. While attempting to conquer the world on January 30, 1942, Hitler proclaimed: .the more this war spreads, the more anti-Semitism will spread. This may be said to world Jewry. Anti-Semitism will be nourished in every prison camp, in every family which must be informed why they must sacrifice to the bitter end.. Hitlers policies, unlike any leader since the fall of the Roman Empire, affected Jews around the world by causing them to live in a state of constant fear. This fear is captured by the words of this curse, and one can argue that Hitlers Reich brought the curse upon all Jews simultaneously:

o Deu 28:65 And among these nations shalt thou find no ease, neither shall the sole of thy foot have rest: but the LORD shall give thee there a trembling heart, and failing of eyes, and sorrow of mind: o Deu 28:66 And thy life shall hang in doubt before thee; and thou shalt fear day and night, and shalt have none assurance of thy life: o Deu 28:67 In the morning thou shalt say, Would God it were even! and at even thou shalt say, Would God it were morning! for the fear of thine heart wherewith thou shalt fear, and for the sight of thine eyes which thou shalt see.

The Diaspora lasted as long as it did because it required the 7th king of Revelation 17 to arrive and inflict the final curses devastation upon the Jews. This devastation combined with

nearly 1900 years of anguish was enough for the Jews to receive pity, and with the pity, the return of Israel in 1948 (and the end of the curse).

Adolf Hitler Since the end of World War 2 there has not been a leader or individual who stands out as much as Adolf Hitler. Hitlers Third Reich was perhaps the most pagan empire since before the rise of Christianity. Not only did Hitler seek the destruction of the Jewish religion and race he also sought the destruction of the Christian faith. In its place Hitler planned to establish a new religion with himself as its leader. To understand who Hitler really was you cannot view him as an ordinary political leader or National Socialism as just a political movement like Communism. Hitler told Hermann

Rauschning that no one knew him because they did not know what he planned to unleash on the world:

.You know nothing about me; my party comrades have no conception of the dreams which haunt me or of the grandiose edifice of which the foundations, at least, will have been laid before I die. The world has reached a turning point; we are now at a critical moment in time The planet will undergo an upheaval which you uninitiated people cannot understand What is happening is something more than the advent of a new religion..59 59 Pauwels, Louis. and Bergier, Jacques. The Morning of the Magicians. Trans. Rollo Myer. New York: Stein and Day, 1964. 278 60 Ibid. 246

Similarly, people misunderstood Nazism because they did not understand its purpose: .Those who see National Socialism nothing but a political movement know scarcely anything of it. It is more than a religion: it is the will to create mankind anew..60 Hitlers reign as Fuhrer of the Third Reich and the shortness of time that his Reich lasted fulfilled the detail in Revelation 17:10 about coming for a short time. Hitlers time as a ruler was indeed the shortest of all his predecessors along with his empire, which crumbled at least a hundred years earlier than any other.

9. The Evil of Adolf Hitler I have been working with him for years, I see him almost everyday, and still there are times when he loses me completely. Who can claim to know who he really is? ...You.ll think I.m crazy, but listen to me: Hitler will bring us to a catastrophe. But his ideas, once they have been transformed, will acquire a new strengthIs he really human? I would not want to swear on it -Joseph Goebbels

Introduction In the previous chapter I demonstrated that Adolf Hitler was the 7th king of Revelation 17. In this chapter, I detail about how evil Adolf Hitler was and report on some little known details about the man that makes people like his propaganda minister Joseph Goebbels wonder if he was human. Learning these details will help you understand Hitler had satanic forces driving him and understand how powerful a person when they are possessed.

The Spirit of Antichrist Empowers Satan appears to have played a huge role in the influencing Adolf Hitler. New Age author Alice Bailey wrote-with the help from Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul-that Sanat Kumara [Satan] presides over Shamballa energy, which is a luciferically-inspired destructive force that Nazism was fueled by.61 Benjamin Creme more directly traces the source behind Hitlers power to the spirit of the Antichrist: .While the anti-christ is an energy, it does manifest through individuals and has done so at different times throughout history, most notably through the emperor Nero in Roman times, and more recently through Hitler and some of his closest associates..62 Creme goes even further to acknowledge that Hitler was used by the forces of evil: 61 Bailey, Alice. Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Pub; 2nd edition June 1983. 127

62 Crme, Benjamin. .50 Frequently Asked Questions.. 02 Nov. 2006 Last Accessed 13 Jan 2009. http://www.share-international.org/background/faq/faq_main.htm. 63 Crme, Benjamin. .Religion-FAQ.. 18. June 2006. Last Accessed 13 Jan. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/ARCHIVES/religion/faq_religion.htm. .Hitler was both an agent and responsible. He was obsessed by various members of what are called the Lords of Materiality, which we call the 'forces of evil'..63 These are astounding statements by Creme. He acknowledges that Hitler essentially was a satanic agent and that Nero, the 6th king of Revelation 17, were empowered by the same energy.

Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul revealed to the late Dr. Joshua David Stone, a prominent New Age channeler, teacher, and author, that Adolf Hitler was a .walk-in.: .Djwhal Khul has told me that Adolph Hitler was a walk-in. The Dark Brotherhood facilitated the shifting of one of their high ranking members into Hitler's body. Adolph Hitler was on the dark path himself before he left, but the new entity was even darker in consciousness..6465 A .walk-in. is a person who voluntarily surrendered their physical body to be inhabited by one of Satans spiritual agents. Djwhal Khuls statement tells us that Hitler was inhabited by one of Satans highest level spiritual entities, which explains why Hitler had unreal charisma, had a hypnotic effect on people, and was so evil. Cremes statement that Antichrist energy manifested in Hitler combined with Djwhal Khuls revelation means that the spirit of Antichrist likely inhabited Hitler through much of his political career. 64Why would Khul admit that Hitler was evil? The answer lies in what Khul considers .evil.. Khul argues that he and his other Fallen Angel counterparts are on the side of good-the side of light while Christians (and often Jews) are on the side evil-the side of darkness. 65 Stone, Joshua David. .Walk-Ins.. Last Accessed 12 Jul. 2009. http://www.iamuniversity.org/iamu/mobile/literature/lodges/spiritual_extraterrestrials_lo dge/3667-Walk-Ins.html. 66 Office of Strategic Services. Adolf Hitler. 1942. 60 67 Parparov, Fyodor. The Hitler Book: the Secret Dossier Prepared for Stalin from the Interrogations of Hitlers Personal Aides. Ed. Henrik Eberle and Matthias Uhl. Trans. Giles MacDonogh. New York: Public Affairs, 2005. 15

A Channel for Evil Charisma Adolf Hitlers charisma and showmanship was unrivaled because he had the ability to consistently amaze the masses. He had extraordinary endurance for a speaker since he gave

speeches that typically lasted two and sometimes up to three hours.66 Hitler often fell into a trance while he delivered a speech as if he was being used as a medium for some greater power. After a speech Hitler was typically exhausted and sometimes had to receive special treatment like the occasion described here: .He was taken as quickly as possible back to his flat, where servants brought the completely debilitated man out of his trance using hot baths and tranquillizers..67 The O.S.S. (the intelligence agency that evolved into the CIA) described the intoxicating effect that Hitlers delivery had on the German people:

.Unquestionably, as a speaker, he has had a powerful influence on the common run of German people. His meetings were always crowded and by the time he got through speaking he had completely numbed the critical faculties of his listeners to the point where they were willing to believe almost anything he said. He flattered them and cajoled them. He hurled accusations at them one moment and amused them the next by building

up straw men which he promptly knocked down. His tongue was like a lash which whipped up the emotions of his audience. And somehow he always managed to say what the majority of the audience were already secretly thinking but could not verbalize. When the audience began to respond, it affected him in return. Before long, due to this reciprocal relationship, he and his audience became intoxicated with the emotional appeal of his oratory.68 68 Langer, Walter C. The Mind of Adolf Hitler; the Secret Wartime Report. New York: Basic Books, 1972. 48 69 .The Rise and Fall of Adolf Hitler., Part 2, DVD. ZDF Enterprises, 1995. 70 Rauschning, Hermann. The Voice of Destruction. New York: G. P. Putnams Sons, 1940. 258 71 Angebert, Jean-Michel. The Occult and the Third Reich; the Mystical Origins of Nazism and the Search for the Holy Grail. Trans Lewis A. M. Sumberg. New York: Macmillan, 1974. 234-235

The vigor that Hitler had when he delivered a speech enthralled a crowd even if what he said was nothing to be enthusiastic about. In the passage below Wilhelm Langhagel describes how Hitlers energy made unimpressive words seem impressive to him:

.Hitler gave a fiery speech at a rally. I was hugely impressed like everyone else I observed there. I dont know why I was so impressed. Probably his speech embraced some ideas that were occupying us anyway. I read his speech the following day. It was published in the Leipziger Zeitung. I wondered why Id been so enthralled at the rally. There was nothing in it which impressed me when I came to read it..69

Hitlers ability hypnotize the public was matched by his extraordinary ability to influence individuals one-on-one. According to Rauschning, .undeniable powers enter into Hitler, genuinely daemonic powers, which make men his instruments..70 For instance, Joseph Goebbels was one of these people who followed Hitler despite reservations:

.I have been working with him for years, I see him almost everyday, and still there are

times when he loses me completely. Who can claim to know who he really is? ...Youll think Im crazy, but listen to me: Hitler will bring us to a catastrophe. But his ideas, once they have been transformed, will acquire a new strengthIs he really human?. I would not want to swear on it..71

Another good example of Hitlers powers of persuasion came from Winrich Behr, an officer at Stalingrad that described how Hitler was able to convince his generals to follow his plans:

.Once mustnt forget that I together with (Erwin) Rommel have actually seen outstanding Field Marshals who took their leave of us on their way to Hitler saying, =they were off to tell the man the truth and who came back two days later and said =he is an unbelievably impressive man and he put everything into context for me and there really is hope. Within 24 hours, it had evaporated, but whether you take it as a kind of hypnotism or just an impression he made on many people you cannot deny its existence..72 72 .The Rise and Fall of Adolf Hitler., Part 2, DVD. ZDF Enterprises, 1995. 73 Ibid. 74 Rauschning, Hermann. The Voice of Destruction. New York: G. P. Putnams Sons, 1940. 257

Hitlers persuasion had an effect on people causing them to do things that they would not do if it was someone else who asked them. Ulrich de Maizire, a member of Hitlers General Staff, spoke of Hitlers impact on people:

.Secondly, (Erich von) Manstein spoke to Hitler. (Maximilian von) Weichs spoke to Hitler. (Guenther von) Kluge spoke to Hitler. And this cast a light on something which I myself experienced at the end of the war; that this man emanated an almost indescribable demonic effect on individuals, which only a few were able to escape. And which one cannot really understand if one hasnt experienced it oneself..73

Hitlers Eyes Hitler even had the physical characteristic of someone possessed as his most distinctive physical characteristic was his blue, enigmatic eyes. His eyes were extraordinary since they always seemed to fascinate people. A man named Gerhart Hauptmann was one of many people who contemplated what they saw in Hitlers eyes. When .Hauptmann was introduced [to Hitler]. The Fuhrer shook hands with him and looked into his eyes. It was the famous gaze that makes everyone tremble, the glance which once made a distinguished old lawyer declare that

after meeting it he had but one desire, to be back at home in order to master the experience in solitude..74 This famous gaze made such an impression on one historian that he described what he saw in one of his works:

.As for his eyes-two eyes so strange that at first they were all that I saw-they were of a clear, transparent blue, striated with gray. One might said that they were empty as though

lifeless. But very quickly you changed your mind. What made them seem empty was their motionless. You might have said that his pupils, instead of observing the outside world, were turned forward and followed a drama unfolding sometimes deep within him. Unlike most people, who look at you-or even through you-the chancellor had a way of looking at you which drew you to him, and swept you into his hidden interior. You felt a sort of dizziness, which it took some doing to shake off..75 75 Angebert, Jean-Michel. The Occult and the Third Reich; the Mystical Origins of Nazism and the Search for the Holy Grail. Trans Lewis A. M. Sumberg. New York: Macmillan, 1974. 233 76 Jackh, Ernest. The War on Mans Soul. New York: The Ferris Printing Company, 1943. 97.

Although another man found nothing unusual about Hitlers behavior, the one unusual feature he noticed was Hitlers eyes:

.We talked just as you and I would talk, as two men who are calmly discussing some everyday problemI repeat, he was completely =normal, neither =magnetic nor =hypnotic nor =magic. Except for his eyes: there was something in his rigid hard look that came from somewhere and went off somewhere-out of an unconscious past into an unknown future..76

The only other individual whose eyes commanded such attention and detailed description was Christ.

o Rev 1:14 His head and his hairs were white like wool, as white as snow; and his eyes were as a flame of fire;

o Rev 2:18 And unto the angel of the church in Thyatira write; These things saith the Son of

God, who hath his eyes like unto a flame of fire, and his feet are like fine brass;

Demonic Support Hitler often had encounters with demonic elements, which did not go unnoticed by those who were with him. Rauschning spoke to a witness of these encounters and reports the witnesss description of these strange episodes:

.Hitler wakes at night with convulsive shrieks. He shouts for help. He sits on the edge of his bed, as if unable to stir. He shakes with fear, making the whole bed vibrate. He shouts confused, totally unintelligible phrases. He grasps, as if imagining himself suffocating Hitler stood swaying in his room, looking wildly about him. =He! He! Hes been here! he gasped. His lips were blue. Sweat streamed down his face. Suddenly he began to reel off figures, and odd words and broken phrases, entirely devoid of sense. It sounded horrible. He strangely composed and entirely un-German word formations. Then he stood quite still, only his lips were moving. He was massaged and offered something to drink. Then he suddenly broke out- =There, there! In the corner! Whos that? He stamped in shrieked in the familiar way..77 77 Rauschning, Hermann. The Voice of Destruction. New York: G. P. Putnams Sons, 1940. 256 78 .Hunting Hitler.. by The History Channel, 2002. 79 Angebert, Jean-Michel. The Occult and the Third Reich; the Mystical Origins of Nazism and the Search for the Holy Grail. Trans Lewis A. M. Sumberg. New York: Macmillan, 1974. 235

Herbert Dhring, Head of Hitlers Household, often watched Hitler walking alone at the Berghof (Hitlers mountain retreat nearby Berchtesgarden, Germany). In the description below Dhring provides details of what he felt was the .real Hitler., a man who may have been taking orders from someone else:

.In fine weather what he would do is walk in the garden at the back. There was a lawn with paving stones leading around it. He would walk around in a trance-like state, totally absorbed. There were strict orders that he could not be disturbed, no matter what. If there was a telephone call, the adjutant could not interrupt him. He would march up and down like this up to 1 hours at an unbelievable speedleft about turn, right about turn. He was completely switched off, and he used to do some of his typical gestures in an ecstatic state. It was interesting to watch him, at least interesting for me to watch him. I dont know why. I was seeing the real man. He was forging these gigantic plans, and he would stop for a while, and then off he would shoot again as if under orders like a sprinter..78

Hitler hinted that he was indeed taking orders from someone else: .I am following the way shown me by Providence, with the confidence of a sleepwalker..79 As Hitler followed the path that .Providence. led him on, he received help that kept him on course: .The only way in which he could explain the miracle of his own destiny was by attributing it to the action of unseen

forces-the same forces to which he owed his superhuman vocation of having to preach a new Gospel to humanity..80 80 Pauwels, Louis. and Bergier, Jacques. The Morning of the Magicians. Trans. Rollo Myer. New York: Stein and Day, 1964. 255 81 Parparov, Fyodor. The Hitler Book: the Secret Dossier Prepared for Stalin from the Interrogations of Hitlers Personal Aides. Ed. Henrik Eberle and Matthias Uhl. Trans. Giles MacDonogh. New York: Public Affairs, 2005. 4 82 Jackh, Ernest. The War on Mans Soul. New York: The Ferris Printing Company, 1943. 145 83 Viereck, Peter. Metapolitics, from the Romantics to Hitler. New York: A.A. Knopf, 1941. 299 84 Angebert, Jean-Michel. The Occult and the Third Reich; the Mystical Origins of Nazism and the Search for the Holy Grail. Trans Lewis A. M. Sumberg. New York: Macmillan, 1974. 21 85 Jackh, Ernest. The War on Mans Soul. New York: The Ferris Printing Company, 1943. 15 86 Heiden, Konrad. Der Fuehrer; Hitlers Rise to Power. Houghton Miffin Company. Boston. 1944 632

Messiah/Fuhrer Hitlers official position as .Fuhrer. formally combined the powers of the chancellor and president into one position. However, Nazi propaganda often depicted Hitler as more than a chancellor and/or president, but as the Messiah of the German people. He supposedly was sent from heaven to save the German people and build a new Reich. For instance, Hitler once proclaimed, .How lucky I am that providence sent me to the desperate German people as a saviour in their hour of need..81 The role of messiah was integrated into Hitlers role as Fuhrer.

Ernest Jackh, the author of The War for Mans Soul, describes the German populations attitude towards their leader: .In its mind the mass sublimates the Fuhrer into a mystical phenomenon. It hails him as a =nationalistic Godsend or as God himself and does not realize that nationalistic narrowness and God can never meet on the same plane. Similarly it elevates the physical importance of its leader into the realm of the superhuman, where there is no place for sensual human impulses and worships it as =sacred celibacy..82 Some Germans were so enamored by the Fuhrer that they were willing to follow him into death. A German soldier dying in France told a French man who approached him, .The Fuhrer is my faith. I dont want anything from your church. But if you want to be good to me, get my Fuhrers picture out of my pocketMy Fuhrer, I am happy to die for you.!83 Hitlers followers were fanatical because he is .in the eyes of his admirers, is a prophet, he partakes of the divine..84 Adolf Hitlers blasphemous conduct in public rose to a level that had never been seen. One observer of Nazi Germany at the time noted that .Hitlers challenge to God has no precedent..85 He deliberately blurred the difference between himself and God as .Hitler had provided them [the German people] with a suitable formula: =We know two Gods: one in heaven and another on earth; the second is Germany. But =we are Germany, Hitler had said on another occasion, and =we meant =I. And so there were people who prayed to Hitler, perhaps without realizing that this was prayer..86 Hitler also had government officials to subliminally present

him as god. Deputy Fuhrer Rudolf Hess told his audience, .=Do not seek Adolf Hitler with your brains; all of you will find him with the strength of your hearts. Adolf Hitler is Germany and Germany is Adolf Hitler.-And, in Hitlers own words, =Germany is our God on this earth. .87 The German people worshiped Hitler as if he was a god and some actually believed that he was god. Young Germans were the most likely group of people to accept the ludicrous notion that Hitler was god. German boys and girls sung songs in school, such as this one, that deified Hitler: 87 Ibid. 758 88 .Why We Fight. series, Prelude to War,. Frank Capra. 89Jackh, Ernest. The War on Mans Soul. New York: The Ferris Printing Company, 1943. 24

.Adolf Hitler is our Savior our hero. He is the noblest being in the whole wide world. For Hitler we live. For Hitler we die. Our Hitler is our Lord who rules a brave new world..88

Outside the classroom young Germans were further indoctrinated into the cult of the Fuhrer. One passage of a Hitler Youth song included this blasphemous passage:

.Pope and rabbi shall be gone. We want to be pagans once again. No longer creep to churches We are the joyous Hitler Youth. We do not need any Christian virtue. Our leader, Adolf Hitler, is our Savior.89

1000 Year Reich Not Exactly Revelation 17:10 states when the seventh king comes he must remain for only a short time. Hitler proclaimed in a speech, .It is our wish that this Reich shall exist for the next

thousand years. We are happy to know that the future belongs to us completely!. Hitlers one thousand year Reich only lasted as long as he reigned: for only twelve years. The word .Reich. does not exactly mean .Empire. as Jackh notes:

.As for the word =Reich, it cannot be accurately translated into English. The word =empire does not convey the correct meaning. The English translator of Mollers book, E.O Lorrmer is right in say; . ==The Third Empire misses something of the mystic associations which adhere to the word =Reich, in the original and nearly all its torchlike

quality, while importing ideas present there. =Reich is realm-the realm not only of politics and government but the spirit.90 90 Jackh, Ernest. The War on Mans Soul. New York: The Ferris Printing Company, 1943. 85 91 Rauschning, Hermann. The Voice of Destruction. New York: G. P. Putnams Sons, 1940. 203 92 Angebert, Jean-Michel. The Occult and the Third Reich; the Mystical Origins of Nazism and the Search for the Holy Grail. Trans Lewis A. M. Sumberg. New York: Macmillan, 1974. 19. 93 Nearly every organization in the Nazi Party adopted the runes into their respective symbols. The Hitler Youth used the single sieg while the agricultural department adopted the apple ruin.

Hitlers idea for his spiritual kingdom to last for a thousand years is not a new idea. Revelation 20 speaks of an upcoming thousand year kingdom where Christ will reign with his resurrected believers:

o Rev 20:4 And I saw thrones, and they sat upon them, and judgment was given unto them: and I saw the souls of them that were beheaded for the witness of Jesus, and for the word of God, and which had not worshipped the beast, neither his image, neither had received his mark upon their foreheads, or in their hands; and they lived and reigned with Christ a thousand years. o Rev 20:5 But the rest of the dead lived not again until the thousand years were finished. This is the first resurrection.

Though Hitler proclaimed that his Reich would last a thousand years, he realized that he would not live long to see it in fruition. In 1934, Hitler told Hermann Rauschning, .=I need ten years of

law-making, he cried excitedly. =The time is short. I have not long to live, and I must first wage our war of liberation. I must lay the foundations on which others can build after me. I shall not see it fulfilled, he finished suddenly..91

The Pagan Empire The spiritual foundation of the Third Reich was built with ancient pagan traditions and symbols. The Nazi Party originally began as a small, obscure occultist group that operated more like a social group than a political party. Its symbol, the swastika, was selected by Hitler to serve as a .universal symbol to link up with all the religions and magics based on symbolism..92 The SS was run by the Third Reichs chief occultist, Heinrich Himmler, who integrated pagan rituals into organizational meetings and ceremonies. The SS logo93 was adopted from the ancient Germanic alphabet or runes, symbols which were revered by Third Reich occultists. Old pagan holidays such as the summer and winter solstices became major holidays on the Nazi calendar.

The winter solstice is a particularly interesting celebration because it was held a few days before December 25 each year. One reporter who was assigned to cover German affairs found a noticeable change in how Germans celebrated the holiday season:

.From the Nazi Christmas, gone is the legend of shepherds abiding in the fields near Bethlehem to whom an angel of the Lord brought glad tidings of great joy. Gone is the star of Bethlehem and the wise men from the East whom it guided to the lowly inn which the Christ child was newly born. Gone is even the Christ child and manager in which they laid him..

.Something more in accord with the political exigencies of the time is being put in their place. It is difficult to classify this something, but it seems to be a curious compound of the neo-paganism exemplified in Teutonic forefathers and brought up to date with the new personages in the foreground. For the present Deity remains, but is a mundane representative who bears a new profile.. 94 94 Birchall, Frederick T. .Nazis Change Tone of Christmas Fete.. New York Times. 22 Dec. 1936: Pg 13. ProQuest. Shields Library., Davis, CA. 26 Oct. 2004 <http://www.proquest.com>. 95 Ibid. 96 Rauschning, Hermann. The Voice of Destruction. New York: G. P. Putnams Sons, 1940. 237

This deity with a new profile is the Fuhrer who, according to Minister Hanns Kerrl, .assures the German future for us and our children..95

The Ultimate Enemy of the Jews Without question Adolf Hitler was the most infamous anti-Semite of all time. He was responsible for the deaths of 6 million Jews, which was at the time approximately 1/3 of the total world Jewish population and 2/3 of European Jewish population. Hitler told Hermann Rauschning that the Jews have not only been a problem for him but also for his predecessors-the

kings who came before him-and how he has dealt with them differently: .=The Jew, he said, =is always with us. But it is easier to combat him in the flesh than an invisible daemon. The Jew was the enemy of the Roman Empire, even of Egypt and Babylon; but I have been the first to go all out against him..96 Indeed, no one went as far as Hitler did to distress the Jews. Pharaoh persecuted only Jewish males, so he could keep the Jewish population in his kingdom in check. Sennacherib, Nebuchadnezzar, and Nero did not devote all their resources to persecuting Jews. Antiochus persecuted Jews who refused to convert to Hellenism. As an act of revenge, Haman

sought to exterminate every Jew within the borders of the Persian Empire. Adolf Hitler wanted every Jew in the entire world killed, and he built and unleashed a massive war machine to pursue them all. Was Hitlers main goal the acquisition of lebensraum (living space) for his Reich? The way Hitler conducted the war suggests that his main goal was the extermination of the Jews rather than the quest for lebensraum. As the Soviets advanced westwards Hitler diverted trains that could had been used to send supplies and troop support to his retreating army and used them to transport Jews to various death camps. The need for lebensraum may instead have been an excuse that Hitler needed to gain access to millions of Jews who lived in Eastern Europe and the Soviet Union. Hitler revealed to the Reichstag nine years after he came to power that his war was to bring the extermination of every Jew:

.Instead, the result of this war will be the destruction of Jewry. For the first time others will not bleed alone. For the first time the genuine old Jewish law will be applied: =An eye for an eye, a tooth for a tooth! And the more this war spreads, the more antiSemitism will spread. This may be said to world Jewry. Anti-Semitism will be nourished in every prison camp, in every family which must be informed why they must sacrifice to the bitter end. And the hour will come when the most evil world enemy of all times will have played out its role for perhaps a thousand years at least.97. 97 Leher, Steven. .Hitlers Threat.. 24 Jun. 2006. 22 Jul. 2006. <http://stevenlehrer.com/Hitler_threat.htm>. 98 Maser, Werner. Hitlers Letters and Notes. William Heinemann Ltd. 1974 London. 365. 99 Rauschning, Hermann. The Voice of Destruction. New York: G. P. Putnams Sons, 1940. 49

Even to the last day of his life Hitler called for the annihilation of the Jewish race. In the final paragraph of Hitlers last political testament, he expressed his continuing desire for the

annihilation of all Jews. .Above all, I enjoin the government and the people to uphold the race laws to the limit and to resist mercilessly the poisoner of all nations, international Jewry..98

New Religion In 1934, Adolf Hitler reigned over a Christian-nation, which was something that he wanted to change. Hitler told Rauschning: .The Religions are all alike, no matter what they call themselves. They have no future-certainty none for the Germans. Fascism, if it likes, may come to terms with the Church. So shall I. Why not? That will not prevent me from tearing up Christianity root and branch, and annihilating it in Germany..99 In Christianitys place Hitler planned to install a new religion in not only Germany but also the rest of the world.

President Franklin D. Roosevelt revealed Hitlers plan of establishing a new religion:

.It is a plan to abolish all existing religions, Catholic, Protestant, Mohammedan, Hindu, Buddhist, and Jewish alike [] the cross and all other symbols of religion are to be forbidden. The clergy are to be ever liquidated, silenced under penalty of the concentration camps, where even now so many fearless men are being tortured because they have placed God above Hitler. In the place of the churches of our civilization there is to be set up an international Nazi church, a church which will be served by orators sent out by the Nazi government. And in the place of the Bible, the words of =Mein Kampf will be imposed and enforced as Holy Writ. And in the place of the cross of Christ will be put two symbols, the swastika and the naked sword..100 100 .President Roosevelts Navy Day Address on World Affairs.. 28 Oct. 1941. New York Times. Pg 4. ProQuest. Shields Library., Davis, CA. 26 Oct. 2004 <http://www.proquest.com>.

Nazi intentions were confirmed on January 3, 1942 when The New York Times published a 30point program detailing the key doctrines of the new National Reich Church. Below is listed the most blasphemous details of the new religion that Hitler planned to replace Christianity with:

1. The National Reich Church specifically demands the immediate turning over to its possession of all churches and chapels, to become national churches.

5. The National Reich Church is immutably fixed in its one objective: to destroy that Christian belief imported into Germany in the unfortunate year 800, whose tenets conflict with both the heart and mentality of the German.

13. The National Reich Church demands the immediate cessation of the printing of the Bible, as well as its dissemination, throughout the Reich and colonies. All Sunday papers with any religious content shall also be suppressed.

14. The National Reich Church shall see that the importation of the Bible and other religious works into Reich territory is made impossible.

15. The National Reich Church decrees that the most important document of all timetherefore the guiding document of the German people-is the book of our Fuhrer, .Mein Kampf.. It recognizes that this book contains the principles of the purist ethnic morals under which the German people must live.

16. The National Reich Church will see to it that this book spread its active forces among the entire population and that all Germans live by it.

18. The National Reich Church will remove from the altars of all churches the Bible, the cross and religious objects.

19. In their places will be set that which must be venerated by the German people and therefore is by God, our most saintly book, .Mein Kampf,. and to the left of this a sword.

21. In the National Reich Church there will be no remission of sins; its tenet is that, once committed, a sin is irrevocable and will be implacably punished by the laws of nature and in this world.

30. On the day of the foundation of the National Reich Church the Christian cross shall be removed from all churches, cathedrals, and chapels inside the frontiers of the Reich and its colonies and will be replaced by the symbol of invincible Germany-the swastika.101 101 Brigham, Daniel. .Nazi State Church Plan Proposes to Oust Other Faiths and Ban Bible.. New York Times. 3 Jan 1942: Pg 1. ProQuest. Shields Library., Davis, CA. 26 Oct. 2004 <http://www.proquest.com>.

The way that Hitler could pursue the annihilation of Christianity along with the Jews was through his war. Gereon Goldmann, a former Waffen SS solider, revealed the hidden, yet key

objectives of Hitlers war:

.One day a big shot from Berlin came to speak to us. We were stunned by what he said, but we werent allowed to tell anyone-it was strictly confidential. This man told us that =Victory could only be complete when all the churches were destroyed. Not only the Jewish religion, but also all Christian faiths would have to be eliminated..102 102 .The SS. The Waffen SS, by ZDF Enterprises. 103 Angebert, Jean-Michel. The Occult and the Third Reich; the Mystical Origins of Nazism and the Search for the Holy Grail. Trans Lewis A. M. Sumberg. New York: Macmillan, 1974. 120 104 Jackh, Ernest. The War on Mans Soul. New York: The Ferris Printing Company, 1943. 18 105 Connolly, Kate. .Germans Still Split over Plot to Kill Hitler.. Telegraph. 19 Jul. 2004. 15 Jul. 2006 <http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/main.jhtml?xml=/news/2004/07/19/wger19.xml>.

Another profane goal of Hitlers new religion was to create a new man: .=National Socialism is more than a religion; it is the will to create superman..103 This superman was not only to replace man, but to also replace God: =National Socialism is the will to create mankind Now man is becoming God..104

Almost Immortal Adolf Hitler escaped death countless number of times, including 42 planned assassinations attempts even though he was the man that hundreds of millions of people wanted to see dead.105 Hitler served much of his time in the German Army as a courier who often had to move through enemy fire to deliver messages to the frontlines. He was involved in some of the bloodiest battles of the war. Hitlers combat experience included action in the Battle of Somme, Neuve Chapelle, and the second and third battles of Ypres. Time after time Hitlers regiment was decimated, which made him the only continuity that the regiment had. One day during the

war, Hitler left his fellow soldiers to chase after a dog, who he had recently befriended, moments before an explosion killed everyone in the area he had just left. As a politician Hitler was targeted in several assassination attempts. One notable attempt came in November 1939 when a Hitler opponent placed a time bomb under the stage where Hitler was scheduled to deliver a speech. On the day Hitler gave his speech he did something unprecedented. Typically Hitler arrived very late to a public appearance in a deliberate attempt to build tension in his audience. On this day Hitler arrived early to his speech and left the area thirteen minutes before the bomb exploded. As the Supreme Commander of the German Armed Forces, Hitler was marked for murder by German opposition and by the Allies. In July 1944 a group of conspirators attempted to assassinate Hitler by placing a bomb next to him during a meeting. The bomb exploded killing both those to the left and to the right of Hitler. Hitler was hardly wounded by the explosion because the bomb was placed next to a table leg that protected him from the lethal force of the blast. The only individual who could kill Hitler was Hitler himself.

Hitlers death would mark the end of the life of the 7th king prophesied by the Book of Revelation. His time as a ruler was indeed the shortest of all his predecessors along with his empire, which crumbled at least a hundred years earlier than any other. Before Hitler committed suicide he gave a curious aid a sly remark about someone who would come after him and be worth fighting for. Heinz Linge asked Hitler, .=My Fuhrer, who should we be fighting our way through for now? Hitler turned to Linge and stared at him for a while in silence, then he announced pompously, =For the coming man.!106 The coming man that Hitler spoke of could not had been Admiral Karl Doenitz, who Hitler named his successor, nor any other surviving Third Reich official since they were already there (alive). Hitler had hinted about a future man when he revealed to his aid, .I am not the Messiah. He will come after me..107 In an upcoming chapter I demonstrate that this .coming man. that Hitler spoke of is the 8th king of Revelation 17. 106 Parparov, Fyodor. The Hitler Book: the Secret Dossier Prepared for Stalin from the Interrogations of Hitlers Personal Aides. Ed. Henrik Eberle and Matthias Uhl. Trans. Giles MacDonogh. New York: Public Affairs, 2005. 270 107 Wagener, Otto. Hitler-Memoirs of a Confidant. Trans. Ruth Hein. New Haven: Yale University Press. 1985. 172

Conclusion There are some things that people cannot explain because they are not looking in the right places. Adolf Hitlers entire life was one such phenomenon because he was so evil, yet rose from a member of a party of seven to being worship like he was a god by a nation with his charisma. The prophecies of the Bible explain why he despised the Jews, was only in power for just over a decade, acted as a demigod, and why he committed suicide instead of fighting for his

life.

10. The Antichrists Empire The Master Djwhal Khul has written that the New World Religion will emerge out of Russia. Benjamin Creme

Introduction Two chapters ago I demonstrated that the fourth beast in Daniel 7 and the beast from the Sea in Revelation 13 are the same entity. Both represent the 8th Empire of Satan and the empire of Antichrist. This empire will consist of ten kingdoms led by rulers who will transfer their authority to Antichrist:

o Rev 17:12 And the ten horns which thou sawest are ten kings, which have received no kingdom as yet; but receive power as kings one hour with the beast. o Rev 17:13 These have one mind, and shall give their power and strength unto the beast. o Rev 17:17 For God hath put in their hearts to fulfil his will, and to agree, and give their kingdom unto the beast, until the words of God shall be fulfilled.

This empire will be unlike any other. It is characterized by its sheer power and by its ability to dominate the earth.

o Dan 7:7 After this I saw in the night visions, and behold a fourth beast, dreadful and terrible, and strong exceedingly; and it had great iron teeth: it devoured and brake in pieces, and stamped the residue with the feet of it: and it was diverse from all the beasts that were before it; and it had ten horns.

 o Dan 7:23 Thus he said, The fourth beast shall be the fourth kingdom upon earth, which shall be diverse from all kingdoms, and shall devour the whole earth, and shall tread it down, and break it in pieces.

The purpose of this chapter is to identify which 10 kingdoms will be a part of the Antichrists empire. However, before we can identify which countries belong in his empire we must distinguish between .nations. and kingdoms.

Nations vs. Kingdoms Genesis 10 provides us with the Table of Nations, which is a list of the descendants of the three sons of Noah. Every descendant listed formed their own nation, and according to Genesis 10:32 .were the families of the sons of Noah, by their generations, in their nations. And from these the nations were divided in the earth after the flood.. At the end of each section describing the descendents of each of Noahs sons the Bible makes it clear that every person and detail listed previously described the nations formed and the locations were they initially formed. For instance, Genesis 10:6-10:19 lists the sons of Ham and describes where these nations established their borders:

o Gen 10:6 And the sons of Ham; Cush, and Mizraim, and Phut, and Canaan. o Gen 10:19 And the border of the Canaanites was from Sidon, as thou comest to Gerar, unto Gaza; as thou goest, unto Sodom, and Gomorrah, and Admah, and Zeboim, even unto Lasha. o Gen 10:20 These are the sons of Ham, after their families, after their tongues, in their countries, and in their nations.

Each nation described in Genesis did not remain in the same geographic location where it originated. Nations moved to different locations through time as the Lord determines where each nation lives and when they will they live there:

o Act 17:26 And hath made of one blood all nations of men for to dwell on all the face of the earth, and hath determined the times before appointed, and the bounds of their habitation;

A nation is not exactly the same as a kingdom. For example, Christ distinguishes a nation from a kingdom in Matthew 24:7.

o Mat 24:7 For nation shall rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom: and there shall be famines, and pestilences, and earthquakes, in divers places.

Kingdoms are political entities whereas nations are .people groups. rather than ethnic groups. Kingdoms are a temporary phenomenon that can be destroyed whenever the Lord decides it is time. For instance, the Third Reich was destroyed only after being in existence for twelve years. In contrast, nations generally are not temporary because races tend to endure for thousands of

years. For instance, the Jews are the descendants of Canaan, and have managed to survive despite Satans numerous attempts to exterminate them.

The First Three Kingdoms Each kingdom that Antichrist shall eventually control will already have its own boundaries and rulers established before he rises to power. However, once these kingdoms respective boundaries and rulers are established, Antichrist will .humble./overthrow three of these rulers.

o Dan 7:20 And of the ten horns that were in his head, and of the other which came up, and before whom three fell; even of that horn that had eyes, and a mouth that spake very great things, whose look was more stout than his fellows. o Dan 7:24 And the ten horns out of this kingdom are ten kings that shall arise: and another shall rise after them; and he shall be diverse from the first, and he shall subdue three kings.

Ezekiel identifies the first three kingdoms that Antichrist will control after he overthrows the first three kings. These three kingdoms will serve as Antichrists initial powerbase.

o Eze 38:2 Son of man, set your face against Gog, the land of Magog, the prince of Rosh, Meshech, and Tubal, and prophesy against him. o Eze 38:3 And say, So says the Lord Jehovah: Behold, I am against you, O Gog, the prince of Rosh, Meshech, and Tubal.108

108 Here I quote from the LITV version of the Bible instead of KJV. I quote this version of the Bible because I believe there is a mistranslation of the original Hebrew, which will be discussed in detail soon..

Meshech and Tubal are found in Table of Nations as sons of Japheth while Rosh is a different matter. Since nations/people groups move throughout time we must not focus on where nations were located during Biblical times but where they are located today.

Tubal It was popular in the 1980s to classify Tubal as part of Russia because the thought of the Soviet Union allying with Antichrist complied with most peoples suspicions of the superpower. The main support behind the Tubal is part of Russia argument was that there is a river in Siberia called Tobolsk, which sounded like Tubal. However, this argument is unconvincing because with this line of reasoning the two towers in England named after Gog and Magog would have to be considered the Biblical Land of Magog. Also there is no historical evidence that a people group with a name that resembled Tubal migrated all the way to Siberia. Over time popular support for the Tubal is part of Russia argument has eroded and only a handful of people still believe in it today. Josephus explained that .Thobel founded the Thobelites, who are now called Iberes..109 The ancient Iberes did not live in Spain, but in what is today the Republic of Georgia. The Georgian people are direct descendents of the ancient Iberians, so present-day Georgia is biblical Tubal. 109 Josephus, Flavius. Antiquities of the Jews. Trans. William Whiston Chapter 1:6.1 110 Yamauchi, Edwin. .The Scythians: Invading Hordes from the Russian Steppes.. Biblical Archeologist. 46.2 (1983): 96 111 Mushki. 13. Aug. 2006. 12. Aug. 2006. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mushki. 112 Russell, James R. .Poets, Mystics, and Philosophers; or The Near East in the Mind of Armenia. Lecture One.. 27 Aug. 2006 27 Aug. 2006. http://www.commercemarketplace.com/home/naasr/NAASR_2003_1.htm.

Meshech Like with Tubal, it was popular in the 1980s to classify Meshech as part of Russia

because it seemed to make sense with everyones suspicions of the Soviet Union. The MeshechRussia theory was built on a flimsily premise that the name for the city of Moscow was directly derived from Meshech. Scholars studied this connection and proved that it was linguistically impossible.110 Others who still want to prove that Meshech was Russia cite rabbinic speculation and correspondence. Sources such as these are dubious because they are secondary sources based on a misconception of where Meshech is. Josephus tells us that Meshech became the Mosocheni (Moschi) who at the time lived in Cappadocia. However, Pliny locates the Moscheni in southern Armenia.111 Regardless of where the Moscheni were located in 1st Century AD it is apparent that these people eventually migrated northward. The Georgians called the Armenians the Somekhi, which Harvard Professor James R. Russell claims .may preserve the old name of the Mushki the protoArmenians' Cappadocian cousins..112

Rosh Some argue that Rosh is not one of Antichrists ten kingdoms since it is not listed in the Table of Nations and that Ezekiel 38:2-3 describe Gog as the .=chief prince of Meshech and Tubal.. Even though Rosh is not listed in the Table of Nations it does not mean that it cannot be one of the ten kingdoms. For instance, Persia is not listed in the Table of Nations, yet it will be one of the ten kingdoms of Antichrists empire (Persia will be discussed later in this chapter). C.F. Keil, a Biblical scholar and Hebrew language expert, dismisses the argument that Ezekiel 38:2 and 3 describes Gog as the .=chief prince of Meshech and Tubal.:

It is true that Ewald follows Aquila, the Targum, and Jerome, and connects ..... with ....... as an appellative in the sense of princeps capitis, chief prince. But the argument used in support of this explanation, namely, that there is no people of the name of Rosh mentioned either in the Old Testament or by Josephus, is a very weak one; whilst, on the other hand, the appellative rendering, though possible, no doubt, after the analogy of ........ ..... in 1Ch_27:5, is by no means probable, for the simple reason that the ....... occurs again in Eze_38:3 and Eze_39:1, and in such repetitions circumstantial titles are generally abbreviated. The Byzantine and Arabic writers frequently mention a people called ....., Arab. Ru=s, dwelling in the country of the Taurus, and reckoned among the Scythian tribes (for the passages, see Ges. Thesaurus, p. 1253), so that there is no reason to question the existence of a people known by the name of Rosh113 113 Delitzsch, F. and Carl, F. Keil. Commentary on the Old Testament in Ten Volumes. Trans. James Martin. Grand Rapids: Eerdmans, 1983.

Many people claim that .Rosh. is Russia because they sound alike. Although I think that Russia is Rosh, I do not think that this line of reasoning is viable. There is no easy way to demonstrate that Russia is Rosh using direct historical evidence. However, I think there is a way to demonstrate that Rosh is Russia using indirect historical evidence.

The Land of Magog Ezekiel 38:2 makes it clear that Antichrist will originate from the land of (the people group) Magog. Since Antichrist is a futuristic individual the only way he can originate from the land of Magog is for him to be based at the people groups future location. We cannot say that the .land of Magog. defines a fixed geographic location like the .land of Israel. since is .Magog. the name of a (mobile) people group-not the name of a geographic location. Next I reveal who were Magogites and where we can find their descendants today.

Josephus tells us that the Magogites were the Scythians, who used the swastika to decorate many objects.114 The Scythians were a nomadic people who traveled throughout the Eurasian steppes and periodically invaded/terrorized foreign lands. The Scythians once lived in a land called Scythia which extended throughout Europe and Asia, and at one time may had a population up to 500,000 people.115 The Scythians thrived until 4th Century B.C. when the civilization inexplicably collapsed. Nadezhda Gavrilyuk admits .we simply dont know what happened () Scythia may have just collapsed from internal pressures, like the Soviet Union..116 After the decline of Scythia, the Scythians, according to Strabo, .moved westward to the region of the Danubes mouth. while others .migrated south to Crimea..117 The Scythians that migrated to the Danube were later defeated by the Romans while most of the Scythians that lived in the Crimea were killed in 108B.C. when the kingdom of Pontus attacked.118 In the following centuries after the Scythians were displaced, the Huns, Mongols, Slavs, Vikings, and Goths occupied the land that the Scythians once controlled.119 114 Josephus, Flavius. Antiquities of the Jews. Trans. William Whiston Chapter 1:6.1 115 Edwards M. "Searching for the Scythians," National Geographic, vol. 190, No.3, September 1996. 76. 116 Ibid. 117 Ibid. 118 Ibid. 77 119 Ibid. 78 120 North Ossetia is also called Alania by the natives. 121 Ibid. 122 Trotsky, Leon. Stalin, An Apraisal of the Man and His Influence. London: Hollis and Carter 1947. 3 The displacement of the Scythians and the subsequent foreign occupation of their land

did not prevent scholars from locating their descendants. .Scholars say a remnant of the Scythians endures in the 700,000 Ossetians, whose homeland today is a two-part enclave straddling the Caucasus Mountains, North Ossetia120, the larger part, lies within Russia, while South Ossetia intrudes into Georgia..121 The Ossetians claim that they are direct descendants of the Alans, who were known as the Royal Scythians. They still practice many of the traditions and rituals of their Scythian ancestors, including the sacrificing of horses.

Joseph Stalin An Antichrist-type figure rising from either North or South Ossetia is not unprecedented when you consider one major, historical figure. Leon Trotsky noted that Joseph Stalin, one of the most infamous leaders in Russian history, was half Ossetian on his fathers side.122 Stalin was a Georgian native like most Ossetians since they had no homeland to call their own. However, Stalin, in one of his first acts since he rose to power in April 1922, took land from Georgia to create North and South Ossetia and made them separate political entities. Soon Stalin decimated the Russian Orthodox Church, ordered the execution of its priests, and ordered for the destruction of all religious images. He replaced the religious void in the Soviet Union by

establishing himself as god and received worship from the people who bought into his Cult of Personality. Like Hitler, Stalin felt no remorse when a life was lost, especially when it got him closer to his goal. In fact, he personally decided who should or should not be included on a death list.123 Sometimes Stalin was disappointed with the number of names on the list, so he wrote instructions on the .disappointing. list requesting that more names get added next time. Regardless of who was listed, according to historian Anton Antonov-Ovseyenko, Stalins death quota had to be filled no matter whom was listed: .Just like the production quota for timber, the quota for extermination was over-fulfilled especially among the countrys elite. That was absolutely typical for Stalins type of terror..124 Throughout his reign, Stalin authorized the deportations of entire ethnic groups from their lands, including the Chechens and Ingush. However, Stalin left the Ossetians alone and actually expanded North Ossetias territory at the expense of the Chechens and Ingush. In 1953 Stalin made plans to exterminate all the Jews in the Soviet Union, but died suddenly just a couple of weeks before these plans were to be executed. Minutes before Stalin died witnesses at his side saw something that they would never forget. Here is one account from Stalins daughter Svetlana: 123 Stalin used random killings throughout the Soviet Union as a way to keep the population inline. A death list was an instrument that allowed these killings to be administered in an efficient manner. A person could appear on these lists whether they were guilty or not and anyone whose name remained on the list after Stalin signed off on it was to be executed. 124Stalin: Man of Steel. A&E Entertainment. 2003 125 Hitler and Stalin: Roots of Evil A&E Entertainment. 2002

.He suddenly opened his eyes and cast a glance over everyone in the room. It was a terrible glance and something incompressible and awesome happened. He suddenly lifted his left hand as though he were pointing to something above and bringing down a curse on all of us. The next moment after a final effort the spirit wrenched itself free

from the flesh..125

Antichrist does not need to have an Ossetian heritage because Ezekiel 38 does not say that Antichrist is a Magogite as some argue. In fact, none of the potential individuals who could be Antichrist were a descendent of the Scythians.

Why Russia In the previous two sections I have demonstrated that Antichrist will likely originate from either North or South Ossetia. It also seems clear that Antichrist is going to be a major world leader at the time of his emergence. If Rosh is not a kingdom and the third kingdom is .the Land of Magog. then how can Antichrist be a major power broker if he is backed by the combined

strength of Ossetia, Georgia, and Armenia? In order for Antichrist to be a true global power broker he will need to have access to Russias military and natural resources. Therefore, Russia/Rosh must be his third kingdom (and not the Land of Magog) because Antichrist needs to have the military and natural resources necessary to make political/economic deals with other kingdoms and to conquer other kingdoms. I believe there is a reason why Ezekiel 38:2 distinguishes between .Gog, from the land of Magog. and .the prince of Rosh, Meshech, and Tubal.. Currently, North Ossetia is a part of Russia and South Ossetia is under Russian control. I believe South Ossetia will eventually reunite with North Ossetia as a part of Russia. Eventually, North and South Ossetia will reunite and we will have the land of Magog within the borders of Russia (Rosh). Therefore, I think that the Antichrist, like Stalin, will rise from obscurity from the Caucasus and rule Russia. This scenario fits very well with the Antichrists description in Daniel 7:8. Antichrist will begin as a small leader (a little horn) and will rise to prominence by seizing power.

Fallen Angel Confirmation The amazing thing is that the notion that the Antichrist will emerge from Russia is not only supported by the Bible, but is also supported by the little-known statements made by the highest-level mouthpieces and representatives of the forces of darkness. For instance, Benjamin Creme mentioned that Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul revealed in a written work that the New World Religion will arise out of Russia: .The Master Djwhal Khul has written that the New World Religion will emerge out of Russia. As people from the various existing world religions fit themselves for the experience of initiation, they will go to the Mystery Schools, where they will be prepared for this great experience, the most sacred aspects of the New World Religion..126

126 .Maitreyas Teachings of Religion.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 12 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/ARCHIVES/M_teachings/Mt_religion.htm. The written work where Djwhal Khul revealed this stunning piece of information is a book he co-authored with New Age author Alice Bailey called the Destiny of Nations. In a section about the outlook for Russia, Bailey and Djwhal Khul state that the New World (New Age) Religion will emerge from Russia and will be linked with the appearance of the Spiritual Hierarchy (fallen angels) on the world stage and the appearance of the Antichrist (Sun of Righteousness in this passage).

.Out of Russia will emerge that new and magical religion about which I have so often told you. It will be the product of the great and imminent Approach which will take place between humanity and the Hierarchy. From these two centers of spiritual force, in which

the light whichever shineth in and from the East will irradiate the West, the whole world will be flooded with the radiance of the Sun of Righteousness..127 127Bailey, Alice. The Destiny of Nations. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1949. 61 128 Ibid. 61 129Lloyd, James. .The God of Forces.. Christian Media Research Newsletter. 28 Apr. 2003. Last Accessed 12 Jul. 2009. http://www.christianmediaresearch.com/cmc-65.html.

Bailey and Djwhal Khul go further to reveal that the New Age Religion will emerge from Russia through the efforts of a vitally important man. They equate a .vital Russian exponent of the true religion. (or a crucial Russian promoter of the New Age Religion) to the man who Russians have long been waiting for and the man who fulfills a very old prophecy.

.I am not here referring to the imposition of any political ideology, but to the appearance of a great and spiritual religion which will justify the crucifixion of a great nation and which will demonstrate itself and be focused in a great and spiritual Light which will be held aloft by a vital Russian exponent of true religion - that man for whom many Russians have been looking and who will be the justification of a most ancient prophecy..128

I suspect that the ancient prophecy that this man that Bailey and Djwhal Khul refer to is the prophecy given in Daniel 11:35 onwards, which is a prophecy about the rise of Antichrist. The particular Bible verse that I think reflects what Bailey and Djwhal Khul are alluding to is Daniel 11:38. Daniel 11:38 reveals that the Antichrist will honor the .god of forces. or a god that his ancestors were unfamiliar with.

o Dan 11:38 But in his estate shall he honour the God of forces: and a god whom his fathers knew not shall he honour with gold, and silver, and with precious stones, and pleasant things.

The .god of forces. is Satan. According to Christian Media Research, Hebrew for the term .god of forces. can be translated to mean .the energy deity or the power gods..129 This translation of the Hebrew fits the New Age usage of the term .god of forces.. Christian Media Research reports that New Agers and others actually consider God to be a force:

In the occultic oriented mystery religious traditions, we find a system of belief known under a variety of names including Pantheism, Spiritism, Theosophy, Freemasonry, and a

host of others. Essentially, this worldview claims that God is not a personality as much as a phenomenon. The central idea is expressed in various Eastern religious systems as well as in Gnosticism and even Western philosophy. This doctrine claims that God is a force that is comprised of equal components of good and evil.130 130 Ibid. 131 Dowling, Levi. H. The Aquarian Gospel of Jesus the Christ. New York: Cosimo Classics. 2007. 11

An example of this is the New Age book, The Aquarian Gospel of Jesus the Christ. The author of this book notes that a person may become one with the .spirit of the god of force. if they accept the New Age god: "In the infinite One manifest we note the attributes of Force, Intelligence and Love, and a person may be in full accord with one of these attributes and not with the others. One may enter fully into the spirit of the God of Force..." 131 Therefore, since the god of the New Age is Satan, the .god of forces. must be Satan. Russians historically have an affinity for a strong man to rule over them. Russians tolerate Czars, revere brutal Soviet dictators like Lenin and Stalin, and support strong central governments in the Post-Soviet era. Today Russians yearn for a strong man who will bring Russia back in a global power that it once was under the days of Stalin. Antichrist is a man that perfectly fits the bill as he described in Daniel 8:23 as a ruthless leader:

o Dan 8:23 And in the latter time of their kingdom, when the transgressors are come to the full, a king of fierce countenance, and understanding dark sentences, shall stand up.

Therefore, in addition to revealing that the New Age Religion will rise up from Russian, Bailey and Djwhal Khul reveal that the man who will do it will be the Antichrist, the man who fulfills prophecy and the hopes of the Russian people for a strong leader.

The Other Seven Kingdoms Ezekiel also identifies Persia, Ethiopia, and Libya as other kingdoms that will join Antichrist:

o Eze 38:5 Persia, Ethiopia, and Libya with them; all of them with shield and helmet: o Eze 38:6 Gomer, and all his bands; the house of Togarmah of the north quarters, and all his bands: and many people with thee.

As was mention briefly earlier, we can conclude that not every kingdom Antichrist allies with will consist of a nation (an entire people group) since Persia is not listed in the Table of Nations. However, we can also conclude that each nation identified by Ezekiel will have its own kingdom since each is listed alongside the Persian kingdom as separate allies of Antichrist. Since Persia is an ally of Antichrist it must be one of the ten kingdoms described in Revelation 13 and 17. Also each nation listed by Ezekiel will be a member of Antichrists ten kingdom confederation since each nation listed by Ezekiel will have its own kingdom. Therefore, Ezekiel 38 identified eight of Antichrists ten kingdoms. An additional detail about the identity of these ten kingdoms are that three of its kingdoms will be the earlier kingdoms described in Daniel 7.

o Dan 7:12 As concerning the rest of the beasts, they had their dominion taken away: yet their lives were prolonged for a season and time.

These kingdoms are Babylon, Persia, and Syria (Greece/Javan). Since we have already included Persia we can add Babylon and Syria to the list, which now gives us the identity of all ten kingdoms: Rosh, Meshech, Tubal, Togarmah, Gomer, Persia, Put, Cush, Babylon, and Syria.

Syria The third kingdom described in Daniel 7 is the Seleucid Kingdom based in Syria. Although the rulers had Greek heritage, the Bible does not require us to make modern day Greece one of the ten kingdoms since not every kingdom will represent a nation.

Cush Cush was the son of Ham, and the Cushites are identified with the Sudanese. Put Josephus identifies Phutites with Libyans, who most scholars believe still live in the modern day country of Libya.132 132 Josephus, Flavius. Antiquities of the Jews. Trans. William Whiston Chapter 1:6.2

Persia Ezekiel and Daniel identify Persia as one of the nations that will be allied with Antichrist. Ancient Persia was located in the area known as modern day Iran. Most Persians today still live in Iran, so Iran will be one of Antichrists allies.

Gomer Gomer was the eldest son of Japheth. Josephus linked Gomer with the Galatians, who were also known as Gaul. Julius Caesar noted three divisions of Gaul: the Belgae, the Aquitani, and the Galli (Celtae).133 These particular three tribes spread throughout Western Europe encompassing the countries of Great Britain, France, Italy, and the Benelux. However, these were not all of the divisions of Gaul. Other tribes moved into Central Europe, which makes it clear that Gomer is represented today by the European Union. 133 .Gaul.. Microsoft Encarta Reference Library 2003 Most Christians believe that Antichrists empire will be a revived Roman Empire embodied by the European Union (EU). While I agree that the EU will play a prophetic role I disagree about how important its role will be. The EU will simply be one of the ten nations of Antichrists empire not the entire empire. As was shown earlier, Antichrists base will be established in Russia/Caucasus not in the EU.

Iraq Whatever remains of Iraq will likely be a valuable ally of Antichrist. Daniel 7 revealed that each of the first three beasts in the vision would have their kingdoms restored and would be destroyed at the same time the fourth beast is destroyed. Similarly, the feet of Nebuchadnezzars statue smash the kingdoms representing the head, shoulder, and thighs. Ancient Babylon is

located in the Sunni areas of Iraq and will probably become an independent country someday.

Togarmah Traditionally Togarmah is identified as modern day Armenia. Some contend that the Armenians call themselves .the house of Togarmah.. However, it is unlikely that Armenia is Togarmah because the Armenians are descendants of the Moschoi who were biblical Meshech. It makes little geographical sense for Armenia to be Togarmah since Togarmah is supposed to

come from the remotest parts of the north. Georgia is north of Armenia, yet Tubal compared to Togarmah is not considered to be located in the remotest parts of the north. Armenia as Togarmah also does not make sense because Ezekiel 38:6 says that Togarmah will come with .all its bands., that is, with all its armies. This plural version of the word .army. indicates that Togarmah will attack with many armies rather than with just one army. Togarmah will come with many peoples, which indicates that it will be formed from more than one country like the E.U. Josphseus identifies Togarmah as the Phygrians, who lived in Turkey at the time.134 The Phygrian people were scattered after the various invaders, including the Romans, besieged their settlements. Nevertheless, scholars believe that the Jews used Togarmah to refer to the Turkish people: 134 Josephus, Flavius. Antiquities of the Jews. Trans. William Whiston Chapter 1:6.1 135 Zakiev, Mirfatykh. .Ethnic Roots of the Tartar People.. 17 Aug. 2006. 16 Jul. 2005. http://www.hunmagyar.org/turan/tatar/tatar-origin.html. 136 Turkic People. 13 Aug. 2006. 13 Aug. 2006. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Turkic_people.

.Ethnonymically close to Tochars are biblical Togars (Togarma) and Scythian Tavrs. In the Bible (in Genesis) story, son of Yaphet, Homer [Gomer] had three sons: Askenaz, Rithat and Dogarma (Ch. 10). This Bible chapter was written in most ancient times. Later, Dogarma~Togarma becomes a usual ethnonym for Trks in Old Hebrew language. Khazars, who accepted Judaism, were also called Togarma. The part TogarTochar is clearly visible in this ethnonym, meaning =mountain or forest people; -ma, maybe, is an interrogative particle, compare: sin Togarmo? =Are you Togar?; or a truncated indicator of the adjective affix of the 1-st person singular: Togarmyn - Togarmy =I am Togar. The fact that the Jews gave Trks an ethnonym Togarma well before our era tells about the presence of Trks in Europe from the most ancient times..135

This reference to the Turkish people as Togarmah would account for why the Khazars considered themselves as descendents of Togarmah.

Geographically, Togarmah would cover a very large area since the Turkish people are spread throughout Asia, including of them living in the country of Turkey. There are five other independent Turkish countries including Azerbaijan, Kazakhstan, Turkmenistan, Uzbekistan, and Kyrgyzstan.136 In addition there are several concentrations of Turkish people in Russia and Western China. However, it is difficult to imagine a future political entity that unites Turkey with Central Asiait seems we have to identify Togarmah as either Turkey or with Central Asia. Fortunately, we know from Ezekiel 38:6 that Togarmah will be comprised of many countries, so Togarmah will likely be comprised of the Central Asian countries. Similarly,

an anonymous author who refers to themselves as .The Publisher. describes the movement of Togarmah and concludes that they eventually settled in Central Asia.

.The Tegarma or Tegarama migrated from Cappadocia into Armenia, and may have given his name to that district (the Armenians even claimed descent from him and undoubtedly are in part). From there they moved into Turcoman territory (Turkistan) a possible derivation of Tegarama. In Turkistan, among the tablelands of Pamir, rose a great mount, Tagharma. The Septuagint form is Thorgama. Milner, who is famous for his writings on the Japhetic races, discusses the trip to the deserts of Turkistan by Dr. Joseph Woolf, a missionary. Woolf recorded his experience in Travels and Adventures. He mentions how he came among a people claiming to be descendants of Japheth and calling themselves Togarmah. These were the Mongoloid peoples of Turkistan!.137 137 The Publisher. .The Origins of the South-East Asia.. Last Accessed 26 Jul 2008. 27 Dec. 2007. http://cgca.net/coglinks/origin/oon2.1/vol2_1p4.html. 138 .2008 BP Statistical Review of World Energy. Jun. 2008. http://www.bp.com/liveassets/bp_internet/globalbp/globalbp_uk_english/reports_and_pu blications/statistical_energy_review_2008/STAGING/local_assets/downloads/pdf/statisti cal_review_of_world_energy_full_review_2008.pdf 8. 139 Ibid. 8 and 10. 140 Most, if not all, Middle Eastern countries have already extracted all of the easy to access oil. The Middle Easts remaining oil is very difficult and/or very expensive to access.

Today a single, political entity connecting the Turkish people of Central Asia is in its infancy, but I currently anticipate that it will likely develop into one of the most recognizable political entities in the world by the end of the next decade.

The Rise of Central Asia Central Asia is one of the most energy-rich regions on Earth. The EIA estimates that the

region has the third largest oil reserves on the planet and has greater natural gas potential than its oil potential. However, Central Asia is distinguished from the rest of the world because it is the last easily accessible region on Earth with significant, untapped oil and natural gas reserves. In 2007 Kazakhstan had 39.8 billion barrels of proven oil reserves, which is 10.4 billion more barrels than the U.S.138, yet was producing over 5 million less barrels a day than the United States. Meanwhile, Azerbaijan had 7 billion barrels in proven oil reserves, but only produced 868 thousand barrels per day in 2007.139 Though Central Asias oil reserves are well below the Middle Easts, their reserves are much easier to extract since it is mostly untapped.140 Although Uzbekistan and Turkmenistan have only a small number of proven oil reserves they are the top natural gas producers in the region. Together these two countries produce 4.3% of the worlds

natural gas output.141 It is likely that these two countries have a lot more natural gas and oil reserves than what has been found, but each countrys regime has prevented energy companies from conducting major exploration. However, the natural gas that has been found in Central Asia has mostly gone untapped as the region is characterized by one of the highest proven natural gas reserve-to-production ratios on the planet. The main reason why its natural gas resources have gone untapped is that .companies and governments have thus far shown greater interest in oil than in natural gas-owning in part, to the greater capital expenditures necessary to start up new natural gas projects, as well as to the regions lack of existing natural gas infrastructure..142 141 Ibid. 26. 142 .Caspian Sea Natural Gas.. 27 Aug. 2006. 21 Aug. 2006. http://www.eia.doe.gov/emeu/cabs/Caspian/NaturalGas.html. 143 I do not expect Russia and/or China to be a part of a future Central Asia version of the E.U. I expect China to turn against Russia and attempt to capture energy-rich Siberia. There is currently an emerging political body in Central Asia called the Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO). The current members of the SCO are China, Russia, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, and Uzbekistan. The SCO is particularly interesting because the members have already agreed to work together on security issues and economic issues. I believe the SCO is a major, first step towards the creation of a Central Asian version of the E.U.143 Here is why I see the creation of a Central Asia version of the E.U. (Note I wrote this next section in 2006 at a time when I did not even know that the SCO even existed): Future international demand for Central Asian oil and natural gas may cause Central Asian countries to pool their sovereignty together to create an entity that will serve their needs. Since many Central Asian countries possess significant, untapped oil and/or natural gas reserves and are surrounded by a powerful and energy-thirsty China we should anticipate increased

cooperation between these countries to maintain high prices, protect their energy resources, and maximize political power. Economic cooperation will likely include the formation of an oil cartel to maximize the financial gain from their coveted resources. Military cooperation is also likely to increase and may evolve into the creation of a common defense. It should not take as long as the EU. (who after the signing of the Maastricht Treaty still does not have a meaningful common defense) to create a common defense since they will need to find a way to protect their energy resources from energy-desperate countries, who may be desperate enough to fight over resources. Finally, political cooperation may develop from economic and military cooperation. The evolution of the EU from a coal and steel community into a fledgling political unit has shown that success in one policy area eventually leads to spillover into other policy areas. With this in mind, we should anticipate that the Central Asian countries will eventually seek political cooperation with each other if economic and military cooperation is successful. Like with an oil cartel, political cooperation may result in the creation of a supranational political institution that allows Central Asian countries to maximize political power derived from their

energy resources. As we have witnessed with American policy towards Saudi Arabia, countries with vast energy resources get preferential treatment. Each energy-rich Central Asian country will also receive preferential treatment relative to non-energy rich countries because energystarved countries will try their hardest to get on their good side. In a world where countries are competing for energy, relative friendship can make the difference in whether an energystarved country strikes a deal with an energy-rich country. A single political entity representing all Central Asia countries would force others to treat the entire region as a major global player instead of a pushover that countries can exploit.

Where is China? China is on the cusp of becoming the next political, economic, and military superpower. Its forecasted strength alone should make it a major player in the end times. However, the biblical evidence does not indicate that China will have a significant, end time role-well not as important as any of Antichrists ten kingdoms. Many argue that China is designated in the Bible as the .land of Sinim. in Isaiah 49:12. Isaiah 49:12 describes the return of Jews from distant lands. Some argue that Sinim is not China because the Jews during Isaiahs time could not have traveled that far and back. However, China had trade relations with the Middle East at the time, so Isaiah would have known where it was.144 Isaiah 49:12 refers to a future time, so it is likely that Jews will be located in China during the end times. 144 .Land of Sinim.. International Standard Bible Encyclopedia. Fully Rev. 1979 A passage which may better define Chinas end time role is found in Revelation 16. After the Euphrates River is dried up the kings of the east along with their armies will join Antichrist at Armageddon:

o Rev 16:12 And the sixth angel poured out his vial upon the great river Euphrates; and the water thereof was dried up, that the way of the kings of the east might be prepared.

It is highly likely that China is among the kingdoms that will head to Armageddon after the Euphrates River is dried. Chinas participation in Armageddon will seal its fate as it will be destroyed at Armageddon.

The Destruction of the Empire The iron and clay empire along with its predecessors will be destroyed by the Lord. In its place the Lord will establish an eternal kingdom.

o Dan 2:34 Thou sawest till that a stone was cut out without hands, which smote the image upon his feet that were of iron and clay, and brake them to pieces. o Dan 2:44 And in the days of these kings shall the God of heaven set up a kingdom, which shall never be destroyed: and the kingdom shall not be left to other people, but it shall break in pieces and consume all these kingdoms, and it shall stand for ever.

11. The Roadmap to the Rise of the New World Order

The new world order must be appropriate to a world which has passed through a destructive crisis and to a humanity which is badly shattered by the experience

You must tell them everywhere that the Masters and Their groups of disciples are actively working to bring order out of chaos. You must tell them that there IS a Plan, and that nothing can possibly arrest the working out of that Plan..

Alice Bailey and Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul

Introduction In the previous chapter I described the countries or political entities that will primarily comprise the Antichrists empire. It almost goes without saying that for the Antichrist to be in a position to rise into prominence and to be in a position to establish his empire certain events need to take place to make the global conditions conducive for him to do these things. Many conspiracy theorists believe that there is a powerful satanically-inspired, secret organization working to make conditions conducive for Antichrist. These theorists believe this secret organizations main goal is to create a New World Order (NWO) or a one world government, religion, etc under the control of Antichrist. Many NWO conspiracy theorists believe that members of this secret organization (top government officials, financiers, the wealthy, etc) orchestrate major political, economic, financial, and military events to further the organizations plan for global domination. In this chapter I show that Satan is attempting to create a one-world government, religion, and economy and identify the major players involved in bringing the New World Order into fruition. However, my explanation is completely different from the explanation that you would

find from most NWO conspiracy theorists. I also touch on what events are likely to transpire prior to the establishment of a New World Order.

The Agents of Change Many NWO conspiracy theorists claim that an organization called the Illuminati is working to bring the New World Order to fruition. I am not here to say whether such a group has existed for the past 250+ years as many have claimed. However, I believe there are people who are actively trying to implement a New World Order since Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul told

New Age author Alice Bailey that such people exist: .=You must tell them everywhere that the Masters [high-level fallen angels] and Their groups of disciples are actively working to bring order out of chaos. You must tell them that there IS a Plan, and that nothing can possibly arrest the working out of that Plan..145 In addition, Bailey and Djwhal Khul spoke openly of several groups who would work to implement the plan, such as the New Group of World Servers (NGWS), the Ten Seed-Groups, and the United Nations (UN). Cosmic Chart.png 145 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 70 146 The chart is based on a map that found here: http://www.ipsgeneva.com/angl/agroups.html Satan has a multitier network of organizations, individuals, and spirits who work to bring a New World Order into fruition. The Institute of Planetary Synthesis (IPS), a group involved with bringing a New World Order into fruition, has made public information has made it possible to create this organization chart outlining the multiple tiers and collection of groups who are also working to bring on a New World Order:146

Cosmic Love (Spirit of Antichrist) According to IPS, .Cosmic Love. represents Maitreya, the New Age Christ and spirit of Antichrist spoken about in 1 John 4. Bailey and Djwhal admit that Maitreya is empowered by Sanat Kumara, which is a New Age homonym for .Lucifer. and .Satan..

"The World Teacher is that Great Being Whom the Christian calls the Christ; He is known also in the Orient as the Bodhisattva, and as the Lord Maitreya, and is the One looked for by the devout Mohammedan, under the name of the Iman Madhi...He is the great Lord of Love and of Compassion, just as his predecessor, the Buddha, was the Lord of Wisdom. Through Him flows the energy of the second aspect, reaching Him direct from the heart centre of the Planetary Logos via the heart of Sanat Kumara. 147 147 Bailey, Alice. Initiation Human and Solar. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1922. 43

The Planetary Hierarchy Satan has a spiritual hierarchy that divides tasks and responsibilities to the members (fallen angels) that belong to each level. Paul writes in Ephesians 6:12 that we face four primary spiritual foes: .principalities., .powers.,. rulers of the darkness of this world., and .spiritual wickedness in high places..

o Eph 6:12 For we wrestle not against flesh and blood, but against principalities, against powers, against the rulers of the darkness of this world, against spiritual wickedness in high places.

I suspect that Paul lists these entities in the order of ranking in Satans hierarchy with principalities at the bottom and spiritual wickedness in high places at the top. I first describe the top of the spiritual hierarchy and then work downwards to describe the other levels of the spiritual hierarchy.

Spiritual Wickedness in High Places The spiritual wickedness in high places is a category that describes the elite beings in Satans evil hierarchy. High-ranking fallen angels like Ascended Masters fall into this category since they have been entrusted with the most important tasks of Satans plan. In fact, Ascended

Master Djwhal Khul admits that he and his other Master counterparts are the spiritual forces that live in the high places or heavenlies: .Around Him [Maitreya] - in that High Place on Earth where He has His abiding place are gathered today all His great Disciples, the Masters of the Wisdom, and all Those liberated Sons of God Who, down the ages, have passed from darkness to Light, from the unreal to the Real, and from death to Immortality. They stand ready to carry out His

bidding and to obey Him, the Master of all the Masters and the Teacher alike of Angels and of men..148 149 148 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 593 149 .Sons of God. is a biblical term for fallen angels 150 Barber, Wayne. A. .Spiritual Warfare, Part 6 Ephesians 6:12-13. 10 Mar. 2009. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.ankerberg.com/Articles/verse-by-verse/VV0501W1.htm.

Rulers of Darkness of this World The term .rulers of darkness of this world. refers to powerful, evil beings that oversee countries. The angel of Daniel 10:12-21 reported that he was delayed by the ruler of the kingdom of Persia for three weeks. .Prince. in this passage refers to a spiritual being and not a human ruler because humans cannot overpower angels physically like this ruler did.

o Dan 10:12 Then said he unto me, Fear not, Daniel: for from the first day that thou didst set thine heart to understand, and to chasten thyself before thy God, thy words were heard, and I am come for thy words. o Dan 10:13 But the prince of the kingdom of Persia withstood me one and twenty days: but, lo, Michael, one of the chief princes, came to help me; and I remained there with the kings of Persia. o Dan 10:20 Then said he, Knowest thou wherefore I come unto thee? and now will I return to fight with the prince of Persia: and when I am gone forth, lo, the prince of Grecia shall come. o Dan 10:21 But I will shew thee that which is noted in the scripture of truth: and there is none that holdeth with me in these things, but Michael your prince.

Powers Powers are the beings that serve as the muscle behind evil. If Satan has a specific order he wants done these beings are responsible for actually performing the tasks necessary to get the order done. Pastor Wayne Barber describes how .powers. fit into the scheme of things: .The second word he uses there is the word "powers." It is in the plural also. The word for powers really is the word which means authorities, exousia and is the word used in Colossians 1:13 when it says we have been delivered out of the exousia, the right and the might of darkness and placed into the kingdom of His dear Son. In other words, in the realm of darkness Satan and his demons have not only the creativeness of propagating evil and originating evil, but they have also the right and the might to carry it out. They work in the realm of darkness..150

Principalities Principalities are fallen angels that are assigned to territories. For instance, Djwhal Khul reveals that there are fallen angels are assigned to every place of worship to stimulate the spirituality of the attendants at the place of worship-likely by fueling the occurrence of signs and wonders. .The activity of the astral plane is being much intensified and the angels of devotion, in whom the aspect of divine love is pre-eminent, work with the astral bodies of all those who are ready to strengthen and redirect their spiritual aspiration and desire. They are the angels who guard the sanctuaries of all the churches, cathedrals, temples and mosques of the world. They are now increasing the momentum of their vibration for the raising of the consciousness of the attendant congregations..151 151 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 505-506 152 Share International Magazine. June 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/magazine/old_issues/2009/200906.htm. 153 .The Ten Seed-Groups.. 23. Sept. 2007. Last Accessed. 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.ipsgeneva.com/angl/Ang101.htm#10grps.

10 Seed-Groups Seed-Groups develop the infrastructure needed to make a New World Order a reality on Earth. For instance, according to Benjamin Creme, one Seed-Group has already developed economic plans that are ready to be implemented at a future date:

.There is a group of initiates, disciples of the Masters, who are men and women of great achievement in their own lives, in fields such as finance, economics, public administration. They have worked out a series of interrelated blueprints, plans, that will solve the redistribution problems that are at the heart of the economic problem today..152

The following is list of the different types of Seed-Groups and my best attempt to explain the task of each type: 153

1. Telepathic Communications: They work to connect peoples minds together and to facilitate communication between people and the Spiritual Hierarchy (Fallen Angels)

2. Trained Observers: They work to dispel glamour.

3. Magnetic Healers: They work to heal people with non-traditional means, primary through spiritual methods.

4. Educators in the New Age: They work to provide people with occult understanding 5. Political Organizers: They work to develop international understanding on various issues between countries by working through government.

6. Workers in the Field of Religion: They work to bring on a one-world religion by finding commonalities between all of the existing religions.

7. Scientific Servers: They work to bring on new innovations while recognizing the spirituality behind the innovations (for instance, try to prove the existence of the soul and reincarnation).

8. Psychologists: They work to relate the soul with the personality, and through this help people to understand their (supposed) divinity.

9. Financiers and Economists: They work to develop plans of sharing that will dominate the global economic system of the New Age.

10. Creative Workers: They work to subconsciously implant ideas and concepts developed by

the other nine types of Seed-Groups into the minds of people through creative works (i.e. literature, music, art, etc).

The New Group of World Servers The NGWS was founded in 1922 as a loose network of individuals who serve the effort to create a one world government, religion, economy, etc. The group is not a traditional organization with a formal organizational structure. Creme states there are a large number of people who work without knowing who they work for and a smaller, inner circle who work with direct supervision of the spiritual forces of darkness:

.In 1922, therefore, he (Maitreya) inaugurated the New Group of World Servers, which is the most important group existing in the world, although it has no outer form or organization. Each member of it is related subjectively (i.e. on the inner, soul level) to Hierarchy; they know and understand the Plan and their part in it. On the outer plane there are two groups: one large group, unaware of their subjective link with Hierarchy and working only under impression from the Masters; the other, a small inner nucleus which works consciously on the outer plane under the direct supervision of the Masters..154 154 Creme, Benjamin. .Frequently Asked Questions.. 2 Nov. 2006. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/background/faq/faq_main.htm.

Several million people from all walks of life are affiliated with the NGWS. This group operates a lot differently than many large organizations who try to push their agenda: "This group in no way interferes with the allegiance and loyalties of any man. It is a banding together of all who seek to express the spirit of Christ and who are free from the spirit of hatred and revenge." 155 Even though the NGWS does not usually impose its will on the public, the group helps bring a one-world government, religion, economy, etc by influencing public opinion to the point where the public demands leaders from all fields, including politics, business, and religion to bring global unity.156 155 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 205 156 Bailey, Alice. Problems of Humanity. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1947 178 157 Bailey, Alice. Discipleship in the New Age. Vol. 2 New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1955. 150. Ive seen a list of organizations and individuals who are affiliated with the New Group of World Servers. There are some very influential, wealthy, and well-known individuals and organizations who are affiliated with this group. These are people and organizations who I do not want as enemies because of the power and resources that they possess. Therefore, I will not release a list of names of individuals and organizations that are affiliated with this group. However, please be aware that the NGWS possesses the resources to bring the world closer to creating of a one-world government, religion, economy, etc.

The United Nations The United Nations appears to be a crucial part of the plan to establish a New World Order. Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul admitted that he and his fallen angel counterparts were the driving force behind the creation of the UN and that they are the guiding force behind the actions

of the UN. On April 17, 1945 Bailey received a message from Djwhal Khul. In this message Djwhal Khul revealed that the upcoming UN Conference on International Organization, which was the pivotal conference where attendees would work on creating an international organization called the United Nations, would mark the beginning of a process that would lead to the emergence of Antichrist and his fallen angels:

.The Hierarchy will eventually, under its Head, the Christ, function openly and visibly on earth. This will happen when the purpose of the divine will and the plan which will implement it is better understood and the period of adjustment, of world enlightenment and of reconstruction has made real headway. This period begins at the San Francisco Conference (hence its major importance) and will move very slowly at first. 157

A few months later, Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul was not bashful in boasting about how the UN is a product of his and his counterparts work. In fact, Djwhal Khul went as far to say that the UN employees and UN leaders work for the Antichrist whether they know it or not.

.The Hierarchy took its stand upon the side of the United Nations and let it be known that it had done so. In doing this, definite physical steps were taken to aid the Forces of Light; men and leaders were carefully chosen and picked disciples were placed in positions of power and of authority. The leaders of the United Nations and of their armiesare able thus to work-consciously or unconsciously-under the inspiration of the Hierarchy. This has been amply demonstrated. On account of this decision of the Hierarchy, Christ became automatically the Leader of these Forces. 158 158 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 476 159 Creme, Benjamin, .Political Issues-FAQ.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/archives/political/faq_political-issues.htm. 160Share International Magazine. Sept. 2008. http://www.shareinternational.org/magazine/old_issues/2008/sep_08.htm. 161 Non-Governmental Organization/DPI. .What is an NGO.. 6 Jul. 2009. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.un.org/dpi/ngosection/criteria.asp.

According to Creme, the UN today is the seed that will sprout a future one world government:

.The United Nations today forms the nucleus of a future world government. At present it does not have the power which a world government might need, but only because these powers are not given to it by the major nations, America, Russia and China, for instance. The Security Council stands in the way of a true functioning of the UN Assembly, the real basis of a future world government..159

Unsurprisingly, Cremes fallen angel .Master. admitted that the UN is a central cog to Satans plan: .Sad would be the day and great would be the loss to humanity were the nations to lose faith in this institution, central as it is to the working out of the Divine Plan..160

Non-Government Organizations Non-governmental organizations (NGOs) are citizen groups unaffiliated with any government that .perform a variety of service and humanitarian functions, bring citizen concerns to Governments, advocate and monitor policies and encourage political participation through provision of information..161 NGOs are perhaps the most controversial type of group to include

as an agent of change because some NGOs have nothing to do with creating a one-world government, religion, economy, etc and are just concerned with improving the lives of people. However, NGOs are included because many of them work with the UN, are advised by the UN, and sponsored by the UN.

The Catalysts of Change The agents of change have made some impact in preparing the world for a New World Order by pushing for greater government regulation and making it almost first nature for governments to settle inter-state problems through the UN. However, the work of these agents is not enough to bring on a New World Order in a timely manner if conditions remain like the past 65 years in the future. The agents of change need a dramatic transformation of global conditions to be able to make much larger strides in shorter periods of time. A radical transformation in global conditions appears to be exactly what they are going to get very soon.162 162 Note: The catalysts and events described by Crme and his Master are the same type of catalysts and events that I believed would drive radical change in global conditions before I became familiar with their predictions. My belief in these events and catalysts were based on my knowledge of the economy, finance, politics, and Bible prophecy. 163 The Master (through Benjamin Crme). .The Unfolding Plan.. 15. Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 6. Jul. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/ARCHIVES/AgelessWisdom/aw_mas-unf-plan.htm. 164 Creme, Benjamin. .Sharing FAQ.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/ARCHIVES/sharing/faq_sharing.htm. 165 What might the catalyst be that leads to the collapse of the U.S. economy? In December 2004, Crmes Master indicated that it will be from the enormity of debt and the collapse of the U.S. dollar: .They will ruefully watch an attack on their proudly held freedoms; they will see a steep decline in their standard of living as the government, of necessity, strives to tackle their enormous

debts; they will witness a loss of confidence in their currency and a sharp reversal of trade with their traditional trading partners.. <http://www.share-international.org/master/2004/ma_dec04.htm>. The first major driver of change, according to Creme and his Master, will be a complete breakdown of the worlds financial and economic system:

.We are nearing a time of major change in the world: before long, the transformation of all structures will begin, commencing with the dissolution of the stock markets as they now function..163 Cremes Master

.The mechanics of the change is a world stock market crash... This stock market crash will end the present distorted and unjust economic structures..164 Creme

The main catalyst for the collapse of the global financial and economic system appears to be the imminent collapse of the U.S. economy.165 According to Creme, the downfall of the U.S. economy will lead to a complete global meltdown: .When the US's "oasis of prosperity" begins

to dry up, as it must in the current global financial crisis, stock markets in the West will plunge..166 166 .Maitreyas Priorities.. 19 Jun. 2009. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/maitreya/Ma_prior.htm 167 Creme responded to a question about whether we would see hyperinflation or deflation following a world stock market crash. Crmes response is that we would see deflation. This response does not mean that Crme is contradicting the notion that there will be inflation after a crash because deflation would likely be experienced first for a period of time before the inflation arrives. 168 Share International Magazine. Dec. 2008. http://www.shareinternational.org/magazine/old_issues/2008/200812.htm 169 Pitchon, Patricia. .Drugs: A World Problem-Interview with the Master-through Benjamin Crme.. 15. Oct. 2005. Last Accessed. 6. Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/archives/Master_--/iv_drug-problem.htm Creme indicates to his followers that the global financial and economic meltdown will be accompanied by deflation and publishes articles written by financial market expert Scott Champion, who states in these articles that the world will experience deflation. However, both Champion and Cremes Master indicate that deflation will eventually give way to damaging inflation167. For example, Champion writes that inflation will come as a result of governments, particularly the US government, efforts to counteract deflationary forces:

.For the time being, cash is king. But one should expect further bailouts, liquidity infusions, and other attempts to re-inflate. Deflation is particularly destructive to highly indebted economies such as the US economy, and the US will no doubt attempt to counter this pressure with a high level of money creation. It simply has no choice if it wishes to avoid a repeat of the Great Depression. Therefore, it should be expected that the US dollar will come under severe pressure at some point and that this may lead to its loss of status as the worlds reserve currency..168

According to Cremes Master, the collapse in global stock markets will be followed by a period where the value of money will be destroyed worldwide: .very soon, there is going to be a complete transformation in the world.s economic systems due to the devaluation of money after the coming world stock market crash..169 Although Cremes Master does not directly say it, he is speaking of hyperinflation because hyperinflation destroys the value of money while deflation makes money more valuable. Therefore, the global economic meltdown begins with deflation and a stock market crash and later morphs into a devastating global hyperinflation. The consequences of a breakdown in the global economic system will be catastrophic. According to Cremes Master, the impending collapse of the U.S. and global economy will trigger a period of utter chaos: .a total collapse of the worlds economy is inevitable. This would

result in chaotic conditions; for example: civil war, internal strife of all kinds and even, eventually, major world conflict. This situation the UN would be powerless to halt..170 170 .A Positive Vision of the Future.. 26. Aug. 2007. Last Accessed. 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareberlin.info/future.htm 171 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 190 172 The Master (through Benjamin Crme). .Maitreya at the Door.. Jul. 2002. Last Accessed. 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/master/2002/ma_july02.htm Perhaps the biggest catalyst for change will be the period of global warfare and chaos mentioned by Cremes Master. Bailey and Djwhal Khul describe this period of warfare and chaos as a .destructive crisis. which will necessary for mankind to go through before the New World Order can arise: .The new world order must be appropriate to a world which has passed through a destructive crisis and to a humanity which is badly shattered by the experience..171 The term .destructive crisis. implies that there will be a period of war. The added detail that humanity will be .badly shattered. by this destructive crisis means that war is likely going to be severe and wide-scale. Cremes Master provides further confirmation that there will be a period of war when he hints that the debut of the Antichrist will come during a period of war and chaos: .In the midst of chaos and war, and threat of war, the Great Lord lifts His hand. His arrows of Light will pierce the darkness of the time and bring respite to men.... 172 The description of the chaotic period preceding the rise of the New World Order corresponds to the description of the time period leading to the end times given by Jesus on Mount Olives. At first glance, Jesuss description about the conditions of the world near the end of the age sounds like end times prophecy. However, He qualifies His statement by saying that though these conditions (False Christs, wars and rumors of war, etc) will occur near the end of

age they are not actual end-times events (as the end is not yet). Jesus is basically saying that people should not be rattled by these occurrences since these events are preordained to happen before the end of time.

o Mat 24:4 And Jesus answered and said unto them, Take heed that no man deceive you. o Mat 24:5 For many shall come in my name, saying, I am Christ; and shall deceive many. o Mat 24:6 And ye shall hear of wars and rumours of wars: see that ye be not troubled: for all these things must come to pass, but the end is not yet.

o Mar 13:4 Tell us, when shall these things be? and what shall be the sign when all these things shall be fulfilled? o Mar 13:5 And Jesus answering them began to say, Take heed lest any man deceive you: o Mar 13:6 For many shall come in my name, saying, I am Christ; and shall deceive many. o Mar 13:7 And when ye shall hear of wars and rumours of wars, be ye not troubled: for such things must needs be; but the end shall not be yet.

Lukes account of Jesuss message is similar to Matthews and Marks except Lukes account also tells us to watch for disturbances:

o Luk 21:7 And they asked him, saying, Master, but when shall these things be? and what sign will there be when these things shall come to pass? o Luk 21:8 And he said, Take heed that ye be not deceived: for many shall come in my name, saying, I am Christ; and the time draweth near: go ye not therefore after them. o Luk 21:9 But when ye shall hear of wars and commotions, be not terrified: for these things must first come to pass; but the end is not by and by.

.Disturbances. is a broad term that can be interpreted in different ways. The Greek indicates a more precise word than the one given in the version of the Bible I am using here. The Greek word is .akatastasia., which means .instability. or .a state of disorder..173 This definition implies that political disorder, including revolutions and coups, is a condition prevalent during the time period that Christ describes. 173 G182 a..a.a..a..a Strongs Hebrew and Greek Dictionaries 174 .Matireyas Teachings: The Law of Cause and Effect.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed. 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/ARCHIVES/M_teachings/Mt_law-cause-effect.htm. Jesus described the period preceding the beginning of the end times as the beginning of birth pangs (sorrows).

o Mat 24:8 All these are the beginning of sorrows.

The birth pangs analogy is a very important one to understand because it reveals about how severe the period will be. Birth pangs begin with initial pain followed by a period of relative painlessness. However, as time goes on the frequency that the pain is felt increases. Therefore, the severity of the crisis period that precedes the rise of the New World Order will worsen as time progresses. The frequency of war will increase, the frequency where there are rumors of war will increase, the frequency of revolutions will increase, etc. At the end of this destructive crisis period governments around the world apparently will be concerned with just providing their citizens with the essentials of life. According to Creme, governments around the world will make providing people with the essentials of life its highest priority and maintaining a military its last priority: .After this crash, the first duty of governments will be to feed people with the right food. Their second duty will be to ensure adequate housing. Next will come health and education, and lastly, defence. In short, the crash will lead to a reordering of priorities..174 According to Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul and Bailey, the disdain for the military around the world will be so great that countries will agree to disarm themselves over a period of time:

.In the preparatory period for the new world order there will be a steady and regulated disarmament. It will not be optional. No nation will be permitted to produce and organize any equipment for destructive purposes or to infringe the security of any other nation. One of the first tasks of any future peace conference will be to regulate this matter and gradually see to the disarming of the nations..175 175Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 192 176 .Maitreyas Priorities.. 19 Jun. 2009. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/maitreya/Ma_prior.htm. 177 Share International Magazine. Nov. 2008. http://www.shareinternational.org/magazine/old_issues/2008/200811.htm.

The radical transformation of governments priorities likely reflects the severity of the destructive crisis period. The destruction and devastation will probably so wide-scale and severe that having the essentials of life will be all that matters to people. The war must be so destructive and must be so disruptive to humanity that people will despise the concept of war. A war that traumatizes a generation is not unprecedented. People before the start of World War 2 called World War 1 .the war to end all wars. because it was so costly for all countries involved. The war led to the overly naive Kellogg-Briand pact in 1928 where 63 of the worlds most powerful countries agreed to outlaw war. I suspect that this upcoming war will have a far more traumatic effect than World War 1 since governments will actually agree to disarm themselves and agree to have their disarmament regulated. The New World Order that emerges in the aftermath of this destructive crisis period will not please the elite, but they will be unable to stop it because the pressure for change will be too great. .There will be opposition to such plans from some of the more privileged members of society who will see a loss of their traditional status and power. But the need for change will become so obvious that they will find themselves increasingly powerless to halt the momentum..176

Appendix Where Are We At Today? (Aug 2009) The global economy for over the past 18 months has been a complete disaster. However, are we living through the meltdown that Creme, Maitreya, and Cremes Master have predicted? Creme says .yes.: .This is the crash. We could not be closer..177 Creme also says that the crash that Maitreya has predicted began in the U.S. in 2008 and continues through today:

.In early 1988, he also announced that there would be an international stock market crash which would cause governments to re-order their priorities. In 1989 the Japanese stock market lost 40% of its value, and in subsequent years the crisis spread to Eastern Europe, the Asian 'tiger economies', the Soviet Union and Argentina. The financial collapse hit the US hard in 2008 and soon had further worldwide repercussions..178 178 .Maitreyas Emergence.. 30 Mar. 2009. Last Accessed 7 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/maitreya/MA_emerge.htm. 179 Share International Magazine. Mar. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/magazine/old_issues/2009/200903.htm. 180 Share International Magazine. Feb. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/magazine/old_issues/2009/200901.htm. 181 Creme, Benjamin. .Economic and Financial Issues FAQ.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/ARCHIVES/economics/faq_economic.htm. 182 Porter, Andrew, Robert Winnett, and Toby Harnden. .G20 Summit: Gordon Brown Announces =New World Order.. 3 Apr. 2009. Last Accessed 7 Jul. 2009. http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/financetopics/g20summit/5097195/G20-summit-Gordon-Brown-announces-new-world-order.html.

.The present world economic collapse (presented as a 'downturn' or 'recession') is in fact the signs of the end of the old order, and is already bringing about a change in attitude among many people, young and old....179

.As the Master says so clearly, this is not a temporary =downturn or =healthy adjustment we are all going through, but the collapse of the old, unjust order. It is necessary, and inevitable too, the logical outcome of our greed and selfishness. My advice, for what it is worth, is to save and learn to live more simply. This we all will have to do so that others may live at all..180

Cremes Master predicts that world leaders will begin to meet to hammer out a new

economic order after the world experiences .the preliminary shock. of the global economic and financial system meltdown. .After the preliminary shock, the nations will meet together to discuss the means of coping with the future in ordered fashion..181 These meetings apparently have already begun to take place with the G20 meeting in Washington D.C. last November and the G20 meeting in London this past April where British Prime Minister Gordon Brown infamously proclaimed "I think a new world order is emerging with the foundation of a new progressive era of international co-operation".182 However, Cremes Master warns that an agreement on a new economic order will not happen right away like Gordon Brown believes, but will be a gradual process that ends with major economic powers like the U.S. and Great Britain losing their sway:

.Those who have stood most emphatically behind the rule of market forces will find themselves outvoted in the dispensation which will pertain, and those advocating Cooperation will gain the ascendancy. This will not happen overnight. The process will be gradual, but will not be long delayed..183 183 Creme, Benjamin. .Economic and Financial Issues FAQ.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/ARCHIVES/economics/faq_economic.htm. 184 .Maitreyas Priorities.. 19 Jun. 2009. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/maitreya/Ma_prior.htm.

It is unknown how much longer the deflationary period will last. There are problems ahead for the US and global economy. A huge problem looms in the commercial real estate market whose collapse would lead to further losses in financial companies. In addition, there are a large number of option arm mortgages originated during the housing boom that need to be reset over the next couple of years. People with these mortgages may default when their respective mortgage resets, which would exasperate the problems that already exist in the current real estate market. Nevertheless, when the deflationary period ends the world will then deal with a monster far worse than the one we are dealing with now, hyperinflation: a phenomenon that destroys the value of your paper money.

Marketing the New World Order How are the forces of darkness able to recruit millions of people to do their bidding? I believe the answer is that most people are completely unaware that they are working for the side of evil. Remember, Fallen Angel DK said that many people in the NGWS would be unaware of the Masterss (fallen angels) role in directing their activities. The force of darkness is excellent at promoting organizations and causes that aid their agenda while masking their organizations

true purpose. For instance, people are told that a new global economic system will save the environment by promoting sufficiency and sustainability and will improve the lives of many people around the world:

.Another top priority will be saving, protecting, and healing the environment. This will require the creation of economic systems based on the principles of sustainability and sufficiency, rather than the present system of overproduction and waste, Creme says. The goal is to supply the needs of all while maintaining the planet's health..184

.With the transformation of economic structures, people throughout the world will increasingly be able to live decent, dignified lives. The incidence of large families will

diminish, particularly in the developing world, where it is mainly an insurance for old age. The earth's population will gradually decline to a more natural level..185 185 Ibid

Therefore, Satan and his minions are able to advance their plan to bring a one-world government, economic system, and religion by misleading people who have good intentions.

12. The First Half of the 70th Week of Daniel

Personally, I think only Maitreya can end the Israeli/Palestinian situation with an agreeable compromise.

I believe it will take Maitreya to bring this reconciliation about, but so it will be. Benjamin Creme

Introduction The first half of the 70th Week of Daniel will be a time where Antichrist will gain worldwide notoriety through political and military means. This will be a time of relative peace in an unsuspecting Israel and a time of chaos in other places in the world. The first half of the 70th Week of Daniel will be a time marked by the opening of two of the seven seals described in the Book of Revelation.

The Seven Seals Revelation 5 opens with a scene in Heaven where Christ is holding a scroll that has seven seals on it. Christ holds the scroll because He is the only one worthy of opening it.

o Rev 5:1 And I saw on the right of the One sitting on the throne a scroll having been written within and on the back, having been sealed with seven seals. o Rev 5:2 And I saw a strong angel proclaiming with a great voice: Who is worthy to open the scroll, and to loosen its seals?

The seven seals are conditions that will occur on Earth before the unleashing of the Day of the Lord. All seven seal conditions must be met before the scroll is unrolled. The nature of the breaking of the seals is .one after another.. The breaking of each seal will present a new series of events. Breaking the first seal will signify the start of the 70th week of Daniel until the seventh seal when once it is broken, the scroll opens up and the contents are revealed.

The First Seal and the Covenant with Death The opening of the first seal marks the arrival of a rider on a white horse. Some people argue that the rider of the white horse is Christ, but that does not make sense because the verses do not line up to support this conclusion. Instead, the rider on the white horse is probably Antichrist who will come on to the world stage after a destruction crisis period to solve the problem that seems nearly impossible to solve: bringing peace to the Middle East.

o Rev 6:2 And I saw, and behold, a white horse! And the one sitting on it had a bow. And a crown was given to him, and he went out overcoming, and that he might overcome

According to Daniel 9:27, the Antichrist shall agree to uphold a seven-year peace treaty with the leaders of Jerusalem at the start of the 70th week of Daniel.

o Dan 9:27 And he shall confirm the covenant with many for one week: and in the midst of the week he shall cause the sacrifice and the oblation to cease, and for the overspreading of abominations he shall make it desolate, even until the consummation, and that determined shall be poured upon the desolate.

The peace treaty is given an ominous name in Isaiah 28: .the covenant with death..

o Isa 28:14 Wherefore hear the word of the LORD, ye scornful men, that rule this people which is in Jerusalem. o Isa 28:15 Because ye have said, We have made a covenant with death, and with hell are we at agreement; when the overflowing scourge shall pass through, it shall not come unto us: for we have made lies our refuge, and under falsehood have we hid ourselves:

The Details of the Covenant with Death In 1991, a Christian man named Bill Lambert infiltrated a New England Theosophical Society meeting. At this meeting Lambert learned that New Age higher-ups had already devised a treaty called .the New Jerusalem Covenant Project..186 This treaty is designed to solve multi186 Lambert, Bill. .Complete Seminar Notes from House of Theosophy Seminar which Reveals Plans for Last Stages of New World Order!!.. 26 Mar. 2003. Last Accessed 12 Jul. 2009. http://www.cuttingedge.org/n1052.html.

decade-long problems in the Mideast by requiring Israelis and non-Israelis to make political and religious compromises. The treaty will address at least these four key issues: the status of Jerusalem, worship on the Temple Mount, Palestinian Independence, and Israeli sovereignty. Lambert discovered that the treaty calls for the conversion of Jerusalem from a disputed city into an international city with the combining of the Jewish, Muslim, and Christian portions of the city. Benjamin Creme confirms that making Jerusalem an international city is one of the major terms in a deal that the Antichrist will broker with the various factions in Jerusalem: .the status of Jerusalem which is of major importance to the Muslims, the Jews and the Christians to be changed into an open, central city for all three groups. I believe it will take Maitreya to bring this reconciliation about, but so it will be..187 187 Creme, Benjamin. .Frequently Asked Questions About Maitreya.. 3 Dec. 2007. Last Accessed 12 Jul. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/maitreya/Maitreya 188 Share International Magazine. March 2006. http://www.shareinternational.org/magazine/old_issues/2006/mar_06.htm Another major part of the treaty will address the issue of worship on the Temple Mount, which is located on Mount Moriah in Jerusalem. The Temple Mount is currently a highly disputed place between Jews and Arabs because followers of both religions consider the place to be a very holy site (in fact, it is the holiest site in Judaism). In fact, Jews and Arabs literally fight for the opportunity to worship on the Temple Mount. The treaty that the Antichrist will present shall call for the building of the prophesized Third Temple on the Temple Mount. However, a major detail of this treaty reveals that the Third Temple will not be a place of worship for Jews exclusively. Lambert was told that this Third Temple is intended to be a place of worship for Jews, Muslims, and Christians. Creme indicates that the treaty will also defuse the long-term rivalry between Israel and the Palestinians. According to Creme, the treaty will require the Palestinians to acknowledge the

existence and sovereignty of Israel while require Israelis to accept the creation of a Palestinian state: .Personally, I think only Maitreya can end the Israeli/Palestinian situation with an agreeable compromise, with the Palestinians accepting the existence of Israel, and the Israelis accepting the right of the Palestinians to the West Bank and a just and viable independent state..188 In addition, to allowing the creation of an independent Palestinian state, Israel will be required to permit the return of millions of refugees to the West Bank. A final element of the treaty or covenant with death may include the Antichrist guarantying the security of Israel. Isaiah 28:15 indicates that Israelis leaders will be so overconfident that they will be protected by this covenant that they believe they will not be harmed even the world is collapsing around them.

o Isa 28:15 Because ye have said, We have made a covenant with death, and with hell are we at agreement; when the overflowing scourge shall pass through, it shall not come unto us: for we have made lies our refuge, and under falsehood have we hid ourselves:

The 2nd Seal: Antichrist at War The opening of the 2nd Seal introduces a rider of a red horse whose responsibility is to remove peace from the earth. Antichrist is likely the one primarily responsible for taking the peace away as he goes out to expand his empire from 3 kingdoms to 10 kingdoms spoken about earlier in this book.

o Rev 6:3 And when he had opened the second seal, I heard the second beast say, Come and see. o Rev 6:4 And there went out another horse that was red: and power was given to him that sat thereon to take peace from the earth, and that they should kill one another: and there was given unto him a great sword.

Although Antichrist will help take peace away we cannot rule out the possibility that other countries that are not related to the conquest of Antichrist could attack each other. The concept of birth pangs is applicable to the end times as well as it is before the end times begin. Therefore, we are likely going to see military conflict widespread throughout the world as we will before the end times begin as nations will rise up against nations and kingdoms will rise up against kingdoms.

o Mat 24:7 For nation shall rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom: and there shall be famines, and pestilences, and earthquakes, in divers places.

As Antichrist routs each opposing nation that he faces, he will boast about how great he is and blasphemy God. Antichrist will be unstoppable at this point in time as Daniel 11:36-37 says that he will do according to his will or in other words, do whatever he wants to do

o Dan 11:36 And the king shall do according to his will; and he shall exalt himself, and magnify himself above every god, and shall speak marvellous things against the God of gods, and shall prosper till the indignation be accomplished: for that that is determined shall be done. o Dan 11:37 Neither shall he regard the God of his fathers, nor the desire of women, nor regard any god: for he shall magnify himself above all.

Antichrist will personally install puppet governments in each country that he conquerors. Puppet governments are a tool used by victorious leaders to enable them to influence the conquered country without having to directly rule over them.

o Dan 11:39 Thus shall he do in the most strong holds with a strange god, whom he shall acknowledge and increase with glory: and he shall cause them to rule over many, and shall divide the land for gain.

Egypt, Libya, and Ethiopia The identity of all the countries that Antichrist will attack and conqueror is currently unknown. However, the Bible makes it clear that Antichrist will confront Egypt, Libya, and Ethiopia with military force. The leader of Egypt will try to resist Antichrists forces, but Antichrist will annihilate the country with his military and plunder Egypt of its riches. Meanwhile, Libya and Ethiopia will see the horrors of what Antichrist did to Egypt and will capitulate before Antichrist goes to annihilate them like he annihilated Egypt.

o Dan 11:40 And at the time of the end shall the king of the south [Egypt] push at him: and the king of the north [Antichrist] shall come against him like a whirlwind, with chariots, and with horsemen, and with many ships; and he shall enter into the countries, and shall overflow and pass over. o Dan 11:42 He shall stretch forth his hand also upon the countries: and the land of Egypt shall not escape. o Dan 11:43 But he shall have power over the treasures of gold and of silver, and over all the precious things of Egypt: and the Libyans and the Ethiopians shall be at his steps.

Peace in Unsuspecting Israel The Book of Ezekiel indicates that the covenant of death will create peace and stability in Israel to the point that Israel will be a land without any protective barriers. The lack of protective barriers in Israel would be the complete opposite of what the situation is like today where walls are constructed to keep Palestinians separated from Jews in many locations. Ezekiel also provides a very interesting detail about the West Bank, which is home to the biblical .mountains of Israel.. The population of the West Bank will be home to many Jews who were gathered back to Israel from around the world.

o Eze 38:8 After many days thou shalt be visited: in the latter years thou shalt come into the land that is brought back from the sword, and is gathered out of many people, against the

mountains of Israel, which have been always waste: but it is brought forth out of the nations, and they shall dwell safely all of them. o Eze 38:9 Thou shalt ascend and come like a storm, thou shalt be like a cloud to cover the land, thou, and all thy bands, and many people with thee. o Eze 38:10 Thus saith the Lord GOD; It shall also come to pass, that at the same time shall things come into thy mind, and thou shalt think an evil thought: o Eze 38:11 And thou shalt say, I will go up to the land of unwalled villages; I will go to them that are at rest, that dwell safely, all of them dwelling without walls, and having neither bars nor gates,

If the details about the treaty are correct, it likely means that the Jews and Palestinians will live in very close quarters in the West Bank peacefully. A peaceful coexistence between Jews and Palestinians in a Palestinian controlled state bordering a sovereign Israel would give Antichrist tremendous political clout as he will be heralded as the one who solved all the problems in the Mideast. The last thing Israels leaders will suspect is an attack by an influential leader.

o Isa 28:15 Because ye have said, We have made a covenant with death, and with hell are we at agreement; when the overflowing scourge shall pass through, it shall not come unto us: for we have made lies our refuge, and under falsehood have we hid ourselves:

War in Heaven and the Fallen Angel Invasion Nearly 3.5 years through the 70th Week of Daniel there will be a war in Heaven involving the Archangel Michael and his angels versus Satan and his angels. Satan and his angels will lose

the war, will be permanently cast out of heaven, and will be forced onto the earth.

o Rev 12:7 And there was war in heaven: Michael and his angels fought against the dragon; and the dragon fought and his angels, o Rev 12:8 And prevailed not; neither was their place found any more in heaven. o Rev 12:9 And the great dragon was cast out, that old serpent, called the Devil, and Satan, which deceiveth the whole world: he was cast out into the earth, and his angels were cast out with him.

Satans defeat is great news for those in Heaven, but bad news for those living on the earth because Satan is full of wrath and knows he has a short amount of time to inflict his wrath.

o Rev 12:10 And I heard a loud voice saying in heaven, Now is come salvation, and strength, and the kingdom of our God, and the power of his Christ: for the accuser of our brethren is cast down, which accused them before our God day and night. o Rev 12:11 And they overcame him by the blood of the Lamb, and by the word of their testimony; and they loved not their lives unto the death. o Rev 12:12 Therefore rejoice, ye heavens, and ye that dwell in them. Woe to the inhabiters of the earth and of the sea! for the devil is come down unto you, having great wrath, because he knoweth that he hath but a short time.

The fallen angels that have been cast down to Earth after the war in Heaven will participate in many of Satans deceptions. An unnamed Ascended Master explains via a channeling what the fallen angels will do once they arrive on the earth: .Angels, in myriads, there are, but they touch not yet the lives of men. A time is coming, however, when these unseen forces will offer to men their healing power and knowledge and, safely, enter man's province..189 189 The Master (through Creme, Benjamin). .The Masters Enter Mans Domain.. 13 Jan 2009. Last Accessed 13 Jan 2009. http://www.mcn.org/1/Miracles/angormast.html. During the end times men will absolutely be terrified by many events, including the things they will see coming down from heaven onto the earth. I suspect that people may see UFOs descending to Earth carrying fallen angels expelled from Heaven.

o Luk 21:25 And there shall be signs in the sun, and in the moon, and in the stars; and upon the earth distress of nations, with perplexity; the sea and the waves roaring; o Luk 21:26 Men's hearts failing them for fear, and for looking after those things which are coming on the earth: for the powers of heaven shall be shaken.

Jesus warned four disciples that the end times will be like the .days of Noah..

o Mat 24:37 But as the days of Noe were, so shall also the coming of the Son of man be. o Mat 24:38 For as in the days that were before the flood they were eating and drinking, marrying and giving in marriage, until the day that Noe entered into the ark,

o Luk 17:26 And as it was in the days of Noe, so shall it be also in the days of the Son of man. o Luk 17:27 They did eat, they drank, they married wives, they were given in marriage, until the day that Noe entered into the ark, and the flood came, and destroyed them all.

Some theologians limit the similarities between the end times and the days of Noah to people .eating, drinking, marrying, and giving in marriage.. However, this limited comparison is incorrect because Christ said that it would exactly like the days of Noah. Remember that just

before the flood in Noahs day fallen angels were interacting with human woman and went as far as mating with human woman. The warning that Jesus gave is not the only instance where there is strong indication that fallen angels will interact with mankind again at such a high-level. Daniel 2:41-43 is one of the most intriguing passages in the entire Bible. This passage describes the nature of the final kingdom before Christ establishes his reign on Earth.

o Dan 2:41 And whereas thou sawest the feet and toes, part of potters' clay, and part of iron, the kingdom shall be divided; but there shall be in it of the strength of the iron, forasmuch as thou sawest the iron mixed with miry clay. o Dan 2:42 And as the toes of the feet were part of iron, and part of clay, so the kingdom shall be partly strong, and partly broken. o Dan 2:43 And whereas thou sawest iron mixed with miry clay, they shall mingle themselves with the seed of men: but they shall not cleave one to another, even as iron is not mixed with clay.

According to an anonymous Bible teacher, .Miry clay apparently refers to pottery made of the recycled shards or broken pieces of different kinds of pottery ground into dust again and mixed with water to make a clay like substance. It was very brittle and easily broken apart..190 In Isaiah 64:8, clay represents mankind, so it is likely that miry clay in Daniels vision represents mankind. Meanwhile, iron represents strength so the kingdom will be partly strong and partly fragile. According to another anonymous Bible teacher, .The Aramaic word for seed means offspring so seed of men is a way of saying mankind, and the fact that .they. are differentiated from mankind hints that .they. may not be human..191 What will the interaction between potentially human and non-humans be like? Dr. Scott Johnson feels that the interaction between

humans and non-humans, particularly angels will be quite intimate: 190 .Could The Anti Christ Be A Nephilim.. 14. Jan. 2009. Last Accessed 14. Jan. 2009. http://gracethrufaith.com/ask-a-bible-teacher/could-the-anti-christ-be-a-nephilim/. 191 .Daniel and The Nephilim.. 14. Jan. 2009. Last Accessed 14. Jan. 2009. http://gracethrufaith.com/ask-a-bibleteacher/daniel-and-the-nephilim/.

.One might be tempted to believe this passage merely refers to a political mixture, given the larger context of the prophecy, but in looking at the original language there seems to be a strong indication that it is a .marriage,. or sexual type of union. It is not wise to dogmatically state that this passage is definitely referring to an angel-human mixture here, but it worth considering, given Matthew 24:37 and the overall angel-hybrid understanding of scripture (which Daniel operated from, as it was the Orthodox Jewish

view at the time, and only disappeared from the historical Christian church between 300500 AD.).. 192 192 Johnson, Scott. .UFOs, Aliens, Fallen Angels, Nephilim, and The Days of Noah.. 19 Aug 2007. Last Accessed 11 Jan 2009. http://media.sermonaudio.com/mediapdf/82007142704.pdf.

I believe that many fallen angels at this future time will interact with humans and perhaps even marry humans. I do not know if there will again be interbreeding with humans and fallen angels, but if there is it will not have a major consequence on end time events. New Nephilim would only be infants and would not have a chance to develop into the men of renown like in the days of Noah since nearly everyone on Earth is going to be wiped out at the Battle of Armageddon. The interaction between humans and fallen angels will not last very long as .iron does not mix with clay..

The Antichrists Return to Jerusalem Near the halfway point of the 70th Week of Daniel a disturbance in the land of Israel will infuriate Antichrist and cause him to return to Jerusalem.

o Dan 11:44 But news shall trouble him from the east and from the north. And he will go out with great fury to destroy and to devote many to destruction. o Dan 11:45 And he shall plant his palace tents between the seas, in the glorious holy mountain. Yet he shall come to his end, and there is not a helper for him.

Exactly halfway through the 70th Week of Daniel Antichrist will betray an unsuspecting Israel by breaking the peace treaty. When the covenant is broken Israel will be in huge trouble:

o Dan 9:27 And he shall confirm the covenant with many for one week: and in the midst of the week he shall cause the sacrifice and the oblation to cease, and for the overspreading of abominations he shall make it desolate, even until the consummation, and that determined shall be poured upon the desolate.

o Isa 28:18 And your covenant with death shall be disannulled, and your agreement with hell shall not stand; when the overflowing scourge shall pass through, then ye shall be trodden down by it. o Isa 28:19 From the time that it goeth forth it shall take you: for morning by morning shall it pass over, by day and by night: and it shall be a vexation only to understand the report.

The trouble that Israel believed the Antichrist would protect them from will be brought upon them by none other than the Antichrist himself-ironically, their protector for the first 3 years of the seven year period.

13. The Antichrist Revealed .There were stages of which he must allow himself to speak. Even this, he said, he intended to make public only when he was no longer living. Then there would be something really great, an overwhelming revelation. In order completely to fulfill his mission he must die a martyrs death..

Hermann Rauschning on Adolf Hitler

We are indeed all a little John-like in nature. I await the Christ. Adolf Hitler

Introduction For the entire first half of the 70th Week of Daniel the people of Israel lived in safety and security. Very few people suspected that the man who brought them protection would break his promise and seek their annihilation as Antichrist hid his true identity not only to Israel, but the entire world. The standard interpretation of Revelation 17 is that it is a chapter that reveals the Roman Antichrist who will rule the world from Rome. The Roman Antichrist will supposedly come from a combination of seven Caesars who lived back during the Roman Empire. Which Roman Caesar will serve as Antichrist is highly debated since there is no indication from the text of which combination of seven Caesars he will be from. Some argue that it is Nero while others say it is Caligula, Vespasian, Titus, or Domitian. This interpretation of Revelation 17 is wrong because the wrong group of leaders is being considered. The seven leaders that are candidates to return to Earth as Antichrist are, in fact, seven leaders who each lead different satanicallyinspired empires or .beast empires.. In this chapter I identify which one of these seven men will return to the earth to serve Satan as Antichrist the man.

What Precisely is the Antichrist? The term .Antichrist. is only used four times in the Bible. The first instance is in 1 John 2:18-19. From this passage we can glean that the Antichrist was already in the world at Johns time

o 1Jn 2:18 Little children, it is the last time: and as ye have heard that antichrist shall come, even now are there many antichrists; whereby we know that it is the last time. o 1Jn 2:19 They went out from us, but they were not of us; for if they had been of us, they would no doubt have continued with us: but they went out, that they might be made manifest that they were not all of us.

The term .Antichrist. appears a few verses later in the 1 John Ch 2. We learn from this passage that Antichrist leads people astray by denying that Jesus is the Christ and that Christ is the Son of God.

o 1Jn 2:22 Who is a liar but he that denieth that Jesus is the Christ? He is antichrist, that denieth the Father and the Son. o 1Jn 2:23 Whosoever denieth the Son, the same hath not the Father: (but) he that acknowledgeth the Son hath the Father also. o 1Jn 2:24 Let that therefore abide in you, which ye have heard from the beginning. If that which ye have heard from the beginning shall remain in you, ye also shall continue in the Son, and in the Father. o 1Jn 2:25 And this is the promise that he hath promised us, even eternal life. o 1Jn 2:26 These things have I written unto you concerning them that seduce you.

John writes about the Antichrist again in 1 John Ch 4:1-3. John repeats that Antichrist is in the world at his time. John adds that Antichrist is a persisting spirit that denies that .Jesus Christ has come in the flesh..

o 1Jn 4:1 Beloved, believe not every spirit, but try the spirits whether they are of God: because many false prophets are gone out into the world. o 1Jn 4:2 Hereby know ye the Spirit of God: Every spirit that confesseth that Jesus Christ is come in the flesh is of God: o 1Jn 4:3 And every spirit that confesseth not that Jesus Christ is come in the flesh is not of God: and this is that spirit of antichrist, whereof ye have heard that it should come; and even now already is it in the world.

2 John 1:7 is the final passage that includes the term .Antichrist.. This passage is very similar to 1 John 4:4 as it mentions that Antichrist is a deceiver that denies that Jesus Christ has come in flesh.

o 2Jn 1:7 For many deceivers are entered into the world, who confess not that Jesus Christ is come in the flesh. This is a deceiver and an antichrist. Here is a really good explanation of the Antichrist that summarizes everything weve learned from the four passages.

.From an honest consideration of these Scriptures, we learn that the .Antichrist" is defined as a spirit and not as a personified being. Furthermore, it is declared a deceiving spirit- thus, posing as the Spirit of Truth, while being the spirit of lying. This deceiving spirit was already active and prevalent amongst the early Messianic believers - in the first Messianic Congregation under the leadership of Messiah's direct appointed disciples. They were Messianic believers who had diverted from the accepted Truth of that time. They were opposers of (anti- or 'against') the True Messiah!. 193 193 .How to Identify the Antichrist.. 15 Apr. 2008. Last Accessed 13 Jan 2009. http://www.revelations.org.za/Antichrist.htm.

However, as we will see, Antichrist will also be embodied in a man who is restored from the dead that everyone will recognize. How can we reconcile these two conceptions of Antichrist? It is my belief that the spirit of Antichrist will possess a physical body of a past ruler who has been restored from the dead. Therefore, to speak of .the spirit of the Antichrist. and to speak of Antichrist .the man. is speaking of the same thing.

Maitreya: The Antichrist Spirit Maitreya is the name Satans highest-level fallen angel. Recall that Maitreya is known as .The Christ. or the .World Teacher. in the satanically-inspired New Age. New Age author Alice Bailey and others proclaim that Maitreya represents the coming figure expected by all religions, including the Imam Mahdi (Islam), Krishna (Hinduism), Maitreya Buddha (Buddhism), the Messiah (Judiasm), and the Christ (Christianity) to usher in a New Age. For a

variety of reasons, I believe Maitreya is the Antichrist Spirit, including his claim that he is the Christ, his claim that he is the source that resurrected Jesus from the dead, and the fact that his name calculates to 666 (see appendix for the calculation). Benjamin Creme, the official spokesman for Maitreya and the Ascended Masters, proclaimed that Maitreya decided to return to the world as .himself. immediately after Hitler departure:

"The signal for [Maitreya's] return was given in 1945 at the end of the war. The Lord Maitreya announced His intention to return once again - not taking over the vehicle of one of His disciples - but to come Himself in His own full physical presence, bringing a large group of His disciples, the Masters of Wisdom, with Him".194 194 Tarkowski, Ed. .Part Seven Lord Maitreya: Lord of the Apostasy? 5 Sept. 2003. Last Accessed 13 Jan. 2009. http://users.stargate.net/~ejt/maitreya.htm. 195 .Maitreya in Nairobi.. 6 Nov. 2006. Last Accessed 13 Jan. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/background/miracles/MI_nairobi.htm. 196 Leach, Monte. .Do You Believe in Miracles? Interview with Benjamin Creme.. 18 June 2006. Last Accessed 13 Jan. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/archives/signsmiracles/sm_mlbcinterview.htm.

Creme claims that Maitreya reappeared physically on Earth on July 19, 1977. Creme throughout the 1980s claimed (and even purchased advertising space in newspapers) that Maitreya would soon reveal himself to the world as the World Teacher. In 1988 Maitreya apparently made his first public appearance in Nairobi, Kenya when he materialized out of nowhere at a large Pentecostal gathering. The people at the gathering were reportedly amazed at Maitreya because he appeared to them in a body that was consistent with the gathers expectation of what Christ looks like. The following link is an image of Maitreya that was taken during his appearance in Nairobi, Kenya: Link After appearing on the scene, Maitreya reportedly spoke to the crowd for several minutes in flawless Swahili telling the people that they were blessed and that his time to rule would be very soon. After Maitreya spoke, a man named Gurnam Singh offered him a ride to wherever he needed to go. According to Creme, .on reaching the bus terminus, the man [Maitreya] informed Mr. Singh to stop the car. On getting out, he [Maitreya] walked a few paces beside the road and simply vanished into thin air..195 For the next several years Maitreya reportedly made frequent appearances around the

world. Maitreya reportedly appeared at religious services of many different religions in a body resembling the gatherers expectations of what their Messiah looks like. According to Creme, Maitreya has appeared at religious services, primarily Christian ones, with .the main goal. of .=softening up the fundamentalists...196

.These are groups from whom He would expect the greatest opposition when He declares Himself openly to the world. Fundamentalist groups are locked into their own beliefs about the appearance of the Christ, the Messiah, Krishna, the Imam Mahdi or Maitreya Buddha, and have set ideas which His presence would find difficult to disturb. These are people whom He has, in my words, been =softening up in these appearances. Maitreya is giving them a tremendous blessing appearing to them miraculously, talking to them in their own language, and then disappearing. This has given them a new experience of the

return of their long-awaited Teacher. I think Maitreya hopes to broaden their minds and make them more open to the fact of His return now, and not at the end of the world..197 197 Ibid. 198 Hitler, Adolf. Mein Kampf. 602. 199 Redles, David. Hitlers Millennial Reich. New York: NYU Press, 2005. 118 200 Wagener, Otto. Hitler-Memoirs of a Confidant. Trans. Ruth Hein. New Haven: Yale University Press. 1985. 172 201 Parparov, Fyodor. The Hitler Book: the Secret Dossier Prepared for Stalin from the Interrogations of Hitlers Personal Aides. Ed. Henrik Eberle and Matthias Uhl. Trans. Giles MacDonogh. New York: Public Affairs, 2005. 270 202 Blavatsky, Helena Petrovna. The Secret Doctrine. Vol. 1 Book 2. http://www.sacredtexts.com/the/sd/sd1-208.htm. 379

Hitler Alludes to Maitreya Despite his public portrayal as Germanys Messiah, Hitler privately pushed aside calls that he was the Messiah various times. In fact, Hitler spoke of another figure who he considered to be the Messiah. For instance, on page 602 of Hitlers manifesto Mein Kampf, he alludes to a mysterious future man who apparently is so important that his title is capitalized: .The fight must be carried out with unshakable persistency. We must be compelled to fight for the Coming One. For the fighter.s lives belong to the State.. 198 In 1924 German Georg Schott had a conversation with Hitler. Schott recounted that Hitler denied that he considered himself to be the Messiah, .with a voice and with eyes that I will never forget, he said .We are indeed all a little John [the Baptist]-like in nature. I await the Christ.. 199 Years later, Hitler reiterated that he was not the

Messiah when he said, .But I am not the Messiah. He will come after me.. 200 Finally, recall that Hitlers last known words were to an aid who asked Hitler who they should fight for now. Hitler replied, "For the coming man".201 Who is this .Coming Man. who Hitler regards to be .the Christ.? Recall that Hitler was strongly influenced by the book .The Secret Doctrine., which was written by who I consider to be the founder of the New Age Movement Madame Helena Blavatsky. According to Blavatsky, the Coming Man is someone named Maitreya:

"MAITREYA is the secret name of the Fifth Buddha, and the Kalki Avatar of the Brahmins - the last MESSIAH who will come at the culmination of the Great Cycle." 202

"He will appear as Maitreya Buddha, the last of the Avatars and Buddhas, in the seventh Race. Only it is not in the Kali yug, our present terrifically materialistic age of Darkness, the 'Black Age,' that a new Saviour of Humanity can ever appear." 203

203 Blavatsky, Helena Petrovna. The Secret Doctrine. Vol 1 Book 2. Theosophical Pub. Co. 1888. 470. 204 Creme, Benjamin. .Maitreyas Emergence-FAQ.. 18 Jun. 2006. Last Accessed 13 Jan. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/ARCHIVES/M_emergence/faq_M_emergence.htm. Creme continues to claim that Maitreyas appearance as the worlds savior is imminent. However, Cremes predictions about Maitreyas imminent appearance have not come true. Does these failed predictions mean that Creme is simply insane or is there something restraining the events he predicts from happening? I believe it is the later... A few years ago Creme lashed out at the forces that are preventing Maitreya from appearing to the world as its savior:

.That depends on us: it depends on the response of humanity, of the media of the world, which allows us to hear Him, and on the forces which are against this. Why do you think it has taken so long to get to this point? Because there are very powerful vested interests against this manifestation...I believe, from what I have been told by my Master, that it will be very quick. But when a Master says 'soon' he does not mean 'tomorrow', as we might think. 'Forthwith', which was the Master's latest statement about Maitreya's appearance, can mean 'anything up to a year', and 'soon' or 'very soon' could be anything up to a few years. The Masters are working in 2,000-year cycles - a few years is nothing to Them.. 204

I believe that Cremes predictions about Maitreyas appearance have failed because it is not yet the appointed time for that to happen. Paul wrote in 2 Thessalonians Chapter 2 that there is a divine force (Bible verses point to the Archangel Michael) restraining the Antichrist from revealing his true identity to the world until the appointed time:

o 2Th 2:3 Let no man deceive you by any means: for that day shall not come, except there come a falling away first, and that man of sin be revealed, the son of perdition; o 2Th 2:4 Who opposeth and exalteth himself above all that is called God, or that is worshipped; so that he as God sitteth in the temple of God, shewing himself that he is God.

o 2Th 2:5 Remember ye not, that, when I was yet with you, I told you these things? o 2Th 2:6 And now ye know what withholdeth that he might be revealed in his time. o 2Th 2:7 For the mystery of iniquity doth already work: only he who now letteth will let, until he be taken out of the way.

Eventually the restraining force that prevents Antichrist from revealing his true identity will no longer restrain him

The False Resurrection Going back to the vision of Revelation 17, the beast .was, and is not, and is about to come up out the abyss.

o Rev 17:8 The beast that thou sawest was, and is not; and shall ascend out of the bottomless pit, and go into perdition: and they that dwell on the earth shall wonder, whose names were not written in the book of life from the foundation of the world, when they behold the beast that was, and is not, and yet is.

In the vision, the beast once lived (was). There is a paradox in phrasing because the beast .is not. indicates that the beast presently does not live and .yet now is. indicates that the beast presently does live. This is in stark contrast to the description of God in Revelation 4:8, who lives forever.

o Rev 4:8 And the four beasts had each of them six wings about him; and they were full of eyes within: and they rest not day and night, saying, Holy, holy, holy, Lord God Almighty, which was, and is, and is to come.

The beast ascends from the abyss, a place described by the Bible where wicked souls go; his soul leaves the abyss. At first glance, this event could be compared to the resurrection that the Bible teaches that Christ executed.205 205 Later I show that Christ did not down to the place of torment that we think of .Hell. as.

o Act 2:31 He seeing this before spake of the resurrection of Christ, that his soul was not left in hell, neither his flesh did see corruption.

o Rom 10:7 Or, Who shall descend into the deep? (that is, to bring up Christ again from the dead.)

To compare the resurrection of Christ to the accession of the beast, we need to look at the key verses of Revelation 1:17-18 where Jesus said:

o Rev 1:17 And when I saw him, I fell at his feet as dead. And he laid his right hand upon me, saying unto me, Fear not; I am the first and the last: o Rev 1:18 I am he that liveth, and was dead; and, behold, I am alive for evermore, Amen; and have the keys of hell and of death.

The beast and Christ both faced death, temporary death because one already rose from it and another prophesized to rise. However the beasts condition on the earth when he returns to Earth is significantly different than when Jesus returned. Jesus was (after he rose) the .Living One. and will be living forever while the beast .is not. and .yet now is.. The paradox of living for the beast suggests that what the beast will perform is not an authentic resurrection. Though he appears on the earth after rising through the abyss, he is unable to do what Jesus did. A consequence of this false rise is that the beast can only be on the earth for a short period of time after his return. He .is., but not always will be; the beast .will go to his destruction.. Revelation Verse 17:8 also tells us that people will be amazed when they see the beast. The beast will be visible to everyone on the earth because he has ascended from the abyss and .now is.. The people, whose names are not in the Book of Life, which the Bible indicates will be completely unaware of what is going on, shall marvel at the beast because in their perspective the beast is like Jesus who died and rose from the dead. To capture this perspective, many people will ask:

o Rev 13:4 And they worshipped the dragon which gave power unto the beast: and they worshipped the beast, saying, Who is like unto the beast? who is able to make war with him?

Since the beast does not experience a true resurrection, what are the noticeable

differences about him versus someone who will be resurrected? A persons resurrected body will be a spiritual body that apparently will retain the same outer appearance as their earthly body and will still consist of flesh and bone. In fact, a resurrected Jesus told two disciples that he was compressed of flesh and bone in Luke 24.

o Luk 24:38 And he said unto them, Why are ye troubled? and why do thoughts arise in your hearts? o Luk 24:39 Behold my hands and my feet, that it is I myself: handle me, and see; for a spirit hath not flesh and bones, as ye see me have. o Luk 24:40 And when he had thus spoken, he shewed them his hands and his feet.

Evidence that a persons resurrected body will retain its same outer appearance can be seen when Thomas asked a resurrected Jesus to show him the mark of His crucifixion.

o Joh 20:24 But Thomas, one of the twelve, called Didymus, was not with them when Jesus came. o Joh 20:25 The other disciples therefore said unto him, We have seen the Lord. But he said unto them, Except I shall see in his hands the print of the nails, and put my finger into the print of the nails, and thrust my hand into his side, I will not believe. o Joh 20:26 And after eight days again his disciples were within, and Thomas with them: then came Jesus, the doors being shut, and stood in the midst, and said, Peace be unto you. o Joh 20:27 Then saith he to Thomas, Reach hither thy finger, and behold my hands; and reach hither thy hand, and thrust it into my side: and be not faithless, but believing. o Joh 20:28 And Thomas answered and said unto him, My Lord and my God. o Joh 20:29 Jesus saith unto him, Thomas, because thou hast seen me, thou hast believed: blessed are they that have not seen, and yet have believed.

Another aspect of resurrected body is that the person with it will never die again.

o Luk 20:36 Neither can they die any more: for they are equal unto the angels; and are the children of God, being the children of the resurrection.

Finally, a resurrected person cannot have blood because if they return from the dead with it they cannot inherit the kingdom of God and not have eternal life.

o 1Co 15:50 Now this I say, brethren, that flesh and blood cannot inherit the kingdom of God; neither doth corruption inherit incorruption.

As was said before, the (re)appearance of the 8th king represents the fatal wound to the head that was healed in Johns beast from the sea, and since the head is healed, the 8th kings return is not an authentic resurrection. Nevertheless, the earth is amazed at the beast because the 8th king appears to be resurrected from the dead.

o Rev 13:3 And I saw one of his heads as it were wounded to death; and his deadly wound was healed: and all the world wondered after the beast.

Satans false resurrection of one of his seven previous kings will be one of many deceptions that he will pull during the end times.

o 2Th 2:9 Even him, whose coming is after the working of Satan with all power and signs and lying wonders,

The people of Earth will pay homage to the beast through the worshipping of 8th king. They worship by asking rhetorically .who is like the beast?. since they have never seen an empire led by a man who has come back from the dead. They ask as they worship .who is being able to wage war with it?. because the reign of this empire cannot be challenged by a human.

o Rev 13:4 And they worshipped the dragon which gave power unto the beast: and they worshipped the beast, saying, Who is like unto the beast? who is able to make war with him?

Ezekiel 38:21-22 confirms that Antichrist will not truly be resurrected. Antichrists restored body will be mortal since it will be destroyed through a blood-letting plaque of hailstones and brimstone.

o Eze 38:21 And I will call for a sword against him throughout all my mountains, saith the Lord GOD: every man's sword shall be against his brother. o Eze 38:22 And I will plead against him with pestilence and with blood; and I will rain upon him, and upon his bands, and upon the many people that are with him, an overflowing rain, and great hailstones, fire, and brimstone.

The Antichrists Ability What will this individual gain by having the spirit of Antichrist? Besides giving life to an individual, a spirit also provides an individual with their mental and moral capabilities. For Jesus, He possesses all the abilities that the Spirit of God provides.

o Isa 11:2 And the spirit of the LORD shall rest upon him, the spirit of wisdom and understanding, the spirit of counsel and might, the spirit of knowledge and of the fear of the LORD;

A mans spirit somewhat limits what they are able to perceive/understand. A mans spirit alone cannot understand what God understands.206 206 This does not mean that man does not have spiritual gifts from God that allows them to understand higher things, see 1 Corinthians 12.

o 1Co 2:11 For what man knoweth the things of a man, save the spirit of man which is in him? even so the things of God knoweth no man, but the Spirit of God.

Therefore, the spirit of Antichrist inserted into a mans restored body will give him the moral and mental capabilities that the spirit has to offer. The spirit of Antichrist is an evil spirit that has specialized in deceiving people through oratory and persuasion all around the world for nearly two millenniums. The spirit has broken through every language, age, gender, cultural, and ethnic barrier to deceive people into not believing in Jesus. It would take a man of remarkable intelligence to overcome these barriers in order to communicate to people around the world. The spirit of Antichrist will give the man who will be Antichrist the mental capacity required to accomplish these feats as Daniel 8:23 and 7:8 make it clear that he will utilize his immeasurable abilities to persuade and deceive people.

o Dan 8:23 And in the latter time of their kingdom, when the transgressors are come to the full, a king of fierce countenance, and understanding dark sentences, shall stand up. o Dan 8:24 And his power shall be mighty, but not by his own power: and he shall destroy wonderfully, and shall prosper, and practise, and shall destroy the mighty and the holy people. o Dan 8:25 And through his policy also he shall cause craft to prosper in his hand; and he shall

magnify himself in his heart, and by peace shall destroy many: he shall also stand up against the Prince of princes; but he shall be broken without hand.

o Dan 7:8 I considered the horns, and, behold, there came up among them another little horn, before whom there were three of the first horns plucked up by the roots: and, behold, in this horn were eyes like the eyes of man, and a mouth speaking great things.

To summarize, the spirit of Antichrist will give this restored man incredible power. This power will allow Antichrist to deceive the world into believing he is a man who has been resurrected from the dead; therefore, he should be an object of worship. Evidence of Antichrist having the same physical appearance as in the past comes from Revelation 17:8 and 13:4 when the people upon the earth have an easy time recognizing the beast when he reveals himself.

o Rev 17:8 The beast that thou sawest was, and is not; and shall ascend out of the bottomless pit, and go into perdition: and they that dwell on the earth shall wonder, whose names were not written in the book of life from the foundation of the world, when they behold the beast that was, and is not, and yet is.

o Rev 13:4 And they worshipped the dragon which gave power unto the beast: and they worshipped the beast, saying, Who is like unto the beast? who is able to make war with him?

Identifying the 8th Kings Body The eighth and final king is an individual who was one of the seven historic kings.

o Rev 17:11 And the beast that was, and is not, even he is the eighth, and is of the seven, and goeth into perdition.

To find properly identify this individual; we will undergo a process of elimination.

The Fatal Wound The 8th king had suffered a deadly wound in battle when he previously reigned over his kingdom.

o Rev 13:3 And I saw one of his heads as it were wounded to death; and his deadly wound was healed: and all the world wondered after the beast.

o Rev 13:14 And deceiveth them that dwell on the earth by the means of those miracles which he had power to do in the sight of the beast; saying to them that dwell on the earth, that they should make an image to the beast, which had the wound by a sword, and did live.

The following table describes the mode of death for each of the first six kings and states whether they can be eliminated from consideration.

Leader Eliminate Why Applicable Verses Ahmoses I No The cause of Ahmoses Is death is unknown N/A Sennacherib No Details on he suffered sword wounds are unavailable 2 Ki 19:36-37 Nebuchadnezzar Yes No evidence of foul play/died of natural causes N/A Haman Yes Hung by the neck Est 7:10 Antiochus Epiphanies IV

Yes Died of illness in Babylon Book of Maccabees Nero Yes Died with sword wounds to the neck N/A

Adolf Hitler committed suicide by shooting himself in the mouth with a pistol.207 The SS had prepared a hideout in Southern Germany. Many of Hitlers aides pleaded with him to leave Berlin for Berchtesgaden and begin surrender negotiations from there.208 One notable aid was Hitlers adjutant, Martin Bormann, who tried to arrange a deal where Hitler would surrender himself to the Americans. When Bormann told Hitler about his intentions Hitler .simply shook his head lethargically and countered, =I dont have any authority any more. Another person must do that for me. For my own part I must do what I must..209 Hitler knew even in 1934 the conditions that he must die under: .At the time of supreme peril I must die a martyrs death..210 Hitler along with only his most loyal and fanatical followers remained in the Berlin bunker. Hitlers fatal wound to the head keeps him as a candidate to become the 8th king. 207 Toland, John. Adolf Hitler. Doubleday O Company Inc. Garden City, New York. 1976. 208 .869

209 Parparov, Fyodor. The Hitler Book: the Secret Dossier Prepared for Stalin from the Interrogations of Hitlers Personal Aides. Ed. Henrik Eberle and Matthias Uhl. Trans. Giles MacDonogh. New York: Public Affairs, 2005. 243 210 Baynes, Godwin Helton. Germany Possessed. AMS Press. 1972 New York. 46

Instant Recognition A major characteristic of the 8th king will be his ability to sway the public with oratory and showmanship. The defining characteristic of the 8th king is that those who are living on the earth at the time he reveals himself will recognize who he is.

o Rev 17:8 The beast that thou sawest was, and is not; and shall ascend out of the bottomless pit, and go into perdition: and they that dwell on the earth shall wonder, whose names were not written in the book of life from the foundation of the world, when they behold the beast that was, and is not, and yet is.

o Rev 13:4 And they worshipped the dragon which gave power unto the beast: and they worshipped the beast, saying, Who is like unto the beast? who is able to make war with him?

The worldwide recognition of the 8th king is the most important characteristic of the 8th king because only one man could command such recognition today or in the future. How will the people be able to recognize the 1st king when no one (not even me) is 100% sure who was the Pharaoh of Egypt at the time when Moses was born? Similarly, how will people recognize Sennacherib when most people do not know who he is, and those who do know-what he looks like? Unlike the 1st king and Sennacherib, Adolf Hitler is so infamous around the world that someone can just mention his last name and people would still know who they were referring to even though Hitler has been dead for over 60 years. Finally, Hitlers appearance is unique and instantly recognizable with a weird mustache and a sideways combed haircut.

Will Not Love of Women Finally, the 8th king is someone who can ignore women as he is involved in conquest.

o Dan 11:37 Neither shall he regard the God of his fathers, nor the desire of women, nor regard any god: for he shall magnify himself above all.

Adolf Hitler fits this description perfectly as he shrugged off women until the final days of his life. Hitlers charisma attracted marriage proposals from many women as they were enthralled with him. However, he declined these proposals and told the public that he was married to

Germany. Although Hitler married Eva Braun he managed to resist her until the day before he died. Hitler often neglected Braun, who felt so lonely at times that she took drugs to lessen the pain of loneliness and attempt suicide twice. Unlike the other six kings, Hitler did not have children even though he could have had several if he wanted to. If this criterion was used earlier it would have eliminated every king except for Hitler.

Other Return Indicators One man knew of Hitlers eventual fate because he was the one who was selected to train Hitler for his future role. Hitlers mentor Dietrich Eckhart .claimed to his fellow adepts in the Thule Group that he had personally received a kind of satanic annunciation [a visit by a spiritual being to announce something important] that he was destined to prepare the vessel of the

Antichrist [Maitreya].211 He found his man in Adolf Hitler and trained him in oratory and occult practices. On his death bed Eckhart told those he came to visit him, .Follow Hitler! He will dance, but it is I who have called the tune! I have initiated him into the 'Secret Doctrine', opened his centres of vision and given him the means to communicate with the Powers. Do not mourn for me: for I shall have influenced history more than any other German..212 211 Ravenscroft, Trevor. The Spear of Destiny; the Occult Power Behind the Spear which Pierced the Side of Christ. New York: Putnam, 1973. 92. 212 Ibid. 93. 213 Baynes, Godwin Helton. Germany Possessed. AMS Press. 1972 New York. 46 214 Baynes, Godwin Helton. Germany Possessed. AMS Press. 1972 New York. 46 It is impossible to completely prove that Hitler knew that he is destined to return as the 8th king described in the Book of Revelation. However, Hitler made a peculiar statement that indicates that he may have known something... Hitler hinted to Rauschning that he will personally reveal something very important to the world about himself after he is dead: .There were stages of which he must allow himself to speak. Even this, he said, he intended to make public only when he was no longer living. Then there would be something really great, an overwhelming revelation. In order completely to fulfill his mission he must die a martyrs death.213. Perhaps the only way Hitler could make such an important announcement to the world is for to return to life

A Final Comment on Restoration I believe that the Spirit of Antichrist Maitreya will embody the restored body of Adolf Hitler because everyone knows what Hitler looks like while essentially no one knows what any of the past rulers look like. When Antichrist reveals himself everyone will immediately recognize him and those unsuspecting will be amazed. What I find very interesting is that Hitler

seems to have hinted to Rauschning that he would reveal something overwhelming to the world at a time when everyone thinks he is dead: .There were stages of which he must allow himself to speak. Even this, he said, he intended to make public only when he was no longer living. Then there would be something really great, an overwhelming revelation. In order completely to fulfill his mission he must die a martyrs death.. 214 I cannot answer how Hitlers body will be physically restored, but be prepared for it because all signs point to this event happening in the future.

Conclusion All indications from Revelation 13 and 17 point to the return of Adolf Hitler, who shall claim that he has been raised from the dead like Christ. In addition, Hitler is likely going to be

empowered by the Maitreya the Antichrist Spirit whose coming is foretold by the Bible, Hitler, and New Age followers. If you disagree with me about who I believe the Antichrist will be let us agree on one thing, we, Israel, and the rest of the world will find out for sure halfway through the 70th Week of Daniel.

Appendix: Calculating the Number of Maitreyas Name The characteristic that is always associated with the Antichrist is that the number of his name will add up to 666. For Maitreya to be even considered a serious candidate for being the Antichrist he must pass this special test.

o Rev 13:18 Here is wisdom. Let him that hath understanding count the number of the beast: for it is the number of a man; and his number is Six hundred threescore and six.

The practice of converting a persons name into a number is called Gematria, which was a common practice when Revelation was written. Simply put it, each letter of the alphabet is assigned a numerical value and you derive the numerical value of a word by adding the values of the letters in the word together. The two languages that we need to consider when calculating the value of Maitreyas name are Hebrew and Greek. We need to consider Hebrew because John the Revelator was Jewish and we need to consider Greek because the Book of Revelation was written in Greek. The following table shows the Hebrew Alphabet and the numerical values associated with each value.

The Hebrew Alphabet and the Value of Each Letter

Aleph Beth Gimel Daleth He Vau Zayin Cheth Teth . . . . . . . . . 1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 Yod Kaph Lamed Mem Nun Samech Ayin Pe Tsadi . .. . .. .. . . .. .. 10

20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Koph Resh Shin Tau Kaph Mem Nun Pe Tsadi . . . . . .

. . . 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

According to Pastor Harry Walther, there are seven possible ways to translate the name .Maitreya. into Hebrew, including the method I have included in the table below (. . . . . . . .).215 Each variation in the spelling of Maitreyas name adds up to 666.216 215 Walther Harry, .Antichrist Revealed.. 6 June. 2006. Last Accessed 13 Jan. 2009. http://www.satansrapture.com/maitreya.htm. 216 Ibid. 217 .Maitreya = 666. The Number of the Beast Revealed.. 23 Aug. 2007. Last Accessed 13 Jan. 2009. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BVkusRzq4Xo.

Mem Aleph Teth Tau Resh Yod Hei Aleph Total . . . . . .

. . 40 1 9 400 200 10 5 1 666

The following table shows the Greek Alphabet and the numerical values associated with each value.

The Greek Alphabet and the Value of Each Letter Alpha Beta Gamma Delta Epsilon

Zeta Eta Theta .a . G. Gd .e .d .e T. 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 Iota Kappa Lambda Mu

Nu Xi Omicron Pi .. .. .. .. .. . .. .p 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Rho Sigma Tau

Upsilon Phi Chi Psi Omega .. .. S. .p F. .. F. .s 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800

In order to calculate the value of an individuals name with Greek gematria, you add an .s. at the end of the name. For instance, Penelope would become .Penelopes. when calculating the value of her name. Amazingly, the value of Maitreyas name (. a . . . . e a .) is 666 when using Greek gematria.217

. . . . . . e . . Total 40 1 10 300 9 100 5 1

200 666

Maitreya meets all the characteristics that are associated with the Antichrist. He is a deceiving spirit who claims that he is the worlds savior and is the Messiah that all religions are waiting for. Maitreya also amazing fits the bill of Antichrist because his name calculates to 666 when using Hebrew and Greek gemetria. In addition, Hitlers allusions to him as the Messiah and as the Coming Man give me all the more reason to believe that Maitreya is the Antichrist who will work in conjunction with Adolf Hitler.

14. The False Prophets Identity Revealed 13For such are false apostles, deceitful workers, transforming themselves into the apostles of Christ. 14And no marvel; for Satan himself is transformed into an angel of light. 15Therefore it is no great thing if his ministers also be transformed as the ministers of righteousness; whose end shall be according to their works. 2 Corinthians 11:13-15

Introduction The False Prophet is one of the most enigmatic individuals in the entire Bible. Most peoples knowledge of the False Prophet is limited to just the brief passage about him in Revelation 13. People for centuries have speculated about who this individual might be. Some speculate that the False Prophet could be the Pope or some other prominent religious leader. In this chapter I provide you with the exact identity of the False Prophet and explain what his role will be on Earth in greater detail than most so-called .prophecy experts. will ever do.

The Beast of the Earth The Antichrists False Prophet is prophesied to arise in Revelation 13 after the Antichrist reveals his true identity. He is known as the beast of the earth; however, what is very interesting about the beasts description is that he will resemble a lamb, but speak like a dragon.

o Rev 13:11 And I beheld another beast coming up out of the earth; and he had two horns like a lamb, and he spake as a dragon.

Revelation 13:11 implies that the False Prophet will somehow physically remind people of Jesus

Christ, yet will speak as the satanic representative that he is. The False Prophets goal is to make everyone in the entire world worship the Antichrist. The False Prophet is able to convince many people to worship Antichrist by performing great signs, such as causing fire to come down from heaven.

o Rev 13:12 And he exerciseth all the power of the first beast before him, and causeth the earth and them which dwell therein to worship the first beast, whose deadly wound was healed. o Rev 13:13 And he doeth great wonders, so that he maketh fire come down from heaven on the earth in the sight of men, o Rev 13:14 And deceiveth them that dwell on the earth by the means of those miracles which he had power to do in the sight of the beast; saying to them that dwell on the earth, that they should make an image to the beast, which had the wound by a sword, and did live.

Meet the False Prophet Recall that Paul warns that satanic representatives like fallen angels have the ability to transform or masquerade themselves as benevolent ministers of light.

o 2Co 11:13 For such are false apostles, deceitful workers, transforming themselves into the apostles of Christ. o 2Co 11:14 And no marvel; for Satan himself is transformed into an angel of light. o 2Co 11:15 Therefore it is no great thing if his ministers also be transformed as the ministers of righteousness; whose end shall be according to their works.

This information about fallen angels is important because Satan has a fallen angel who fits the description given of the False Prophet in Revelation 13 perfectly. Satans representative is a fallen angel/Ascended Master who calls himself .Jesus Sananda Immanuel. or the .Master Jesus. (I will refer to him as simply Sananda).218 Sananda is an imposter for Jesus of Nazareth and is described by Benjamin Creme as Maitreyas right-hand man (the False Prophet): 218 The title .Master. is a term synonymous with the title .fallen angel. when talking about non-Christian entities.

219 Liefhebber, Peter. .Jesus of Nazareth and Maitreya the Christ.. 18 June. 2006. Last Accessed 13 Jan. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/archives/AgelessWisdom/aw_pl-JnM.htm.

.With the emergence of Maitreya, the Master Jesus is playing a major role for the second time, as also are the Apostles Peter and John. Two thousand years ago they were thirddegree initiates; now they have been entrusted with a significant aspect of completing the Plan as the Master Morya, and the Master who will succeed Maitreya as the Christ during the next era (in about 2,500 years), Koot Hoomi. This open collaboration, which will be visible to all, will end any lingering doubts concerning the true relationship between Maitreya the Christ and his disciple, the Master Jesus.. 219

Creme confirms that Sanandas purpose is to replace all religions and to create a single world religion: .In collaboration with the Masters KH [Koot Hoomi] and M [Morya], the Master Jesus

is deeply interested in unifying the religious thought of East and West. According to the Plan, this will lead to the One Universal Church, uniting all peoples into the One Humanity..... 220 220 Jurriaanse, Aart. .The Master Jesus.. 18. June 2006. Last Accessed 13 Jan 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/archives/AgelessWisdom/aw_ajJesus.htm. 221 Sheppard, Pam. .Are You Worshipping the Fake Jesus?. 13 Jan 2009. Last Accessed Jan 2009. http://www.scribd.com/doc/14765099/ARE-YOU-WORSHIPPING-THE-FAKE-JESUS. Sananda also seems to be the False Prophet because he will physically remind people of Jesus. People for centuries have envisioned Jesus of Nazareth having long, brown hair and facial hair as paintings by various artists and other images have depicted him having these physical features. I believe these images will help Satan deceive those who will be living in the end times since Jesus never had long hair. Jesus of Nazareth did not have long hair since 1st Corinthians 11:14 states that it is unnatural and against societal norms for men to have long hair.

o 1Co 11:14 Doth not even nature itself teach you, that, if a man have long hair, it is a shame unto him?

The unbiblical paintings and images of Jesus will help Satan fool many people because Sananda physically resembles most people conception of what Jesus of Nazareth looks like. (You can find see what Sananda looks like by accessing these links: Link 1, Link 2). Therefore, there will be many people who will be drawn to Sananda when he appears because he will look like Jesus in their eyes. Sananda also seems to be the False Prophet because he will deliver blasphemous messages. Pam Sheppard, one of the best analysts of the false doctrines that exist today,

described how Sananda speaks like a dragon:

. Jesus Sananda defies and refutes Jesus Christ of Nazareth by preaching that all religious roads lead to God. The Lord Jesus Christ declared that no man could come unto the Father than but by Himself yet Jesus Sananda preaches that all religions lead to the Father. To find out who Sananda says that he is, I have reviewed the writing of several "channels." It is an arduous task. Overall, it seems that Sananda's mission and purpose is the unification of all world religions, spiritual paths, schools of thought, in other words the formation of Mystery Babylon..221

Sanandas Role I expect that a majority of the worlds population will immediately accept Antichrist, Maitreya. Hinduism, Buddhism, and Islam do not warn its followers that a counterfeit messianic

figure will appear before the coming of the Messiah. However, Creme feels that most Christians will be somewhat apprehensive at following Maitreya at first: .Most Christians, I think, will find it easier to accept and follow the Master Jesus rather than the Lord Maitreya. 222 Many Christians initial hesitancy to accept Maitreya is why I believe Satan will make Sananda Maitreyas biggest advocate. Creme believes that most Christians will eventually come to accept Maitreya with the help of Sananda: 222 Crme, Benjamin. .Maitreyas Emergence-FAQ.. 18 Jun. 2006. Last Accessed 13 Jan. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/ARCHIVES/M_emergence/faq_M_emergence.htm. 223Ibid. 224 Creme, Benjamin. .50 Frequently Asked Questions.. 02 Nov. 2006 Last Accessed 13 Jan 2009. http://www.share-international.org/background/faq/faq_main.htm. 225 Jurriaanse, Aart. .The Master Jesus.. 18. June 2006. Last Accessed 13 Jan 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/archives/AgelessWisdom/aw_ajJesus.htm.

.No-one knows for sure, but my feeling is that the vast majority of open-minded Christians will accept Maitreya and the Master Jesus, Whom they will see side-by-side. Maitreya will introduce the Master Jesus and other Masters to the world after the Day of Declaration. The Master Jesus has a special task in that He is in charge of the Christian Churches, and very many Christians will look to Him for guidance and teaching.223

Sananda will use his influence and his large following to transform Christianity into a religion that more suits the liking of the Antichrist:

He is one of the Masters who will very shortly return to outer work in the world, taking over the throne of St Peter, in Rome. He will seek to transform the Christian Churches, in so far as they are flexible enough to respond correctly to the new reality which the return of the Christ and the Masters will create. I am afraid that the Churches have gone very far away from the religion which the Christ inaugurated; which is to do with sharing,

with love, with brotherhood and right relationship. But this monolithic institution has grown up in the name of that simple man and transformed his simple teaching into...well, you know what it has taught." 224

Specifically, Creme states that Sananda will alter Christianity by controlling the papacy. In fact, Cremes website implies that Sananda will be the Pope: "It is forecast that the Master Jesus will yet occupy the chair of the Pope of Rome, and that from that seat he will then be able to reinspire and re-orient the whole field of Christian religion, diverting it from its present political and temporal trends, towards a more spiritual approach".225 However, in another statement Creme says point-blank that Sananda will not become Pope: .He will take over the throne of St Peter. He will not become the Pope, but the true apostolic succession will begin from that

time..226 The apparent contradictions can be harmonized by saying that Sananda will control the papacy by installing his own Pope, who will act as his own puppet. 226 Creme, Benjamin. .Religion-FAQ.. 18. June 2006. Last Accessed 13 Jan. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/ARCHIVES/religion/faq_religion.htm. The False Prophet Sananda will also have the power to give life to the images of the Antichrist so that they may speak and perhaps kill those who refuse to worship the Antichrists image.

o Rev 13:15 And he had power to give life unto the image of the beast, that the image of the beast should both speak, and cause that as many as would not worship the image of the beast should be killed.

Finally, the False Prophet Sananda will require everyone in the world to take the Mark of the Beast (Antichrist) on their forehead or right hand.

o Rev 13:16 And he causeth all, both small and great, rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their right hand, or in their foreheads: o Rev 13:17 And that no man might buy or sell, save he that had the mark, or the name of the beast, or the number of his name. o Rev 13:18 Here is wisdom. Let him that hath understanding count the number of the beast: for it is the number of a man; and his number is Six hundred threescore and six.

In sum, with Sanandas help Antichrist will be able to complete the implementation of a New

World Order.

15. Specifics of the New World Order

Introduction Earlier in this book I wrote about how Satan is trying to bring a New World Order into fruition and how the world must experience a destructive crisis before it arrives. Satan has fallen angels and several million individuals who are working to bring a one-world government, economy, and religion under the control of Antichrist. They have made significant strides over the past 70 years, including the creation of the United Nations and the development of plans that will bring the New World Order when radical change is demanded by the world. We are currently experiencing a global financial and economic collapse that has been forecasted by certain financial market experts and by the forces of darkness, including high-level fallen angels. The global economic and financial collapse will lead to a period of internal strife, civil wars, and global warfare. The period will be so destructive that world leaders will hold several conferences to find ways to prevent a repeat of it in the future. The aftermath of this destructive period will be a world that is radically different from the one we know today. This chapter is devoted to describing what the New World Order will look like when it finally arrives

The NWO Components The New World Order will dominate three main areas: the field of politics, the field of economics and finance, and the field of religion.227 According to New Age author Alice Bailey and Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul, the New World Order will come into fruition when the Spiritual Hierarchy (Fallen Angels) and Sanat Kumara (Satan) have control over these three areas: 227 Bailey, Alice. Telepathy and the Etheric Vehicle. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1950. 186

228 Ibid 186

.At the close of the age, the three major Centers will be in complete, unified and synchronized activity, with Sanat Kumara in Shamballa over-shadowing and informing His Representatives in the hierarchical and human Centers; then the central Triangle in each Center will not be only actively functioning, but they will be working together in the closest rapport. 228

Component 1: Economy After the breaking of the 3rd Seal, Antichrist and his minions will have a strong grip on the worlds economy with control over business activity, economic activity (i.e. financial transactions), and pricing. In addition, the supply of resources will be controlled so that countries will have to comply with the whims of the one-government that controls them. The control of the world economy will enable Antichrist to make it difficult for anyone to oppose him.

The Global Currency Bailey and Djwhal Khul confirm the suspicions of many people over the past several decades by admitting that there will one day be a single, global currency. This global currency unit will represent bartered goods, thus supplement the global bartering system:

.Owing to the development of atomic energy on behalf of human welfare, national currencies will have been largely superseded, not only by a system of barter but by a universal monetary exchange - representative of the bartered goods when they are relatively small and unimportant - and by a planned scale of related values. National material assets and the needed commodities will all be provided for under an entirely new system..229 229 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 580 230 Share International Magazine. Apr. 2009. http://shareinternational.org/magazine/old_issues/2009/200904.htm.

Benjamin Cremes magazine Share International sheds some light on how the global currency may function. One example Share International cites is a concept called .timebanking.. Share International defines timebanking in the following passage:

.Timebanking is a way of exchanging services at a local level via a currency (originally a =time dollar) where every hour of time a person offers in the form of a service is equal to any other persons hour of service, whatever service that might be, whether it is an hours shopping, watering a garden, hairdressing, bookkeeping, a language lesson, or any other service..230

Share Internationals description of how time timebanking works is limited to just people who can perform services. While I believe timebanking is a system that possibly can be used to exchange services, I believe something greater is needed to encompass the exchange of goods as well. Fortunately, Share International cites Singapore-based BarterXchange as another example of how the global currency system can function: .Through BarterXchange, a network of 600 enterprises, companies in the northern part of the city state earn credits by offering their services and skills, which they can then use to obtain what they need from other members..231 The BarterXchange network is not limited to just facilitating the exchange of services as it is also able to facilitate the exchange of services and facilitate the exchange of goods for services.232 231 Share International Magazine. June 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/magazine/old_issues/2009/200906.htm. 232 Disclaimer: My intention is to NOT damage the corporate reputation of BarterXchange. BarterXchange is a reputable company that seems to be doing a good job offering customers services they want as demonstrated by their rapid growth. I am only mentioning BarterXchange here because Share International mentioned the company

Ezekiel 7 and Zephaniah 1 mention that people during the end times will carry gold and silver with them while they are out and about. In fact, Zephaniah 1:18 indicate that people will wrongly consider gold and silver as items that will bring them safety in times of trouble.

o Eze 7:19 They shall cast their silver in the streets, and their gold shall be removed: their silver and their gold shall not be able to deliver them in the day of the wrath of the LORD: they shall not satisfy their souls, neither fill their bowels: because it is the stumblingblock of their iniquity.

o Zep 1:18 Neither their silver nor their gold shall be able to deliver them in the day of the LORD'S wrath; but the whole land shall be devoured by the fire of his jealousy: for he shall make even a speedy riddance of all them that dwell in the land.

The existence of gold and silver in the hands of people indicates that gold and silver will also be accepted as a monetary unit of exchange during the existence of the new, global economic system. Therefore, gold and silver will continue to be considered as money as it has these past five thousand years.

Pricing The planned scale of related values that Bailey and Djwhal Khul mention is a clear indication that prices will be set by the international organization that will oversee the resources of the world. The plan for a regulatory body to set price of items instead of letting the market set

prices for items is unsurprising when you consider Maitreyas hatred for the market. According to a high-level fallen angel, .Maitreya calls market forces - which are the basis of the Western economic system and another term for =greed - the forces of evil. He says there is nothing more destructive than the blind following of market forces and any nation which does so will reap destruction..233 Bailey and Djwhal Khuls disclosure that there will be a global regulatory body that will fix set the price for items confirms Revelation 6:5-6 which features an overview of price-fixing for items such as wheat and barley after the time the 3rd Seal is broken. 233 Creme, Benjamin. .Economic and Financial Issues FAQ.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/ARCHIVES/economics/faq_economic.htm. 234 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 580 235 Creme, Benjamin. .Sharing FAQ.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/ARCHIVES/sharing/faq_sharing.htm.

o Rev 6:5 And when he had opened the third seal, I heard the third beast say, Come and see. And I beheld, and lo a black horse; and he that sat on him had a pair of balances in his hand. o Rev 6:6 And I heard a voice in the midst of the four beasts say, A measure of wheat for a penny, and three measures of barley for a penny; and see thou hurt not the oil and the wine.

Other Economic Regulation Bailey and Djwhal Khul indicate that businesses can continue to operate, but it will be subject to rules of Antichrist.234 One of the key regulations is that no person or business may

buy or sell unless the ones conducting the transaction have the mark of the beast, the name of the beast, or the number of the beasts name on their right hand or forehead:

o Rev 13:16 And he causeth all, both small and great, rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their right hand, or in their foreheads: o Rev 13:17 And that no man might buy or sell, save he that had the mark, or the name of the beast, or the number of his name.

Another key regulation is that neither businesses nor people will be permitted to speculate. In fact, Creme reveals that the economic system of the future will lack markets for people to speculate in: .Speculation is seen by Hierarchy [Satans highest-level fallen angels] as a disease. At present, over 90 per cent of all stock market transactions are currency speculations. The markets have become what Maitreya calls 'gambling casinos'; they have no part to play in a rational economic structure based on justice..235

A very important detail that Bailey and Djwhal Khul reveal is that there will be an international organization that will control the most essential raw materials, including oil and iron ore, and food.

.the great public utilities, the major material resources and the sources of planetary wealth - iron, steel, oil and wheat, for instance - will be owned in the first place by a governing, controlling international group; they will, however, be prepared for international consumption by national groups chosen by the people and under international direction..236 236 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 580-581 237 Stockbauer, Bette. .The Future Role of the United Nations.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/ARCHIVES/political/po_bsfuture-UN.htm. 238 .Maitreyas Priorities.. 19 Jun. 2009. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/maitreya/Ma_prior.htm.

The organization created to oversee the worlds resources will pool each countrys excess resources together and will distribute the resources to countries as it sees fit or as events warrant.

.The central department will act as a =resource director, recording the assets and needs of all the countries of the world. If one country has an excess of a certain product, then it will be matched with a country in need of the same item. Similarly, if a country is in crisis, if its grain crop is destroyed by drought, then others will offer food from their own stores to fill the demand. Every country will eventually be both recipient and donor in this program. Disaster relief will be instantaneous and so prevent the moral degradation that comes when such distresses are left too long unattended..237

The forces of darkness admit that the new international organization will be under the banner of the United Nations and that this organization will be managed by an Ascended Master:

.As humanity begins to accept the Principle of Sharing, and people call on governments to implement this principle, each country will make an inventory of its assets and needs. These statistics will provide a United Nations agency, set up for this purpose, with the information required for a rational redistribution of the world's resources. That which each country has in excess of its needs will be put aside, in trust for the world..238

.A new United Nations agency dealing only with the distribution of resources will be formed under the supervision of a Master or at least a third-degree initiate. And so, by a simple process of sharing and exchange, a very sophisticated form of barter will replace the present economic system. This is not immediate, but not too far in the future..239 239 .A Positive Vision of the Future (Economy).. 26. Aug. 2007. Last Accessed. 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareberlin.info/economy.htm. 240 .Maitreyas Priorities.. 19 Jun. 2009. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/maitreya/Ma_prior.htm.

However, Creme admits that this international group will ultimately have to answer to Maitreya:

.Maitreya will help us see that the world's food, raw materials, energy and technological resources belong to everyone and must be shared equitably. These resources, Maitreya says, are given by divine right for the sustenance of all humanity, not for the use and misuse by a relative few. He will recommend a re-ordering of economic priorities so that adequate food, housing, education and medical care become universal rights..240

The existence of a global regulatory body to control the worlds resources confirms another aspect of Revelation 6:5-6 which reveals that the resources of the world will be rationed as people are given a certain amount of items.

o Rev 6:5 And when he had opened the third seal, I heard the third beast say, Come and see. And I beheld, and lo a black horse; and he that sat on him had a pair of balances in his hand. o Rev 6:6 And I heard a voice in the midst of the four beasts say, A measure of wheat for a penny, and three measures of barley for a penny; and see thou hurt not the oil and the wine.

Revelation 18 may reveal where the headquarters of this UN organization will be located. The chapter describes a city where all the wealth of the earth is seemingly controlled: Babylon the Great. o Rev 18:11 And the merchants of the earth shall weep and mourn over her; for no man buyeth their merchandise any more: o Rev 18:12 The merchandise of gold, and silver, and precious stones, and of pearls, and fine linen, and purple, and silk, and scarlet, and all thyine wood, and all manner vessels of ivory, and all manner vessels of most precious wood, and of brass, and iron, and marble, o Rev 18:13 And cinnamon, and odours, and ointments, and frankincense, and wine, and oil, and fine flour, and wheat, and beasts, and sheep, and horses, and chariots, and slaves, and souls of men.

o Rev 18:14 And the fruits that thy soul lusted after are departed from thee, and all things which were dainty and goodly are departed from thee, and thou shalt find them no more at all. o Rev 18:15 The merchants of these things, which were made rich by her, shall stand afar off for the fear of her torment, weeping and wailing, o Rev 18:16 And saying, Alas, alas, that great city, that was clothed in fine linen, and purple, and scarlet, and decked with gold, and precious stones, and pearls! o Rev 18:17 For in one hour so great riches is come to nought. And every shipmaster, and all the company in ships, and sailors, and as many as trade by sea, stood afar off, o Rev 18:18 And cried when they saw the smoke of her burning, saying, What city is like unto this great city! o Rev 18:19 And they cast dust on their heads, and cried, weeping and wailing, saying, Alas, alas, that great city, wherein were made rich all that had ships in the sea by reason of her costliness! for in one hour is she made desolate.

The reaction of the merchants of the earth when they see the destruction of Babylon the Great City is an indication that the city where this UN organization will be located in Babylon the Great City. The merchants of the earth mourn because they lose their ability to buy and sell merchandise with the citys destruction, which would happen if the headquarters of the UN organization that New Age sources claim will control the economic system of the world is destroyed.

Component 2: Politics The Antichrist will be the most powerful political player on the planet. However, he will apparently allow for countries to make their own decisions as long as these decisions are align with his agenda. The United Nations will definitely have a big role in the one-world government

and will be political body that Antichrist will work with.

One-World Government A common belief is that the Antichrist will rule with an iron fist in an authoritarian style dictatorship where everyone will have little choice but to follow his commands lest they risk death. This description of a future government differs completely from the description given by representatives of the forces of darkness. Creme claims a one-world government will not be forced upon people by Maitreya and his other fallen angel counterparts, but will develop as a choice of the world leaders:

.As I understand it, They will not form a world government. World government will come inevitably as a logical result of the acceptance by humanity that it is One, and that realization will grow from the acceptance of the principle of sharing. Sharing is the basis of all change and progress in this coming time..241 241 Creme, Benjamin, .Political Issues-FAQ.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/archives/political/faq_political-issues.htm. 242 Ibid 243 Ibid 244 Bailey and DK claim that they will not impose a .synthetic religion.. However, this is a half-truth because they will give people the option at first to accept the New Age Religion and then kill anyone who refuses it. 245 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 191

Creme also claims that while there will be a one world government each country will still retain a lot of its sovereignty. In fact, he compares the structure of the one-world government to the current structure of the United States where states have sovereignty at a local level, but share power at a national level.

.It should be stressed that world government does not signify a dictatorial, supra-national regime, imposing laws on nations which, willy-nilly, they must obey. It will be the result of a federation of independent states, something like the British Commonwealth or the United States of America. Before the Union, none of the states of America could conceive of giving up autonomy and sovereignty, a condition which is found quite natural now. By the same token, many of the nations today see no possibility of giving up a degree of sovereignty which one day they will accept as perfectly natural to do in the interests of world groupings and world government..242

According to Creme, .Each country will retain its own language, culture, political system, and so on..243 Bailey and Djwhal Khul provide further detail about some of the areas that will remain sovereign to each country:

.The new world order will not impose a uniform type of government, a synthetic religion244 and a system of standardization upon the nations. The sovereign rights of each nation will be recognized and its peculiar genius, individual trends and racial qualities will be permitted full expression. In one particular only should there be an attempt to produce unity, and that will be in the field of education..245

While countries may retain a lot of their sovereignty, it appears that some countries will be under the direct influence of a Master (fallen angel). Creme revealed that some countries will have a Master in a high-level position of power to supervise and influence the activities of the country they are assigned to:

.As I have said, there will be a Master in what one might call a presidential post in certain countries and in these countries you will find, therefore, some aspects of Hierarchical government, perhaps forming a two-tier system with a democratic form of government. One does not preclude the otherBy token of Their experience and Their spiritual achievement, a degree of Hierarchical supervision will be seen to be totally acceptable within a democratic framework..246 246 Creme, Benjamin. .Masters of Wisdom FAQ.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/archives/AgelessWisdom/faq_Masters.htm. 247 Creme, Benjamin, .Political Issues-FAQ.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/archives/political/faq_political-issues.htm. 248 Ibid. 249 Creme, Benjamin. .Economic and Financial Issues FAQ.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/ARCHIVES/economics/faq_economic.htm.

Creme claims that the global political system of the future will be a system never seen before which will combine the best elements of Capitalism and Socialism:

.Maitreya has outlined the concept of a new political system which is neither socialism nor capitalism but a fusion of the best of both. He says you should see politics as a kind of cart, which needs two wheels to go. If it has only one wheel - either socialism or capitalism - it won't go..247

He goes on further to compare the political system that will ultimately take shape around the world to .Democratic Socialism..248

.This system would not be capitalism or communism, but social democracy or democratic socialism with full participation of all peoples in their own government. Housewives, doctors, artists, teachers, etc., would play their full part in government of the people, for the people, by the people - something never achieved before, East or West..249

Finally, Creme provides us a sense of what the New World Order political system will be like when he defined what the Masters (fallen angels) feel is best balance between Capitalism and Socialism: .According to the Masters the best ratio for successful, stable, fair government is: Socialism 70 per cent Capitalism 30 per cent..250 Creme even provided a Capitalist/Socialist breakdown for other major countries as a point of reference, which is shown in the following table 250 Share International Magazine. Nov. 2008. http://www.shareinternational.org/magazine/old_issues/2008/200811.htm. 251 Stockbauer, Bette. .The Future Role of the United Nations.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.share-international.org/ARCHIVES/political/po_bsfuture-UN.htm. 252 Ibid. 253 Creme, Benjamin. .Frequently Asked Questions.. 2 Nov. 2006. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/background/faq/faq_main.htm. Country % Capitalism % Socialism United States 95% 5% United Kingdom, Germany, France 85% 15% Scandinavia

40% 60% New World Order 30% 70%

The Assembly to Rule: The U.N. In the previous section I wrote about how countries would retain a lot of sovereignty at the local level while share power at the global level. In this section I will focus more on how countries will share power at the global level. The main apparatus where countries will share power will be the United Nations: .Maitreya and his group of spiritual co-workers have designed a plan that is brilliant in its simplicity and insight. They visualize a world organization, administered by the United Nations, which will completely restructure our economic systems..251 Maitreya, himself, provides further confirmation that the UN will be the entity that countries will use to deal with global issues: .The United Nations will become the most powerful political force in the world. It will be the agency through which all major international problems will be resolved..252 Creme claims that Maitreya will not .head up. any organization, including the UN. However, whether Maitreya heads up the UN or not may just be semantics. Cremes Master says that Maitreya will be able to influence the UN: .One of his major tasks will be the synthesizing of humanity through the energy of the Avatar of Synthesis and the energies of Aquarius, and through galvanizing the United Nations Assembly, bringing the world together and filling it with a sense of its wholeness..253 This is consistent with Revelation 17 which reveals that the kings of the earth will voluntarily surrender their power and authority to Antichrist.

o Rev 17:3 So he carried me away in the spirit into the wilderness: and I saw a woman sit upon a scarlet coloured beast, full of names of blasphemy, having seven heads and ten horns. o Rev 17:12 And the ten horns which thou sawest are ten kings, which have received no kingdom as yet; but receive power as kings one hour with the beast. o Rev 17:13 These have one mind, and shall give their power and strength unto the beast.

The United Nations of the future will differ from the political body that it is today. According, to Creme, the United Nations of the future will reach its true potential as a global political body when it removes the Security Council: .The first thing to go, I believe, is the Security Council and the veto that goes with it. Then we will have all the nations, the society of nations, the talking-shop of the nations, the United Nations Assembly..254 According to Creme, the remaining United Nations Assembly will become a parliament for the world where countries will gather together to settle their differences and to make global laws: 254 Creme, Benjamin. .Compilation of Comments on World Events by Benjamin Creme in the Year 2005 as Published by Share International Magazine.. May 2005. Last Accessed 6 Jul. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/magazine/old_issues/2005/bc_2005.pdf. 255 Share International Magazine. Sept. 2008. http://www.shareinternational.org/magazine/old_issues/2008/sep_08.htm. 256 Ibid.

.Its future role is to become, not a world government, but the world parliament, where problems can be discussed and resolved peacefully..255

.The United Nations Assembly will come into its own as the international legislative body The United Nations is the blueprint for a future World Government of federated independent states..256

Another way to think of the United Nations Assembly or world parliament is to think of it as the globalized version of the United States Congress. Each of the 50 states possesses their own set of laws, rules, regulations, etc, but they are subject to the laws passed in Congress. The analogy is an apt one to make because the United States has a federal level like the future political system of the future will have. However, it is unclear how members of this world parliament will be selected or how the voting system will work when countries vote on issues.

Component 3: Religion Bailey and Djwhal Khul explain that a one-world religion will emerge at the same time when the UN finally reaches its full potential: .The expressed aims and efforts of the United Nations will be eventually brought to fruition and a new church of God, gathered out of all religions and spiritual groups, will untidily bring to an end the great heresy of separateness..257 As Bailey and Djwhal Khul mentioned in the previous sentence, the one-world religion will indeed be created by combining elements of all the worlds religions into a New Age Religion. In the next chapter I go into detail about the New Age Religion. 257 Bailey, Alice. The Destiny of Nations. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1949. 152 258 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 548 259 Share International Magazine. Sept. 2008. http://www.shareinternational.org/magazine/old_issues/2008/sep_08.htm,

Maintaining the New World Order The UN will be equipped to serve as worlds policeman to maintain .peace. in the New World Order. In fact, according to Bailey and Djwhal Khul, the UN will be allowed to maintain its own nuclear weapon stockpile so it has the capacity to putdown any uprising from any country, nation, political group, or religious group, including the Vatican.258 The cost of surrendering power and resources to the UN to serve as policemen of the world is justified by Cremes Master as being necessary to ensure that all the New World Order programs are implemented and to ensure that .world peace. is achieved.

.The United Nations is slowly coming into its own as the maintainer of peace in the world. At present, it is reluctant to accept the role of world policeman, and governments everywhere balk at the cost involved. But until world peace is assured through sharing and the implementation of justice, such a responsibility must be accepted..259

16. New Age Movement: One World Religion

If one were to correctly combine maps of the Nordic migrations, the Indo-Germanic language areas, the swastika, and other mutualities, and to represent them by millennia and later by centuries, to the extent that research results makes this possible, it might result in a conception of the world that would allow us to understand many things which are not comprehensible today.-Adolf Hitler

Introduction In previous chapters I spoke extensively about Revelation 17. The focus of those chapters about Revelation 17 was on the beast, the Antichrist. However, the identity of the beast is not the only item that is heavily debated by people. The harlot that rides the beast is also heavily discussed by people. The focus of this chapter is to analyze the harlot that rides the beast.

The Great Harlot Recall that the chapter begins with John of Patmos being taken spiritually into the wilderness to view the harlot and the beast she rides on.

o Rev 17:1 And there came one of the seven angels which had the seven vials, and talked with me, saying unto me, Come hither; I will shew unto thee the judgment of the great whore that sitteth upon many waters: o Rev 17:2 With whom the kings of the earth have committed fornication, and the inhabitants of the earth have been made drunk with the wine of her fornication. o Rev 17:3 So he carried me away in the spirit into the wilderness: and I saw a woman sit upon a scarlet coloured beast, full of names of blasphemy, having seven heads and ten horns.

The harlot is identified as .Mystery, Babylon the Great.. The harlot is adorned with all sorts of luxurious items, which is an indication of great wealth.

o Rev 17:4 And the woman was arrayed in purple and scarlet colour, and decked with gold and precious stones and pearls, having a golden cup in her hand full of abominations and filthiness of her fornication: o Rev 17:5 And upon her forehead was a name written, MYSTERY, BABYLON THE GREAT, THE MOTHER OF HARLOTS AND ABOMINATIONS OF THE EARTH.

o Rev 17:6 And I saw the woman drunken with the blood of the saints, and with the blood of the martyrs of Jesus: and when I saw her, I wondered with great admiration.

The word .Mystery. in the title conveys that identifying what Babylon the Great represents needs a spiritual interpretation. There is a widespread consensus that .Babylon the Great, Mother of Harlots. represents a false religious system whose roots originated in ancient Babylon and whose practices also have permeated in other religious systems as Babylon is the mother (the originator) of the abominations of the earth. However, there is disagreement about what religious practices constitute the false religious system. The most popular argument is that the Babylonian religious system is based on Mother Child Worship beginning with Semiramis and Tammuz to the Virgin Mary and Jesus of Nazareth today. However, Revelation 13 tells us that the future, one world religious system involves the worship of Antichrist and the dragon. Therefore, Mother Child Worship cannot be the false religious system that Revelation 17 is alluding to since it will not permeate during the time when the Antichrist will reign. The fact that Revelation 17 mentions Babylon the Greats existence on Earth during the time of the Antichrists reign means that the religion of ancient Babylon will be restored on Earth again during the end times. This leads to three important questions that I will attempt to address in the rest of this chapter:

1. What religious teachings/practices constituted the ancient Babylonian religious system? 2. How have these religious teachings/practices permeated in other false religious systems? 3. What will this false religious system resemble when it is instituted in the future?.

The Origins of the Mystery Religion Recall that Revelation 17 describes Babylon the Great as a one world religion. The global dominance of the ancient Babylonian religion is not unprecedented because it existed as a global religion during the time of the Tower of Babels construction:

"Now the whole earth had one language and few words. And as men migrated from the east, they found a plain in the land of Shinar and settled there. And they said to one another, 'Come, let us make bricks, and burn them thoroughly.' And they had brick for stone, and bitumen for mortar. Then they said, 'Come, let us build ourselves a city, and a

tower with its top in the heavens, and let us make a name for ourselves, lest we be scattered abroad upon the face of the whole earth.' And the LORD came down to see the city and the tower, which the sons of men had built. And the LORD said, 'Behold, they are one people, and they have all one language; and this is only the beginning of what they will do; and nothing that they propose to do will now be impossible for them. Come, let us go down, and there confuse their language, that they may not understand one another's speech. Genesis 11:1-9

The chief deities of the Babylonian religion were Semiramus and Tammuz, who was believed to have been her late husband, Nimrod, reincarnated/reborn as a result of a virgin birth. Semiramus and Tammuz were worshipped by followers of this religion so those who argue that Babylonian the Great represents mother-child worship have some basis for their argument. However, there is much more to the ancient Babylonian religious system than just mother-child worship. The ancient Babylonian religion was .a terrible false religion developed with its sun and moon worship, priests, astrology, demonic worship, worship of stars associated with their gods, idolatry, mysterious rites, human sacrifice, and more..260 260 Taylor, Paul S. .What is the Origin of Easter?. 30 Mar. 2009. Last Accessed 21 Jun. 2009. http://www.christiananswers.net/q-eden/edn-t020 261 Whitcomb, John. .Babel.. Jun. 2002. Last Accessed 21 Jun. 2009. Creation: 24(3): 31-33 http://www.answersingenesis.org/creation/v24/i3/babel.asp The Tower of Babel likely was built for the inhabitants of the earth to aid them in practicing the occult. The original Hebrew indicates that the Tower of Babel was an astrological tool: .But what happens when the Hebrew wording is translated literally? We then have =a tower whose top [is] into heaven. (cf. NKJV). And this is exactly what ancient Mesopotamian ziggurat temple-towers were for! The top compartment represented heaven. The inner walls, in all probability, were decorated with blue glazed tile, with the sun, the moon, and the five known planets (Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter and Saturn) lined up along the plane of the zodiac. In the centre of the room would be their =god seated upon a throne!. 261

The original Hebrew also indicates that mankind could have gain access to hidden knowledge with the help of a completed tower: "Nothing will be restrained from them." The Hebrew word "Batsar" means secrets, mysteries or inaccessible things will no longer be restrained. This can only mean a breach in the space/time continuum. Zamam is used for imagined and means to plot or devise in a negative sense The tower of Babel was actually the pinnacle of occult knowledge. Occult simply means secret knowledge. The tower represents the attempt to reassemble

and maintain the "secret" knowledge which we now can understand as the physics and technology used before the flood. This is logical to see when in the Law, this very act was forbidden..262 262 .The Tower of Babel.. 24 Feb. 2007. Last Accessed 21 Jun. 2009. http://www.echoesofenoch.com/Museum6tower_of_babel.htm. 263 Taylor, Paul S. .What is the Origin of Easter?. 30 Mar. 2009. Last Accessed 21 Jun. 2009. http://www.christiananswers.net/q-eden/edn-t020. 264 Ibid. 265 .General Meaning of the Swastika.. 2005. Last Accessed 21 Jun. 2009. http://swastikainfo.com/en/meaning.php.

The Lord stopped men before they could gain complete access to hidden knowledge. In the process He also facilitated the creation of new cultures and civilizations

The Mystery Religions Legacy When the Lord scattered groups of people throughout the earth they took with them the legacy of the universal religion. As time progressed each groups religious system began to deviate from the original one-world religious system to fit the culture they developed as a result of being geographically removed from other groups. Nevertheless, many common elements of the ancient Babylonian religion remained in groups of people that were scattered around the world. Evidence of how the ancient Babylonian religious system has inspired the practices of other religious systems can be seen by the observations of travelers who lived over two thousand years apart. The Greek historian Herodotus during his travels "witnessed the Mystery religion and its rites in numerous countries and mentions how Babylon was the primeval source from

which ALL systems of idolatry flowed.263 19th Century German author and world traveler Austen Layard wrote .that we have the united testimony of sacred and profane history that idolatry originated in the area of Babylonia - the most ancient of religious systems..264

A Key Symbol: The Swastika One of the most enigmatic symbols in history is the swastika. The swastika is revered as a religious symbol in Buddhism and Hinduism, yet has negative connotations in the West. While the swastika today has negative connotations in the West, it has been a symbol .used for thousands of years already in almost all human civilizations as a sign for good luck, protection, as a materialisation of life and the changing seasons of the year..265 The most infamous users of the swastika were the Nazis; led by Adolf Hitler, who chose the swastika as the symbol of his political party. During a conversation at a museum, Hitler made an enigmatic statement hinting

that one can reach a greater understanding if they look at how the swastika has moved throughout the world through time:

If one were to correctly combine maps of the Nordic migrations, the Indo-Germanic language areas, the swastika, and other mutualities, and to represent them by millennia and later by centuries, to the extent that research results makes this possible, it might result in a conception of the world that would allow us to understand many things which are not comprehensible today.266 266 Hitler, Adolf and Martin Borman. Hitler's Table Talk 1941-1944. trans. Norman Cameron and R.H. Stevenes; London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson. 1973 267 The map was created with the use of a NASA map and information from a website called swastika-info. Here are the links where I got the information to make this map: Link 1 and Link 2.

I believe that Hitler was serious when he said we can gain understanding by tracking the swastika. The following map267 illustrates where the swastika has appeared in civilizations through history.

From this map you can clearly see that the swastika is a symbol that has been widely used on virtually every continent through history. I believe the widespread use of the swastika is proof that there was a one-world religion in the past. How else could people spread throughout the world manage to possess the same symbol with virtually the same meaning over thousands of years unless there was once a time when there was once a single, world religion? The preservation of the swastika over thousands of years also demonstrates that pieces of the mystery religion have been preserved in several groups around the world.

The New Age Religious Synthesis Recall that the New Age is religious movement that is synthesizing all of the worlds religions to create a one-world religious system and government. The New Age Movements attempt to merge the worlds religions to create one universal religion is essentially an attempt by Satan to reassemble the ancient Babylonian mystery religion from all the parts that have been scattered and preserved through history. The religious practices followers of the New Age Movement adhere to are simply the same practices that followers of the ancient Babylon religion followed: .The polytheistic religious of the East and those in =new age/new spirituality beliefs and witchcraft all have a common root source in ancient Babylon and they share the common polytheist and/or pantheist beliefs of the mystery religion that began at Babylon..268 In addition, while I do not agree with a lot of what Texe Marrs teaches, even he found .nearly 30 rituals and beliefs found in ancient Babylon that are practiced today in the New Age Movement! Everything from reincarnation to occult meditation.... 269 268 Koenig, Don. .Mystery Babylon and the Rise of Modern Paganism.. 23 Dec. 2008. Last Accessed 21 Jun. 2009. http://www.thepropheticyears.com/reasons/The%20rise%20of%20paganism.HTM. 269 Keathley, J. Hampton. .The Judgment of Babylon the Great (Rev 17:1-18). 21 Jun. 2009. Last Accessed 21 Jun. 2009. http://www.bible.org/page.php?page_id=1771. 270Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957. 511 271Bailey, Alice. Esoteric Astrology New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1947. 446.

Restoring the Mystery Religion According to Alice Bailey and Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul, Freemasonry currently upholds many elements of the mystery religion in its symbolism and rituals.270 While, they

viewed Masonry in its current state as being .corrupted., they noted that Masonry will later aid the restoration of the mystery religion:

.Masonry - inadequate and corrupt as it has been and guilty of over-emphasizing certain forms of symbols - is nevertheless a germ or seed of the future [satanic] hierarchical effort when that effort is - at some later date - externalized on Earth ------- Masonry is governed by the 7th ray, and when certain important changes have been made and the spirit of Masonry is grasped instead of the letter, then we shall see a new kind of hierarchical endeavor appear to aid in the restoration of the ancient and sacred Mysteries among men..271

The link between the Freemasonry and ancient Babylon is further demonstrated by Freemasons high regard for Nimrod and the Tower of Babel. For instance, .in =The Masonic Quiz Book, the question is asked, =Who was Nimrod, the answer is, =He was the son of Cush. In the old

Constitutions referred to as one of the Founders of Freemasonry, and in the Scriptures as the architect of many cities..272 Similarly .in the Masonic York Rite Manuscript we find: =at the making of the Tower of Babel there was Masonry first much esteemed of, and Nimrod was a Mason himself and loved well Masons..273 Another Masonic author named John Yarker says: "it is well known that the Tower of Babel was one of the most ancient traditions of Masonry.... 274 272 -Brown, William Adrian. Facts, Fables and Fantasies of Freemasonry. 5th ed. St. Joseph: Missouri Lodge of Research. 1993. 169. 273 - T. Lawrence. John. The Perfect Ashlar and Other Masonic Symbols. White Fish: Kessinger Publishing. 1942. 295. 274 Yarker, John. The Arcane Schools. New York: Cosmos Classics. 2007. 267 275 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957. 514 276Ibid. 574 The Antichrist Spirit Maitreya will restore the Mysteries soon after he reveals himself to the world: "...Mysteries will be restored to outer expression through the medium of the Church and the Masonic Fraternity...When the Great One [Maitreya] comes with His disciples and initiates, we shall have the restoration of the Mysteries..." 275 The restoration of the Mysteries by the Antichrist will simultaneously lead the unification of all faiths, which is the objective of the New Age Movement: .He will move to restore the ancient spiritual landmarks, to eliminate that which is non-essential, and to reorganize the entire religious field - again in preparation for the restoration of the Mysteries. These Mysteries, when restored, will unify all faiths..276

Teachings of the New Age Religion

The teachings of the New Age Religion will center on these issues: 1. There is a God 2. A Person is Divine 3. There is Reincarnation 4. Evolution of the Soul 5. The Restoration of the Mysteries 6. Continual Revelation and Appearance of Messengers 7. De-Emphasize Glamour

Self Divinity The New Age Religion will promote the existence of divinity. However, the New Age concept of God is not the same as the Christian concept. The New Age Religion is more aligned

with the Eastern conception of divinity, that is, there is an element of divinity in everyone.277 The New Age Religion will emphasize that the spirit in each person is immortal and individuals will tap into this divinity as time goes on.278 The following passage summarizes these combined teachings: 277 Bailey, Alice. The Reappearance of the Christ. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1948. 144. 278 Ibid. 147 279 Ibid 124 280 Bailey, Alice. Rays & Initiation. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co., 1960. 330.

.His work when He reappears will be to prove the fact of these possibilities and to reveal the true nature and potency of man. The proclamation He made that we were all sons of God and own one universal Father will, in the near future, no longer be regarded as a beautiful, mystical and symbolic statement, but will be regarded as a proved scientific pronouncement. Our universal brotherhood and our essential immortality will be proven to be facts in nature..279

These three teachings about divinity basically retell the same lie that Satan told Eve in the Garden of Eden. .You shall not die-you are a god.:

o Gen 3:4 And the serpent said unto the woman, Ye shall not surely die: o Gen 3:5 For God doth know that in the day ye eat thereof, then your eyes shall be opened, and ye shall be as gods, knowing good and evil.

The Restoration of Mysteries Recall that the Antichrist Spirit Maitreya will restore the Mysteries soon after he reveals

himself to the world. What exactly are the hidden secrets associated with the Mysteries? Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul hinted at some of the Mysteries that will be restored and revealed:

"These ancient Mysteries were originally given to humanity by the Hierarchy and contain the entire clue to the evolutionary process, hidden in numbers, in ritual, in words and in symbology; these veil the secret of mans origin and destiny, picturing to him in rite and ritual, the long, long path which he must tread, back into the light." 280

The Mysteries that will be restored are indeed religious practices that originated in the ancient Babylonian religion. They consist of using numerology, esoteric astrology (which .partakes of principles that were once secret and taught only in the ancient mystery schools. and not the same

type of astrology that is practiced today), occult ritual, occult symbols, and other esoteric practices.281 281 Wilson, Adele. Esoteric Astrology Defined. 1999. Last Accessed 21 Jun. 2009. http://members.citynet.net/worldwonders/astrologyharvest/esoastro.htm 282 Bailey, Alice. The Reappearance of the Christ. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1948. 115 283 Ibid 115. 284 Ibid. 150 285 Ibid 133

Reincarnation Bailey and Djwhal Khul wrote that .The Law of Rebirth., also known as reincarnation, will be taught in the New Age Religion. However, this is not the same form of reincarnation that Eastern Religions have taught.282 The Law of Rebirth will teach that souls move up the evolutionary ladder through time.283

New Revelations through Time The New Age Religion will emphasize that there are continual revelations from messengers that are sent by God: .The great theme of the new world religion will be the recognition of the many divine approaches and the continuity of revelation which each of them conveyed..284 For example, it will be taught that Jesus is one of many messengers sent by God in the past and that Maitreya is the messenger (World Teacher) sent for the New Age.

The Dispelling of Glamour The New Age Religion will encourage people to worry less about material possessions: " initiates must and will inevitably shatter illusion and dispel glamourthe one by the intuitive recognition of reality by minds attuned to it, and the other by the pouring in of the light

of the reason..285

Worship in the New Age Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul and Bailey wrote that the traditional practices of prayer and worship will be replaced by a new form of worship in the New Age Religion. The first element of the New Age worship will be a new type of gathering: .A gathering to invoke light, love and

divine will (power), thus evoking or calling forth from the divinity within and beyond us all the enlightenment, love-wisdom, and power-for-good that this world desperately needs, and for which we all hunger..286 According to Djwhal Khul, the second element of the New Age Religion will be the replacement of prayer with a new type of worship: 286 Carey, Howard Ray. .The Contribution of Religion in the New Age.. 18 Jun. 2006. Last Accessed 21 Jun. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/ARCHIVES/AgelessWisdom/the_joy/10contribution.html. 287 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 415 288 .FAQ Initiation.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 21. Jun. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/archives/AgelessWisdom/faq_initiation.htm.

.The science of invocation and evocation will take the place of what we now call prayer and worship. Be not disturbed by the use of the word "science." It is not the cold and heartless intellectual thing so oft depicted. It is in reality the intelligent Organization of spiritual energy and of the forces of love, and when effective, will evoke the response of spiritual Beings Who can again walk openly among men and thus establish a close relation and a constant communication between humanity and the spiritual Hierarchy..287

Essentially, New Age worship will involve people calling upon spiritual entities (fallen angels and demons) so they can communicate with people and to rely instructions to people. I suspect this type of openness and communication will improve New Age followers and spiritual beings ability to hunt down non-initiates.

The New World Calendar The Bible predicts that the Antichrist will usher in a new calendar system:

o Dan 7:25 And he shall speak great words against the most High, and shall wear out the saints of the most High, and think to change times and laws: and they shall be given into his hand until a time and times and the dividing of time.

This is exactly what those who will implement the New Age Religion plan to do. Holidays like Good Friday and Christmas will be completely banned while monthly New Age festivals will begin to be celebrated worldwide by most people.288 The plan is to have followers celebrate a festival every month with three major spiritual festivals each year. Each festival will occur during the time of a full moon, and each full moon celebration will correspond with a specific phase of the zodiac. The three major spiritual festivals of the New Age religion will be Easter, Wesak, and World Invocation Day:

o Easter: This is considered to be one of the holiest holidays in Christianity commemorating Jesus Christs resurrection from the dead. However, Easters origins are pagan rather than Christian. In fact, the name .Easter. is derived directly from the name .Ishtar., a Babylonian goddess. The holiday originally commemorated .the resurrection of one of their (Babylonians) gods that they called =Tammuz, who was believed to be the only begotten son of the moon-goddess and the sun-god..289 In addition, the customs that most people practice for this holiday also have roots in the original pagan version of this holiday.290 In the New Age Religion Easter will commemorate .resurrection out of matter into Spirit, which makes one a liberated Master..291 289 Meyer, David. The Pagan Origin of Easter. 29 Dec. 2008. Last Accessed 21. Jun. 2009. http://www.lasttrumpetministries.org/tracts/tract1.html. 290 Ibid. 291 .FAQ Initiation.. 15 Oct. 2005. Last Accessed 21. Jun. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/archives/AgelessWisdom/faq_initiation.htm. 292 Bailey, Alice. The Reappearance of the Christ. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1948. 155 293 Bailey, Alice. The Reappearance of the Christ. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1948. 156

o Wesak: This is top holiday of Buddhism because followers consider this to be the birthday of Buddha. For New Agers this is a festival where spiritual energy is sent from the Shamballa (the new age spiritual center) throughout the earth.

o Festival of Goodwill: This is a festival dedicated to the reappearance of Maiterya. On this day the New Age followers from around the world get together to meditate and to recite the Great Invocation which is a prayer created by fallen angel DK to call on Maitreya to come. According to Djwhal Khul, this day will be .a day whereon the spiritual and divine nature of mankind will be recognized..292

Although the festivals outside the major three festivals are considered lesser ones, they still will have a place in the New Age Religion: .The remaining full moons will constitute lesser festivals but will be recognized to be also of vital importance. They will establish the divine attributes in the consciousness of man, just as the major festivals establish the three divine aspects..293

Idol Worship Revelation 13:14-15 tells us that the False Prophet will require people to make images of the Antichrist to worship.

o Rev 13:14 And deceiveth them that dwell on the earth by the means of those miracles which he had power to do in the sight of the beast; saying to them that dwell on the earth, that they should make an image to the beast, which had the wound by a sword, and did live. o Rev 13:15 And he had power to give life unto the image of the beast, that the image of the beast should both speak, and cause that as many as would not worship the image of the beast should be killed.

Benjamin Creme falsely claims that Maitreya will not be a religious figure who will be the object of worship. Instead, Creme and other New Age writers present Maitreya as a benevolent teacher who will shun the worship of the masses. In fact, Creme quotes Maitreya claiming that he does not want to be worshipped and wants to be regarded as being on the same level as the people of Earth: .He has said: Do not worship Me. If you worship Me you are putting yourself below Me, whereas you are on the same level..294 This is simply a lie given by Maitreya and the forces of darkness. The Book of Revelation and 2 Thessalonians make it clear that Antichrist will demand the world to worship him. 294 Creme, Benjamin. .FAQ Matireyas Teachings.. 18 Jun. 2006 Last Accessed 23 Jun. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/archives/M_teachings/faq_M_teachings.htm

o Rev 13:4 And they worshipped the dragon which gave power unto the beast: and they worshipped the beast, saying, Who is like unto the beast? who is able to make war with him?

o 2Th 2:3 Let no man deceive you by any means: for that day shall not come, except there come a falling away first, and that man of sin be revealed, the son of perdition; o 2Th 2:4 Who opposeth and exalteth himself above all that is called God, or that is

worshipped; so that he as God sitteth in the temple of God, shewing himself that he is God.

The likely reason Maitreya denies that he will ask the world to worship him is that it would be too obvious to people that he was trying to replace the Lord as the figure of worship if he said, .I will command you to worship me.. This would make it a lot more obvious that he is the Antichrist. He will continue to tell this lie until he shows his true colors when he desecrates the Temple in Jerusalem.

Initiation and the Mark of the Beast Recall that the False Prophet will force followers of the New Age Religion to get a special mark on their right hand or forehead. Without this mark a person will not be permitted to conduct any transactions.

o Rev 13:16 And he causeth all, both small and great, rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their right hand, or in their foreheads: o Rev 13:17 And that no man might buy or sell, save he that had the mark, or the name of the beast, or the number of his name. o Rev 13:18 Here is wisdom. Let him that hath understanding count the number of the beast: for it is the number of a man; and his number is Six hundred threescore and six.

New Age sources provide us with clues about what process people will need to undergo in order to receive the infamous mark of the beast. These sources indicate that people will need to participate in a special initiation process which will stealthily link their loyalty to Satan before they can receive the mark. According to Bailey and Djwhal Khul, this initiation process will be part of the restoration of Mysteries.295 According to Creme, the initiation process will be based on the process used by secret societies like the Freemasons: "Through the MASONIC tradition and certain esoteric groups will come the process of INITIATION. In this coming age millions of people will take the first and second initiation through these transformed and purified institutions." 296 The purpose of the ceremony is to make each initiate realize their supposed divinity within them.297 Barbara Marx Hubbard, one of the leading New Age writers, confirms that each initiate will receive an easily visible mark at this ceremony: .Each shall be sealed with the seal of the living God. This means that they shall be marked, visibly identified, first to themselves, then to others. This means that their inner eye in the forehead will be fully opened by this touch, henceforth awakening them from the womb of self-centeredness..298 295 Bailey, Alice. Esoteric Psychology. Vol. II, New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1942. 656-657. 296 Creme, Benjamin. The Reappearance of the Christ and the Masters of Wisdom. 2nd Ed. Los Angeles: Tara Center. 1980. 84

297 Bailey, Alice. Rays & Initiation. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co., 1960. 7980. 298 Hubbard, Barbara Marx. The Revelation: A Message of Hope for the New Millennium. Mill Valey: Nataraj Publishing. 1995. 149 299 Spangler, David. Reflections of the Christ. Forres: Findhorn Foundation. 1977. 45 300 Bailey, Alice. Rays & Initiation. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co., 1960. 80 The New Age initiation process is clearly evil since the mark of the beast is going to be given at it. This conclusion is confirmed by the highest level New Age writers. David Spangler reveals that this initiation can be called the .Luciferic Initiation.: .(He is) the great initiator.... Lucifer works within each of us to bring us to wholeness, and as we move into a New Age ... each of us in some way is brought to that point which I term the Luciferic Initiation ... for it is an initiation into the New Age..299 Bailey and Djwhal Khul provide further confirmation that this initiation is evil since the process causes initiates to experience and express 666: .In an ancient book on numbers the INITIATE is defined as 'the one who has experienced and expressed 666 and found it naught; who has dropped the 6 and become the 66, and thus found himself on the Way; later, again, he drops the 6 and becomes the PERFECTED 6-FORM, the instrument and expression of spirit..300

The initiation ceremonies will take place at Masonic buildings and churches buildings where people will be initiated into the .new universal religion..301 Many have speculated about what the mark of the beast will look like. I will not speculate about what I think the mark of the beast will look like at this point because I am not completely sure what it will resemble. We do know from Revelation 13 that the mark will have either the name of the Antichrist or the number that represents his name: 666. 301 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust Publishing Co. 1957 513 302 Another indication of the ancient city of Babylon is not Babylon the Great appears in description of its destruction in Revelation 18. Revelation 18:17 and 18:18 indicate that sailors will be able to see the smoke coming from the city on the horizon after it is destroyed. The ancient city of Babylon is several hundred miles from the coast, so it cannot be the city described.

Babylon the Great City While the harlot is named after a false religious system it also represents a city. In fact, this city will literally be the capital of the world because it rules over leaders of all other countries.

o Rev 17:18 And the woman which thou sawest is that great city, which reigneth over the kings of the earth.

There are three traditional candidates for this great city: Babylon, Rome, and Jerusalem. Since the identity of this great city is .Mystery Babylon the Great. a non-literal interpretation is needed to identify the exact city. Therefore, Babylon, the ancient city in Iraq, is unlikely the city that Revelation is referring to.302 Rome is also unlikely to be the great city because the Bible

never refers to Rome as a .great city.. Instead, the Bible refers to only Nineveh, Tyre, and Jerusalem as a .great city.. Therefore, Rome is also unlikely the great city that Revelation is referring to. I believe that Jerusalem is most likely Babylon the Great city. First, Jerusalem is the only geographic location identified as .the great city. in the Book of Revelation. Revelation 11 gives Jerusalem, the city where the Lord was crucified, the same title given to Babylon the Great in Revelation 17: .the great city..

Rev 11:7 And when they shall have finished their testimony, the beast that ascendeth out of the bottomless pit shall make war against them, and shall overcome them, and kill them. Rev 11:8 And their dead bodies shall lie in the street of the great city, which spiritually is called Sodom and Egypt, where also our Lord was crucified.

Rev 17:18 And the woman which thou sawest is that great city, which reigneth over the kings of the earth.

Additional evidence that Jerusalem is the .the great city. or capital city of the world referred to in Revelation 17 can be found in the prophetic verses of Daniel. Daniel 11:44-45 reveals that Antichrist will set up his .palace tents. or home in the holy mountain, Mount Zion, which is located in Jerusalem.

o Dan 11:44 But tidings out of the east and out of the north shall trouble him: therefore he shall go forth with great fury to destroy, and utterly to make away many. o Dan 11:45 And he shall plant the tabernacles of his palace between the seas in the glorious holy mountain; yet he shall come to his end, and none shall help him.

Finally, the imagery in Revelation 17 reinforces the argument that Jerusalem will be the capital city of the world. In Revelation 17:3 and 17:7 we find that the woman rides the beast, that is, the

womans power is dependent on the support of the beast:

o Rev 17:3 So he carried me away in the spirit into the wilderness: and I saw a woman sit upon a scarlet coloured beast, full of names of blasphemy, having seven heads and ten horns. o Rev 17:7 And the angel said unto me, Wherefore didst thou marvel? I will tell thee the mystery of the woman, and of the beast that carrieth her, which hath the seven heads and ten horns.

Jerusalem is this type of city because the Antichrists own headquarters will be established in the city. The Antichrist will declare himself to be God from the Temple of Jerusalem.

o 2Th 2:3 Let no man deceive you by any means: for that day shall not come, except there come a falling away first, and that man of sin be revealed, the son of perdition; o 2Th 2:4 Who opposeth and exalteth himself above all that is called God, or that is worshipped; so that he as God sitteth in the temple of God, shewing himself that he is God.

The Two Witnesses To counter the propagation of the New Age Religion, God will assign two individuals to provide testimony in the city of Jerusalem (the city where the Lord was crucified in Rev 11:8) at the halfway point of the 70th Week of Daniel. The two individuals will provide their testimony until the end of the 70th Week of Daniel.

o Rev 11:3 And I will give power unto my two witnesses, and they shall prophesy a thousand two hundred and threescore days, clothed in sackcloth. o Rev 11:4 These are the two olive trees, and the two candlesticks standing before the God of the earth.

During the 1260 days these two individuals give their testimony they will essentially be invincible. Anyone who tries to harm them will die.

o Rev 11:5 And if any man will hurt them, fire proceedeth out of their mouth, and devoureth their enemies: and if any man will hurt them, he must in this manner be killed. o Rev 11:6 These have power to shut heaven, that it rain not in the days of their prophecy: and have power over waters to turn them to blood, and to smite the earth with all plagues, as often as they will.

The Identity of these Individuals There has been debate among people in regards to the identity of these two individuals. There seems to be a consensus that the Prophet Elijah will be one of the two individuals. God promised in Malachi 4:5-6 that He will send Elijah to perform work before the coming of the Day of the Lord, or the Wrath of God.

o Mal 4:5 Behold, I am sending you Elijah the prophet before the coming of the great and dreadful day of Jehovah. o Mal 4:6 And he shall turn the heart of the fathers to the sons, and the heart of the sons to their fathers, that I not come and strike the earth with utter destruction.

The heart of the debate rests with the identity of the second individual. Some people believe that the second individual will be Enoch because he was taken up to Heaven like Elijah was. However, the biblical evidence supports the identification of the second individual as Moses!

There are two passages that strongly support the identification of the second individual as Moses. First, Jude mentions that Satan and the Archangel Michael had a battle over the body of Moses.

o Jud 1:9 Yet Michael the archangel, when contending with the devil he disputed about the body of Moses, durst not bring against him a railing accusation, but said, The Lord rebuke thee.

As mentioned earlier in the book, a resurrected body is a spiritual body. The battle between Satan and Michael was over a physical body. This implies that there was a strong demand for Mosess physical body likely because it is going to be used again when Moses returns to Earth as one of the Two Witnesses. Finally, Moses and Elijah appeared together when Christ was transfigured.

o Mat 17:1 And after six days Jesus taketh Peter, James, and John his brother, and bringeth them up into an high mountain apart, o Mat 17:2 And was transfigured before them: and his face did shine as the sun, and his raiment was white as the light. o Mat 17:3 And, behold, there appeared unto them Moses and Elias talking with him.

The appearance of Moses and Elijah with a transfigured Jesus complies with description of the Two Witnesses standing before God in Revelation 11:4.

17. The Great Tribulation All who seek right human relations will be gathered automatically to Him [Antichrist]those who embody the spirit of exclusiveness and separateness will stand automatically and equally revealed and all men will know them for what they are Benjamin Creme

Introduction After the Antichrist ends the daily sacrifice in the Third Temple and reveals his true identity to the world, people will be amazed to see a man who they thought was dead somehow brought back to life. Many people in Israel will be caught off guard when Antichrist performs these prophesized tasks and will be unsure what to do next. However, a small group of people will have heeded Christs call to flee as soon as they see Antichrist desecrate the Third Temple.

o Mat 24:15 When ye therefore shall see the abomination of desolation, spoken of by Daniel the prophet, stand in the holy place, (whoso readeth, let him understand:) o Mat 24:16 Then let them which be in Judaea flee into the mountains: o Mat 24:17 Let him which is on the housetop not come down to take any thing out of his house: o Mat 24:18 Neither let him which is in the field return back to take his clothes. o Mat 24:19 And woe unto them that are with child, and to them that give suck in those days! o Mat 24:20 But pray ye that your flight be not in the winter, neither on the sabbath day:

In addition, a group of Jews who are unaware of Christs call to flee will instinctively flee to a wilderness region in Southern Jordan where they will remain protected from the remainder of the 70th Week of Daniel.

o Rev 12:6 And the woman fled into the wilderness, where she hath a place prepared of God, that they should feed her there a thousand two hundred and threescore days.

Christ warned people to flee following Antichrists desecration of the temple because an unprecedented period of Great Tribulation will commence next.

o Mat 24:21 For then shall be great tribulation, such as was not since the beginning of the world to this time, no, nor ever shall be.

The first act of persecution during the Great Tribulation will involve Satan (via Antichrist) ordering a major attack against the Jews that fled into the wilderness. However, the attack fails with help of some divine intervention.

o Rev 12:15 And the serpent cast out of his mouth water as a flood after the woman, that he might cause her to be carried away of the flood. o Rev 12:16 And the earth helped the woman, and the earth opened her mouth, and swallowed up the flood which the dragon cast out of his mouth.

Satan will be enraged that he missed his opportunity to wipe out the Jews who fled to the wilderness and will seek instead to annihilate anyone who is related to the woman, that is, those who .keep the commandments of God, and have the testimony of Jesus Christ..

o Rev 12:17 And the dragon was wroth with the woman, and went to make war with the remnant of her seed, which keep the commandments of God, and have the testimony of Jesus Christ.

The purpose of this chapter is to describe the severity of the persecution that non-initiates will endure during this time of Great Tribulation.

Persecution of Non-Initiates

The possession of the mark of the beast-the mark from the mandatory New Age initiation ceremony will be the distinguishing factor that will determine who belongs in the New Age and who does not belong. People who refuse to accept the mark will be demonized as those who .embody the spirit of exclusiveness and separateness.:

"The sword which He wields is the sword of the Spirit; it is that sword which produces cleavage between a true spirituality and an habitual materialism. All who seek right human relations will be gathered automatically to Him, whether they are in one of the great world religions or not; all who see no true or basic difference between religion and religion or between man and man or nation and nation will rally around Him; those who

embody the spirit of exclusiveness and separateness will stand automatically and equally revealed and all men will know them for what they are.. 303 303 .Right Human Relations.. 19 Oct. 2007. Last Accessed 21 Jun. 2009. http://bailey.spiritguide.net/right_human_relations.html. 304 Van Kampen, Robert Van. The Sign (Updated Edition). Wheaton: Crossway Books, 1999: 267 305 .Glossary of Esoteric Terms.. 19 Jun. 2006. Last Accessed 21 Jun. 2009. http://www.shareinternational.org/background/glossary/g_main.htm.

Those who refuse to take the initiation will be killed by a variety of ways after the opening of the 3rd and 4th Seal. Non-initiates will be systematically eliminated by governments, die from inability to buy food, from natural death, and by the .wild beasts of the earth..

o Rev 6:7 And when he had opened the fourth seal, I heard the voice of the fourth beast say, Come and see. o Rev 6:8 And I looked, and behold a pale horse: and his name that sat on him was Death, and Hell followed with him. And power was given unto them over the fourth part of the earth, to kill with sword, and with hunger, and with death, and with the beasts of the earth.

.Wild beasts of the earth. is an intriguing phrase at first glance it appears that wild, vicious animals will kill believers. However, a reexamination of the text indicates that animals are not the ones who will kill believers. According to the late Robert Van Kampen death .=by the wild beasts of the earth, will be the death associated with ones refusal to worship the image of the

beast (=that the image of the beast might even speak and cause as many as do not worship the image of the beast to be killed [Rev. 13:15]), or the beast himself (=And it was given to him to make war with the saints {Rev. 13:7]), as required by the second beast (=And he exercises all the authority of the first beast in his presence: {Rev. 13:12])..304 In other words, death by the wild beasts of the earth means that people will be killed by those who are guided by the Antichrist and the False Prophet. One major reason there will be so many people willing to help the Antichrist and the False Prophet kill non-initiates is that people may become demon possessed after undergoing the initiation ceremony. Benjamin Cremes official website, described the completion of obtaining a higher level of initiation as taking another step towards greater ability to do work to fulfill the plan, or in other words, an increase in the degree of demonic possession: .Each stage confers on the initiate a deeper understanding of the meaning and purpose of God's Plan, a fuller awareness of his/her part in that Plan, and an increasing ability to work consciously and intelligently towards its fulfillment..305

Numerous Traps I believe the close interaction between humans and fallen angels will make life very difficult for anyone who resists the Antichrist during the Great Tribulation. I suspect that many fallen angels will take on human form so they will be able to interact with people without causing a great scare. The need for fallen angels to adopt human form will be even more necessary if they go as far as marrying women or even having children with women as some Bible commentators claim. With fallen angels adopting human form, it will be dangerous for a person who opposes the Antichrist to interact with any other person because they may be unknowingly communicating with a fallen angel who has the capacity to spy on them and/or kill them on the spot. For instance, a young woman at this dangerous period of time might meet handsome, young man that she takes a liking to and invites him to meet her family, who opposes the Antichrist. The young woman, who is unlikely to ever read a chapter like this, will be completely unaware that the man she invited to visit her family could be a fallen angel who has taken on human form. The young woman will unknowingly place her family in great danger since the forces of evil may have an opportunity to learn that this womans family opposes the Antichrist.

False Christs and False Prophets The forces of evil will try to fool people who are undecided about undergoing the New Age initiation ceremony and taking the mark of the beast by using false christs and false prophets

o Mat 24:11 And many false prophets shall rise, and shall deceive many. o Mat 24:24 For there shall arise false Christs, and false prophets, and shall shew great signs and wonders; insomuch that, if it were possible, they shall deceive the very elect.

o Mat 24:25 Behold, I have told you before.

I would not be surprised that the false prophets and false christs that Jesus predicts will arise are fallen angels posing as prophets and messianic figures to fool people of all religions who oppose the Antichrist. In addition, the false christs and false prophets will be utilize to draw people out of hiding to trap them.

o Mat 24:26 Wherefore if they shall say unto you, Behold, he is in the desert; go not forth: behold, he is in the secret chambers; believe it not. o Mat 24:27 For as the lightning cometh out of the east, and shineth even unto the west; so shall also the coming of the Son of man be.

Dangerous Idols and Images Recall that the False Prophet will require people to make idols and images of the Antichrist to worship.

o Rev 13:14 And deceiveth them that dwell on the earth by the means of those miracles which he had power to do in the sight of the beast; saying to them that dwell on the earth, that they should make an image to the beast, which had the wound by a sword, and did live. o Rev 13:15 And he had power to give life unto the image of the beast, that the image of the beast should both speak, and cause that as many as would not worship the image of the beast should be killed.

The late Robert Van Kampen believed that the idols are far more dangerous than what most Christians anticipate. The reason for this is that the original Greek indicates that the images of the beast may be filled with demons:

.The meaning of this passage, then, is that after the world is commanded to build its own =images or idols of Antichrist, some form of spirit or life will be put within these =images, so =that the image of the beast might even speak and cause as many as do not worship the image of the beast to be killed (Rev. 13:15)! 306 306Kampen, Robert Van. The Sign. (Updated Edition). Wheaton: Crossway Books, 1999: 239

The presence of spirits or demons in the idols and images of the Antichrist will essentially create a global security and monitoring network. The spirit or demon in each image or idol will help the forces of evil track the whereabouts of followers of the New Age religion and noninitiates.

A typical spirit or demon will not have the physical capacity to kill a non-initiate themselves since they will be confined to the item they inhabit, but they can facilitate a persons death with their ability to alert someone who does have that capacity. Since each spirit or demon is confined to the idol or image they inhabit it is possible to avoid being tracked by just avoiding them. The problem is that there will be billions of idols or images of the Antichrist around the world so it will be difficult to stay clear of them.

At Least 25% Will Die Revelation 6:8 makes it clear that 25% of the worlds population will be eliminated during the hunt for and extermination of people who refuse to be initiated into the New Age Religion before the opening of the 5th Seal.

o Rev 6:8 And I looked, and behold a pale horse: and his name that sat on him was Death, and Hell followed with him. And power was given unto them over the fourth part of the earth, to kill with sword, and with hunger, and with death, and with the beasts of the earth.

The prevalence of Death will not be limited to just a specific geographic area covering one fourth of the earth because Antichrist at this point in the seven year period will reign the entire Earth. Therefore, the persecution of non-initiates will be worldwide.

o Dan 7:23 Thus he said, The fourth beast shall be the fourth kingdom upon earth, which shall be diverse from all kingdoms, and shall devour the whole earth, and shall tread it down, and break it in pieces.

The persecution will be so far reaching that family members and close friends before the Great Tribulation will betray each other.

o Luk 21:16 And ye shall be betrayed both by parents, and brethren, and kinsfolks, and friends; and some of you shall they cause to be put to death.

However, the suffering for non-initiates will not end after 25% of the worlds population is killed. One of the key topics that I address in the next chapter is what else non-initiates must endure before end of the Great Tribulation.

18. Rapture Warning "The people who leave the planet during the time of Earth changes do not fit in here any longer, and they are stopping the harmony of Earth. When the time comes that perhaps 20 million people leave the planet at one time there will be a tremendous shift in consciousness for those who are remaining."

Barbara Marciniak, New Age Channeler

Introduction In the previous chapter I mentioned that non-initiates living under the New World Order will be persecuted for their reluctance to adopt the New Age religious practices. However, I did not directly mention whether Christians would make up a large part of the group of noninitiates. The reason I did not do this is that the topic of the Rapture needs to be discussed before answering whether Christians will or will not make up a large part of this group. Although the word .Rapture. is never mentioned in the Bible, it is one of the most important and most talked about end-times concepts. The Rapture is an event where Jesus Christ shall descend from heaven on a cloud and rescue His Church before the Wrath of God arrives. The Rapture is a controversial topic because not everyone agrees about when it will occur or whether it will even occur at all. I will highlight the major viewpoints concerning the Rapture that exist today and provide a simplified overview of the position I believe best fits the details given in the Bible.

Rapture Positions Here is a brief overview of the major viewpoints concerning the Rapture that exist in case the reader is unfamiliar with them.

No Rapture Some people believe that there will be no Rapture. They claim that there is no biblical basis to support the idea that Jesus will return to gather His Elect and to take them away. Some Rapture opponents even go as far as to claim that those who teach the Rapture are false prophets and teachers, including the Apostle Paul. This position is very radical and does not have a strong biblical basis.

Pre Tribulation Rapture The Pre-Tribulation (Pre-Trib) Rapture viewpoint rests on the idea that the Church will be rescued from the upcoming wrath and will not have to endure any persecution.307 This viewpoint by far dominates the thinking of nearly all prominent self-proclaimed prophecy experts. As a consequence, the Pre-Trib viewpoint is primarily Rapture position that is taught in churches. 307 See appendix for a discussion of some verses Pre-Tribulation Rapture proponents claim support their argument The Pre-Tribulation Rapture viewpoint apparently originated with a vision that a 15 year old girl named Margaret MacDonald had in 1830. MacDonald claimed she had a vision where she envisioned the Jesuss 2nd coming. The following quote describes the very moment in MacDonalds vision where saw Jesus appear:

"I saw the error to be, that men think that it will be something seen by the natural eye; but 'tis spiritual discernment that is needed, the eye of God in his people be filled with the Spirit.' This was the oil the wise virgins took in their vessels - this is the light to be kept burning - the light of God - that we may discern that which cometh not with observation to the natural eye. Only those who have the light of God within them will see the sign of his appearance. No need to follow them who say, see here, or see there, for his day shall be as the lightning to those in whom the living Christ is. 'Tis Christ in us that will lift us up - he is the light - 'tis only those that are alive in him that will be caught up to meet him in the air."

The idea that only certain people will be able to see Jesus coming completely goes against what is taught in the Bible. The Bible explains that everyone, including the wicked, will see Jesus when He returns to Earth at the time of the Rapture:

o Mat 24:30 And then shall appear the sign of the Son of man in heaven: and then shall all the tribes of the earth mourn, and they shall see the Son of man coming in the clouds of heaven with power and great glory.

o Rev 6:15 And the kings of the earth, and the great men, and the rich men, and the chief captains, and the mighty men, and every bondman, and every free man, hid themselves in the dens and in the rocks of the mountains;

o Rev 6:16 And said to the mountains and rocks, Fall on us, and hide us from the face of him that sitteth on the throne, and from the wrath of the Lamb:

In addition, according to Ed Tarkowski, the details from the above passage of MacDonalds vision expose this vision as a non-biblical one:

.Macdonald's symbolization of the Holy Spirit as "the eye of God in his people" and "the light to be kept burning - the light of God" resembles the occultic concept of the Third Eye. The Third Eye is said to be located between the two physical eyes and is called the Agni Point, after Lord Agni, the fire god represented by lightning. New Agers believe that through this Point, cosmic fire and light enter the person during meditation and visualization, and bring an inner transformation to initiates and the needed wisdom to understand God's teachings..308 308 Tarkowski, Ed. .History: The Pretribulational Parousia of Margaret McDonald.. 27 Apr. 2009. Last Accessed 18 Jun. 2009. http://www.preteristarchive.com/dEmEnTiA/1996_tarkowski_margaretmacdonald.html. 309 MacPherson, Dave. .Deceiving and Being Deceived.. 18 Jun. 2007 Last Accessed 18 Jun. 2009. http://www.truthkeepers.com/deceivin.htm. 310Ibid.

The detail that MacDonald provided at the moment when Jesus supposedly appeared in her vision combined with the New Age imaginary is a strong sign that this vision is a demonicallyarranged deception. How could MacDonald know what the real Jesus looked like when she had never seen him in person? The .Jesus. that MacDonald probably saw was the New Age counterfeit of Jesus, Jesus Sananda Immanuel, whose image is on all religious artwork throughout history. After MacDonalds vision, a man named John Darby visited MacDonald to discuss her

vision. At that time Darby held onto the belief that the Church would face the Antichrist.309 MacDonalds erroneous vision shaped the Rapture viewpoint of Darby, who became the most prominent person in the 19th century to teach the idea that Christians would not see the Antichrist (several people dispute this statement-primarily out of self interest-, but the man who supports this statement has all the evidence on his side).310 Darbys teachings deeply influenced a man named C.I. Scofield, who included Darbys teachings about the Rapture in the notes of his Bible. The Scofield Reference Bible became the most widely read Bible in the world, and, therefore, the largest and most influential propagator of the Pre-Tribulation Rapture position over the past hundred years. Even if we do not consider the apparent demonic origins of the Pre-Tribulation Rapture position, the viewpoint is incorrect based on its own scriptural merits. First, let us be clear that

the Pre-Trib position is correct when stating that the Church will avoid at least some sort of wrath because that is supported by scripture:

o 1Th 1:9 For they themselves shew of us what manner of entering in we had unto you, and how ye turned to God from idols to serve the living and true God; o 1Th 1:10 And to wait for his Son from heaven, whom he raised from the dead, even Jesus, which delivered us from the wrath to come.

o 1Th 5:9 For God hath not appointed us to wrath, but to obtain salvation by our Lord Jesus Christ,

The main problem with the Pre-Trib position (and other Rapture positions) is that it assumes that there is only one type of wrath, the Wrath of God. The fact is that there are two types of wraths: the Wrath of Satan through Antichrist and the Wrath of God through trumpets and bowls. The Pre-Trib position fails to make this subtle, yet vitally important distinction.

The Wrath of Satan Very few prophecy students realize that there is a Wrath of Satan in addition to a Wrath of God. The Wrath of Satan is only mentioned once directly in the entire Bible: Revelation 12. Satan will be furious when he is cast to the earth nearly halfway through the 70th Week of Daniel

o Rev 12:12 Therefore rejoice, ye heavens, and ye that dwell in them. Woe to the inhabiters of the earth and of the sea! for the devil is come down unto you, having great wrath, because he knoweth that he hath but a short time.

Satan will be full of great wrath as he takes out his frustrations on the inhabitants of the earth. Satan will give 110% effort towards seeking vengeance because he does not have much time to execute vengeance. The notion that the Church will be spared from persecution is absurd and goes against what is taught in the Bible. In fact, 2 Timothy Chapter 3 says that all Christians will be persecuted, including in the end times.

o 2Ti 3:1 This know also, that in the last days perilous times shall come. o 2Ti 3:2 For men shall be lovers of their own selves, covetous, boasters, proud, blasphemers, disobedient to parents, unthankful, unholy, o 2Ti 3:3 Without natural affection, trucebreakers, false accusers, incontinent, fierce, despisers of those that are good, o 2Ti 3:4 Traitors, heady, highminded, lovers of pleasures more than lovers of God; o 2Ti 3:5 Having a form of godliness, but denying the power thereof: from such turn away. o 2Ti 3:10 But thou hast fully known my doctrine, manner of life, purpose, faith, longsuffering, charity, patience, o 2Ti 3:11 Persecutions, afflictions, which came unto me at Antioch, at Iconium, at Lystra; what persecutions I endured: but out of them all the Lord delivered me. o 2Ti 3:12 Yea, and all that will live godly in Christ Jesus shall suffer persecution. o 2Ti 3:13 But evil men and seducers shall wax worse and worse, deceiving, and being deceived. o 2Ti 3:14 But continue thou in the things which thou hast learned and hast been assured of, knowing of whom thou hast learned them;

Revelation 13:10 and Revelation 16:6 provide further confirmation that the believers will be persecuted and even killed!

o Rev 13:10 He that leadeth into captivity shall go into captivity: he that killeth with the sword must be killed with the sword. Here is the patience and the faith of the saints.

o Rev 16:6 For they have shed the blood of saints and prophets, and thou hast given them blood to drink; for they are worthy.

Mid-Tribulation Rapture People who uphold the Mid-Tribulation (Mid-Trib) Rapture viewpoint believe the Rapture will take place when the Antichrist reveals his true identity halfway through a seven year period. Those who believe in this viewpoint believe the Wrath of God will begin immediately after the Antichrist reveals himself and establishes his earthly kingdom. The major verse that Mid-Trib supporters cite is Daniel 7:25 where it says that the Antichrist will supposedly have access to the saints for a 3 and year period.

o Dan 7:25 And he shall speak great words against the most High, and shall wear out the saints of the most High, and think to change times and laws: and they shall be given into his hand until a time and times and the dividing of time.

The Mid-Trib position is flawed because the Wrath of Satan-not the Wrath of God-will begin 3 and years through the seven year period when Antichrist will desecrate a Temple in Jerusalem (Dan 9:27, Mat 24:15-21). Another major problem for the Mid-Trib position is that it sets an exact time for the Rapture to occur (when Antichrist reveals his true identity) which Jesus said cannot be known:

o Mat 24:42 Watch therefore: for ye know not what hour your Lord doth come.

o Mat 25:13 Watch therefore, for ye know neither the day nor the hour wherein the Son of man cometh.

Post-Tribulation Rapture The Post-Tribulation (Post-Trib) Rapture position posits that the Rapture will not occur until after a seven year tribulation period. While this position acknowledges that the Church will be persecuted by the Antichrist, it overstates how long the Church will face the persecution of the Antichrist. In fact, the Post-Trib position has the Church enduring the Wrath of God and the Wrath of Satan. Remember, 1 Thessalonians 1:9-10 and 5:9 both say that the Church will not endure the Wrath of God.

Pre-Wrath Rapture The newest Rapture viewpoint is the Pre-Wrath Rapture. The Pre-wrath Rapture view posits that the Rapture will take place after the Wrath of Satan (the Great Tribulation) is finished and before the Wrath of God begins. This distinction between the Wrath of Satan and the Wrath

of God really distinguishes the Pre-Wrath Rapture viewpoint from the others as the others state that there is a 7 year tribulation period. The Pre-Wrath viewpoint emphasizes that there is a brief tribulation period within 2nd half of a seven year period. The Pre-Wrath Rapture viewpoint is a descendant of a viewpoint that was held by most of the Church from its inception up until the time that the Pre-Tribulation Rapture viewpoint became popular.311 The following section is an explanation of the logic of the Pre-Wrath Rapture, which is the Rapture position I support because of its strong biblical basis. 311 Charpie, Elbert. .How New is the Pre-Wrath View?. 27 Nov 2008. Last Accessed 19 Jun. 2009. http://prewrathministries.org/faq/index.php?action=artikel&cat=1&id=2&artlang=en.

The Pre-Wrath Logic Here is my relatively brief explanation of the line of reasoning behind the Pre-Wrath view on the timing of the Rapture. There are much longer works that outline the logic of the PreWrath Rapture position than mine so if you are interested in learning more about the logic of this position you can consult these books or visit the following websites:

. The Sign (Updated Edition) by Robert Van Kampen . The Pre-Wrath Rapture of the Church by Marv Rosenthal . http://www.prewrathrapture.com/ . http://prewrathministries.org/

Matthew 24 Applies to Everyone Matthew 24 is one of the most important end times-related chapters in the entire Bible. I consider the chapter to be a broad outline of several chapters from the Book of Revelation. Many of those who defend the Pre-Trib position state that Matthew 24 is only aimed at the Jews; not at the Church. This teaching is completely wrong. First, the Book of Matthew is the only book of the four gospels that refers to the Church by name (ekklesia).312 In addition, Jesus spoke to His disciples, who were eventually known as Christians, on Mount Olives. If Jesuss intent was to warn Jews than why would He tell his message on Mount Olives to Christians? Here is a step by step demonstration that Matthew 24 is addressed to Christians: 312 Penner, Todd C. and Luke Timothy Johnson. The Writings of the New Testament. Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 2002: 187.

1. Jesus had twelve disciples:

o Mat 10:1 And when he had called unto him his twelve disciples, he gave them power against unclean spirits, to cast them out, and to heal all manner of sickness and all manner of disease. o Mat 10:2 Now the names of the twelve apostles are these; The first, Simon, who is called Peter, and Andrew his brother; James the son of Zebedee, and John his brother; o Mat 10:3 Philip, and Bartholomew; Thomas, and Matthew the publican; James the son of Alphaeus, and Lebbaeus, whose surname was Thaddaeus; o Mat 10:4 Simon the Canaanite, and Judas Iscariot, who also betrayed him.

2. These same disciples are the ones Jesus is addressing on Mount Olives.

o Mat 24:1 And Jesus went out, and departed from the temple: and his disciples came to him for to shew him the buildings of the temple.

3. The title Disciples is later equated with the title Christians; therefore Jesus.s message is targeted towards the followers of Christ (Christians).

o Act 11:26 And when he had found him, he brought him unto Antioch. And it came to pass, that a whole year they assembled themselves with the church, and taught much people. And the disciples were called Christians first in Antioch.

Matthew 24 Analysis After demonstrating that Matthew 24 applies to Christians, it is time to analyze the chapter. The chapter begins with Jesuss disciples asking him about what will occur at the end of the age:

o Mat 24:3 And as he sat upon the mount of Olives, the disciples came unto him privately, saying, Tell us, when shall these things be? and what shall be the sign of thy coming, and of the end of the world?

The End is Not Yet Jesus warned His disciples that people will see many startling events, including false

Christs, wars, rumors of war, ethnic infighting, famines, pestilence, earthquakes, etc. However, people should not be startled because the end of the age is not yet-this is just the beginning.

o Mat 24:4 And Jesus answered and said unto them, Take heed that no man deceive you. o Mat 24:5 For many shall come in my name, saying, I am Christ; and shall deceive many. o Mat 24:6 And ye shall hear of wars and rumours of wars: see that ye be not troubled: for all these things must come to pass, but the end is not yet. o Mat 24:7 For nation shall rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom: and there shall be famines, and pestilences, and earthquakes, in divers places. o Mat 24:8 All these are the beginning of sorrows.

Matthew 24:9 begins a description of events that will happen at the end of the age. Jesus reveals that people will persecute .you.-Christians and go as far as to kill you! How can the Church

already experience the Rapture if people who believe in Jesus are still being killed!? In verse 24:13 Jesus most likely told believers to endure because the oncoming persecution will be fierce.

o Mat 24:9 Then shall they deliver you up to be afflicted, and shall kill you: and ye shall be hated of all nations for my name's sake. o Mat 24:10 And then shall many be offended, and shall betray one another, and shall hate one another. o Mat 24:13 But he that shall endure unto the end, the same shall be saved.

The Start of the Great Tribulation As mentioned in the previous chapter, the Antichrists desecration of a rebuilt Temple in Jerusalem halfway through Daniels 70th Week or 3.5 years through the seven year period (Dan 9:26) and the revealing of his true identity will trigger the Great Tribulation. However, the fact that the Antichrist needs to desecrate the Temple first shows that the tribulation period is not seven years long like those who uphold other Rapture positions believe.313 313 Similarly, Paul writes in 2 Thessalonians Chapter 2 that the Jesus cannot return at least until after Antichrist sits on the throne of the temple declaring himself to be god. 314 Revelation 14:12 proves that .saints. and those who uphold .testimony of Jesus Christ. are the same group of people: Rev 14:12 Here is the patience of the saints; here are they that keep the commands of God, and the faith of Jesus.

o Mat 24:15 When ye therefore shall see the abomination of desolation, spoken of by Daniel the prophet, stand in the holy place, (whoso readeth, let him understand:) o Mat 24:16 Then let them which be in Judaea flee into the mountains: o Mat 24:21 For then shall be great tribulation, such as was not since the beginning of the world to this time, no, nor ever shall be.

The Great Tribulation is a period of time when Jews and Christians will be severely persecuted for their religious beliefs. Revelation 12, Revelation 13, and Daniel 7 describe this period as a time when Satan (via Antichrist) will make war with believers. Revelation 13:7 and Daniel 7:21 even go as far as to say that Antichrist will be able to .overcome. saints (or those who uphold .the testimony of Jesus Christ.314).

o Rev 12:17 And the dragon was wroth with the woman, and went to make war with the remnant of her seed, which keep the commandments of God, and have the testimony of Jesus Christ.

o Rev 13:5 And there was given unto him a mouth speaking great things and blasphemies; and power was given unto him to continue forty and two months. o Rev 13:6 And he opened his mouth in blasphemy against God, to blaspheme his name, and his tabernacle, and them that dwell in heaven. o Rev 13:7 And it was given unto him to make war with the saints, and to overcome them: and power was given him over all kindreds, and tongues, and nations.

o Dan 7:21 I beheld, and the same horn made war with the saints, and prevailed against them;

4th Seal: Annihilation As explained in the previous chapter, the time following the breaking of the 4th seal is a period of time where non-initiates will die via systematic mass murder, lack of food, natural causes, and through death by the hands of .wild beasts..

o Rev 6:7 And when he had opened the fourth seal, I heard the voice of the fourth beast say, Come and see. o Rev 6:8 And I looked, and behold a pale horse: and his name that sat on him was Death, and Hell followed with him. And power was given unto them over the fourth part of the earth, to kill with sword, and with hunger, and with death, and with the beasts of the earth.

The riders name is .Death. with .Hell. following behind him. These two are a tandem because they appear in the Bible together with Death in the front and Hell (.grave. in the Old Testament) following close behind.

o Isa 28:15 Because ye have said, We have made a covenant with death, and with hell are we at agreement; when the overflowing scourge shall pass through, it shall not come unto us: for we have made lies our refuge, and under falsehood have we hid ourselves:

o Hos 13:14 I will ransom them from the power of the grave; I will redeem them from death: O death, I will be thy plagues; O grave, I will be thy destruction: repentance shall be hid from mine eyes.

Death is pretty self explanatory so there is no need for me to provide commentary on it. In contrast, the term .Hell. is a little misunderstood. There are two different Greek words that translate to the word .Hell. in New Testament of the King James Version of the Bible. The first word is .geenna. which is a place of torment while the other word is .Hades. which is a place where the dead (good and bad) are housed (I will use the term .Hell/Hades. when referring to the place where the dead are housed throughout the rest of the chapter).315 The word Greek word for .Hell. used throughout the Book of Revelation is .Hades. so the references to .Hell. in the Book of Revelation are actually referring to the place where the dead are housed and not the place of torment. As people die, Hell/Hades will follow because it is the next to lay claim to someone after death. Death must latch onto someone before Hell/Hades can take the persons soul and house it temporarily. 315 For more read http://www.biblequestions.org/archives/BQAR162.htm.

5th Seal: Martyrs After the 5th Seal is opened the souls of believers who have been killed during the Antichrists war against the saints will be seen through an altar in Heaven. This may cause someone to ask: .If souls can be seen from Heaven, does this mean that the souls are in Heaven and therefore the Rapture has already taken place?.

o Rev 6:9 And when he had opened the fifth seal, I saw under the altar the souls of them that were slain for the word of God, and for the testimony which they held: o Rev 6:10 And they cried with a loud voice, saying, How long, O Lord, holy and true, dost thou not judge and avenge our blood on them that dwell on the earth? o Rev 6:11 And white robes were given unto every one of them; and it was said unto them,

that they should rest yet for a little season, until their fellow servants also and their brethren, that should be killed as they were, should be fulfilled.

Even though Hell/Hades is a place to house souls, it is not a permanent storage place as souls are able to leave Hell/Hades before the final judgment. For instance, Christ left the place when He was resurrected (.Hades. is the Greek word used in Acts 2:31 instead of .geenna.).

o Act 2:31 He seeing this before spake of the resurrection of Christ, that his soul was not left in hell, neither his flesh did see corruption.

In Revelation 6:9 the souls of those killed are not encompassing Heaven like in Revelation 7:910. Since they can only be seen, there is the possibility that they may not be in Heaven at all, but somewhere else.

Rev 6:9 And when he had opened the fifth seal, I saw under the altar the souls of them that were slain for the word of God, and for the testimony which they held:

Rev 7:9 After this I beheld, and, lo, a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and people, and tongues, stood before the throne, and before the Lamb, clothed with white robes, and palms in their hands; Rev 7:10 And cried with a loud voice, saying, Salvation to our God which sitteth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb.

These verses harmonized with the verses from the discussion about the 4th Seal reveal that the souls are actually in Hell/Hades until the Rapture. Revelation 6:11 also indicates that the souls are resting in a temporary place, Hell/Hades, until the appropriate number of martyrs is reached.

o Rev 6:11 And white robes were given unto every one of them; and it was said unto them, that they should rest yet for a little season, until their fellowservants also and their brethren, that should be killed as they were, should be fulfilled.

Therefore, the altar in Heaven serves as a window into viewing Hell/Hades after the breaking of the 5th Seal. Even after the opening of the 5th Seal, the number of those who are destined to end up in Heaven, but die beforehand, will not have been reached yet as some of these people remain alive on Earth. If the Rapture had occurred earlier everyone would have been in Heaven like in Revelation 7:9. Matthew 24:22 reconfirms that Christians will still be on the earth for these horrible days. The Church is not yet safe in Heaven; they are being persecuted! Nevertheless, the promise of the Rapture still exists as the persecution continues. Jesus will end the Great Tribulation and rescue the Church before there are no believers left alive.

o Mat 24:22 And except those days should be shortened, there should no flesh be saved: but for the elect's sake those days shall be shortened.

o Mat 24:27 For as the lightning cometh out of the east, and shineth even unto the west; so shall also the coming of the Son of man be.

6th Seal: The Rapture Approaches There is a strong parallel between the description of events after the breaking of the 6th Seal in Revelation 6:12-17 and the description of Christs appearance in Matthew 24:29 onwards.

Rev 6:12 And I beheld when he had opened the sixth seal, and, lo, there was a great earthquake; and the sun became black as sackcloth of hair, and the moon became as blood; Rev 6:13 And the stars of heaven fell unto the earth, even as a fig tree casteth her untimely figs, when she is shaken of a mighty wind. Rev 6:14 And the heaven departed as a scroll when it is rolled together; and every mountain and island were moved out of their places. Rev 6:15 And the kings of the earth, and the great men, and the rich men, and the chief captains, and the mighty men, and every bondman, and every free man, hid themselves in the dens and in the rocks of the mountains; Rev 6:16 And said to the mountains and rocks, Fall on us, and hide us from the face of him that sitteth on the throne, and from the wrath of the Lamb: Rev 6:17 For the great day of his wrath is come; and who shall be able to stand? Mat 24:29 Immediately after the tribulation of those days shall the sun be darkened, and the moon shall not give

her light, and the stars shall fall from heaven, and the powers of the heavens shall be shaken: Mat 24:30 And then shall appear the sign of the Son of man in heaven: and then shall all the tribes of the earth mourn, and they shall see the Son of man coming in the clouds of heaven with power and great glory. Mat 24:31 And he shall send his angels with a great sound of a trumpet, and they shall gather together his elect from the four winds, from one end of heaven to the other.

Both passages describe a time when the moon and sun will be darkened with the heavens completely shaken. Both passages also acknowledge the presence of the returning Jesus Christ. Therefore, Revelation 6:12-17 and Matthew 24:29 onwards must be describing the same period of time! The Rapture takes place soon after the breaking of the 6th Seal! In addition, Matthew 24:29-30 says that Christs coming will occur .immediately after the tribulation. so the Great Tribulation is cut short and ends at the breaking of the 6th Seal!

There is a second account of the Rapture in Revelation 14:12-16. The passage opens recognizing the noble sacrifice that many believers made to stay true to their belief in Jesus. This is clearly a reference to the many Christians who will sacrifice themselves rather than submit to Antichrist.

o Rev 14:12 Here is the patience of the saints: here are they that keep the commandments of God, and the faith of Jesus. o Rev 14:13 And I heard a voice from heaven saying unto me, Write, Blessed are the dead which die in the Lord from henceforth: Yea, saith the Spirit, that they may rest from their labours; and their works do follow them.

The proof that this passage is also an account of the Rapture comes in Revelation 14:14 where Jesus Christ appears on a white cloud. This is same imaginary given in Matthew 24:30. Revelation 14:14 makes it clear that verses 12-16 is referring to the Rapture because it describes the Son of Man appearing on a cloud like in Matthew 24:30.

Rev 14:14 And I looked, and behold a white cloud, and upon the cloud one sat like unto the Son of man, having on his head a golden crown, and in his hand a sharp sickle. Mat 24:30 And then shall appear the sign of the Son of man in heaven: and then shall all the tribes of the earth mourn, and they shall see the Son of man coming in the clouds of heaven with power and great glory.

The analogy used in Revelation 14:12-16 to describe the Rapture process is a harvest.

o Rev 14:15 And another angel came out of the temple, crying with a loud voice to him that sat on the cloud, Thrust in thy sickle, and reap: for the time is come for thee to reap; for the harvest of the earth is ripe. o Rev 14:16 And he that sat on the cloud thrust in his sickle on the earth; and the earth was reaped.

The main tool used to harvest the earth is the sickle. This is important because the prophet Joel also described the conditions following the breaking of the 6th Seal where the sun and moon are darkened and also mentioned the use of a sickle

Rev 6:12 And I beheld when he had opened the sixth seal, and, lo, there was a great earthquake; and the sun became black as sackcloth of hair, and the moon became as blood;

Joe 3:13 Put ye in the sickle, for the harvest is ripe: come, get you down; for the press is full, the fats overflow; for their wickedness is great. Joe 3:14 Multitudes, multitudes in the valley of decision: for the day of the LORD is near in the valley of decision. Joe 3:15 The sun and the moon shall be darkened, and the stars shall withdraw their shining.

Together, Matthew 24:30, Revelation 14:15, and Joel 3:13-15 reconfirm what we knew when comparing Matthew 24 and Revelation 6; that the Rapture will take place after the breaking of

the 6th Seal. Finally, recall that Pre-Trib Rapture proponents believe that the Church will not experience any wrath. In contrast, Pre-Wrath Rapture proponents believe that the wrath that the Church will not go through is the Wrath of God. Joel 3:13-15 and Revelation 6:17 mention that the Day of the Lords great wrath or Wrath of God316 is imminent after the sun and moon are darkened and after the harvest of the earth. 316 Isaiah 13:6-9 demonstrates that the Day of the Lord is synonymous with Wrath of God because the terms are used interchangeably.

Rev 6:15 And the kings of the earth, and the great men, and the rich men, and the chief captains, and the mighty men, and every bondman, and every free man, hid themselves in the dens and in the rocks of the mountains; Rev 6:16 And said to the mountains and rocks, Fall on us, and hide us from the face of him that sitteth on the throne, and from the wrath of the Lamb: Rev 6:17 For the great day of his wrath is come; and who shall be able to stand? Joe 3:13 Put ye in the sickle, for the harvest is ripe: come, get you down; for the press is full, the fats overflow; for their wickedness is great. Joe 3:14 Multitudes, multitudes in the valley of decision: for the day of the LORD is near in the valley of decision. Joe 3:15 The sun and the moon shall be darkened, and the stars shall withdraw their shining.

Therefore, we have confirmation that the Wrath of God is not going to occur until after the Rapture following the breaking the 6th Seal (and 7th Seal). Once again, the Pre-Wrath Rapture logic is supported by verses throughout the Bible. When Christ appears the dead will rise first followed by those who survived the persecution of the Great Tribulation.

o 1Th 4:16 For the Lord himself shall descend from heaven with a shout, with the voice of the archangel, and with the trump of God: and the dead in Christ shall rise first: o 1Th 4:17 Then we which are alive and remain shall be caught up together with them in the clouds, to meet the Lord in the air: and so shall we ever be with the Lord.

In Revelation 7:9-10, all the souls of those released from Hell/Hades, and rescued (caught up) are joined in Heaven. You can clearly see how they encompass Heaven unlike in Revelation 6:9-11

Rev 6:9 And when he had opened the fifth seal, I saw under the altar the souls of them that were slain for the word of God, and for the testimony which they held:

Rev 7:9 After this I beheld, and, lo, a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and people, and tongues, stood before the throne, and before the Lamb, clothed with white robes, and palms in their hands; Rev 7:10 And cried with a loud voice, saying, Salvation to our God which sitteth

upon the throne, and unto the Lamb.

New Age Viewpoint of the Rapture At the beginning of this chapter I mentioned that the Rapture is one of the most talked about end-time events; particularly among Christians. However, not many people realize that the Rapture is a topic that is also discussed by followers of the New Age. In the previous section I demonstrated with the use of Bible verses that the Rapture will occur before the Wrath of God begins after the breaking of the 6th Seal. I believe it is useful to look at how high-level New Age teachers and fallen angels depict the Rapture timeline to see if there are similarities in the details. The presence of similarities between a biblically-based viewpoint (the Pre-Wrath position) and a New Age viewpoint would provide further confirmation that Christians and Jews will endure persecution because it will be the followers of the New Age religion that will be the ones persecuting them during the Great Tribulation.

According to Christian author Constance Cumbey, fallen angels have already prepared New Age Movement followers to anticipate the removal of those who refuse to take part in a New World Order to another dimension:

.The threat is contained in several places in the Alice Bailey writings and reiterated in the David Spangler writings, which state that those of us who refuse to accept the "Christ" will be sent to another dimension other than physical incarnation, out of physical embodiment, to another level of vibration where we will be happier!. 317 317 Cumbey, Constance. The Hidden Dangers of the Rainbow. Lafayette: Huntington House Publishers. 1985: 69 318 .The Rapture According to New Age Channelers.. 23 Aug. 2007. Last Accessed 18 Jun. 2009. http://www.jesus-is-savior.com/False%20Religions/New%20Age/newage-rapture.htm. 319 Marciniak, Barbara. Bringers of the Dawn: Teachings from the Pleiadians. Rochester: Bear & Company, 1992: 167

Unsurprisingly, New Age followers are taught that there will be global cleansing of those who will not submit to Antichrist. Recall that following the 4th Seal at least of Earths population will die as a result of widespread killing through a variety of methods. A fallen angel named .Asher. told New Age author John Randolph Price .that two billion people who didn't go along with the New Age would be wiped off the face of the Earth during the coming cleansing.318 While there is talk within New Age circles about cleansing the earth of billions of people who will not belong, there is also talk of a one-time, sudden disappearance of a large group of people who will not belong. For instance, New Age author and channeler Barbara Marciniak was told by fallen angels (posing as aliens) that 20 million people, the approximate number of people on Earth who will not belong at that time, will vanish, and the sudden disappearance of

these people will cause a major shift in global awareness.

"The people who leave the planet during the time of Earth changes do not fit in here any longer, and they are stopping the harmony of Earth. When the time comes that perhaps 20 million people leave the planet at one time there will be a tremendous shift in consciousness for those who are remaining." 319

New Age leaders plan to tell the masses that no one should mourn for these people because they have gone to a better place:

"Many of these beings who are leaving this planet at this time have completed that which they came to do. It is a time of great rejoicing for them. Do not feel sad about their leaving. They are going home. Many are waiting to be with them again... Many beings must move on, for their thought patterns are of the past. They hold on to these thoughts that keep Earth held back." 320 320 Kay Wheeler, "The Time Is Now, " Connecting Link Magazine, Issue 23, cited in Missler and Eastman, p. 189.

I think the disappearance that Marcinak wrote about is the Rapture because she notes the sudden disappearance of 20 million people. A simultaneous disappearance of 20 million people cannot be a result of a cleansing action because it takes a while to kill that many people. In addition, 20 million is a small group of people when you compare it with the 2 billion people that Asher claims will be eliminated during the global cleansing action. Jesus said that if He did not cut the length of the Great Tribulation short there would be no one left. 20 million is only 1% of 2 billion so a 1% survival rate during the Great Tribulation is consistent with idea that there would hardly be anyone left when Jesus returns to Rapture the Church. However, I am not claiming that 20 million people will be taken up during Rapture. I am just using Marcinaks words to show that New Age followers are being told to expect a simultaneous disappearance of a large number of people. The tremendous shift in consciousness linked to the sudden disappearance of a large group of people conforms to the reaction described by people on Earth at the time of the Rapture. However, Marcinaks statement is ambiguous since she does not indicate whether this shift in consciousness is a positive event for New Age followers or a negative event. Revelation 6 indicates that the .tremendous shift in consciousness. will be very bad news for New Age followers as they realize that they are in big trouble.

o Rev 6:15 And the kings of the earth, and the great men, and the rich men, and the chief captains, and the mighty men, and every bondman, and every free man, hid themselves in the dens and in the rocks of the mountains; o Rev 6:16 And said to the mountains and rocks, Fall on us, and hide us from the face of him that sitteth on the throne, and from the wrath of the Lamb: o Rev 6:17 For the great day of his wrath is come; and who shall be able to stand?

The New Age viewpoint of the Rapture timeline confirms that people will face severe persecution for not submitting to the Antichrist and this persecution will be so severe and widespread that a relatively small number of Bible believers will remain when it ends. The New Age viewpoint of the Rapture timeline also confirms that the Rapture will come as there will be a

sizable group of people that will suddenly disappear from the earth. Finally, we have evidence that those in charge of the persecutions are prepared to try to justify the killing of over 25% of the worlds population and prepared to explain the sudden disappearance of a sizeable group of people.

The Aftermath of the Rapture One little known event that will happen during Christs Rapture appearance is that the Antichrists power will be severely weakened. There are two distinct descriptions of a weakening of the Antichrist in 2 Thessalonians 2:8, including the final destruction of him. The Greek word for .Consume. can also be translated to mean .slay.. The appearance when Jesus will slay the Antichrist will be the Battle of Armageddon. The Greek word for .destroy. can also be translated to mean .paralyzed..321 Antichrist will be .paralyzed. by the appearance of Christ 321 Van Kampen, Robert Van. The Sign (Updated Edition). Wheaton: Crossway Books, 1999: 358

o 2Th 2:8 And then shall that Wicked be revealed, whom the Lord shall consume with the spirit of his mouth, and shall destroy with the brightness of his coming:

The coming where Christ will paralyze Antichrist is the Rapture because the Antichrist cannot be eliminated at the time of the Rapture. A paralyzed Antichrist will not unable to respond to the deterioration and destruction of his empire, which will begin shortly after this event.

Appendix

Key Pre-Tribulation Verses Pre-Tribulation Rapture teachers point to specific verses in the Bible that they claim support the notion that Christians will not see wrath. One of the key passages PreTribulation Rapture supporters point to is the message given to the Church of Philadelphia in Revelation 3. The message promises those who keep the Word of God and remain patient will be kept .from the hour of temptation. or the hour of testing.

o Rev 3:7 And to the angel of the church in Philadelphia write; These things saith he that is holy, he that is true, he that hath the key of David, he that openeth, and no man shutteth; and shutteth, and no man openeth; o Rev 3:8 I know thy works: behold, I have set before thee an open door, and no man can shut it: for thou hast a little strength, and hast kept my word, and hast not denied my name. o Rev 3:9 Behold, I will make them of the synagogue of Satan, which say they are Jews, and are not, but do lie; behold, I will make them to come and worship before thy feet, and to know that I have loved thee. o Rev 3:10 Because thou hast kept the word of my patience, I also will keep thee from the hour of temptation, which shall come upon all the world, to try them that dwell upon the earth. o Rev 3:11 Behold, I come quickly: hold that fast which thou hast, that no man take thy crown.

Pre-Tribulation Rapture supporters claim that this is a promise to keep the Church out of the tribulation period, which they incorrectly teach is seven years long. However, according to the late Robert Van Kampen, this is not the message what the text is communicating: .=Keep in this context, translates a Greek verb that carries the basic idea of protection while within a sphere of danger, and .from., a bad translation of the Greek word ek, has the basic meaning of deliverance =out of or =out from within this dangerous time..322 In other words, faithful believers will be given a degree of divine protection from the dangers that exist in .the hour of testing. or the Great Tribulation. Another key passage many Pre-Tribulation Rapture supporters point to is Revelation 4:1. 322Ibid. 34

o Rev 4:1 After this I looked, and, behold, a door was opened in heaven: and the first voice which I heard was as it were of a trumpet talking with me; which said, Come up hither, and I will shew thee things which must be hereafter.

The general Pre-Tribulation supporter interpretation of Revelation 4:1 is that the verse is a call for the Church to go up in Heaven. I strongly disagree with this interpretation because the call to go up to Heaven is being given to just John so that he can record the scene in Heaven. Notice that John refers to himself in first person, John is the one that hears the voice, and that the voice is speaking directly to John.

The Counterfeit Rapture Theory A small minority of Christians believe that Satan will instigate a .counterfeit Rapture. to throw millions of Christians into complete disarray. These Christians cite statements made by fallen angels, including the Jesus Sananda Immanuel, telling their followers that they will soon perform a mass evacuation of them. According to these fallen angels, the mass evacuation of their followers will occur in three phases over the course of 15 minutes.323 Here is an example of one of the messages that counterfeit Rapture theory supporters cite: 323 Tuella. .Book 1: Project Evacuation.. 13 Mar. 2009. Last Accessed 18 Jun. 2009. http://www.thenewearth.org/ASHTAR1ProjectWorldEvacuation.html. 324 Ibid

"The Great Evacuation will come upon the world very suddenly. The flash of emergency events will be as a lightning that flashes in the sky. So sudden and so quick in its happening that it is over almost before you are aware if its presenceOur rescue ships will be able to come in close enough in the twinkling of an eye to set the lifting beams in operation in a moment. And all over the globe where events warrant it, this will be the method of evacuation. Mankind will be lifted, levitated shall we say, by the beams from our smaller ships. These smaller craft will in turn taxi the persons to the larger ships overhead, higher in the atmosphere, where there is ample space and quarters and supplies for millions of people."324

Skeptics like Harry Walther argue that a counterfeit Rapture is unlikely to happen because it would lead to the biggest revival of Christianity in world history. I believe the exact opposite would occur because this event would be the biggest letdown in history. Millions of people with the false hope that they would be spared from enduring the Great Tribulation would be devastated to find that they were left behind; forced to endure the Great Tribulation. This would result in a complete loss of confidence in church leadership because people would perceive that they led them astray and that they are no longer credible religious teachers or advisors since they were also left behind. Without .credible. church leadership, Christians

would be left to fend for themselves, and many Christians would likely .fall away. without leadership. Here are four types of Christians that I believe would exist in a post-fake rapture world:

. Compromisers: Some Christians will begin to follow a corrupted New Age version of Christianity since it was apparently these teachings that got some people .raptured..

. Quitters: Some Christians will simply denounce their beliefs because they will feel that there is no hope for them since they believe they have already missed the Rapture.

. Faithful: Some Christians will hold out hope that Christ will still save them when He returns to Earth as some Pre-Tribulation teachers teach that Christians can still be saved even though they missed the Rapture when Christ physically returns to Earth.

. Unshaken: Finally, some Christians will not be affected by a counterfeit Rapture because they know what conditions must take place prior to the Rapture and they know that Satan is going to throw all sorts of lying signs and wonders at people.

The first two groups will most likely fall prey to Antichrist. The final two groups are not out of the woods because Satan will attempt to deceive them and to cause them to turn their allegiance over to Antichrist by utilizing a fake Jesus, Jesus Sananda Immanuel. At this time I cannot say with 100% certainty whether a counterfeit Rapture will happen. I would not be surprised at all if something like this occurred because so many Christians falsely believe that they could disappear at any moment. However, I wonder if there is an even more effective way for Satan to shake the faith of Christians than to stage a counterfeit Rapture. At this moment, I think it is best to acknowledge the possibility of a counterfeit Rapture and mentally prepare oneself for such an event just in case something like this happens.

19. After the Rapture

Introduction Although the emphasis of my book is informing you about what has happened in the past and what you will face leading up to the Rapture, it is still important to be cognizant of what will occur after the Rapture. Gods plan does not end with the rescue of His Church during the Rapture as He still has a very important group of people to save: the Jews. In this chapter I provide a brief overview of the major events that will occur following the Rapture through eternity.

The 144,000 Following the Rapture and just before the beginning of the Wrath of God, the Day of the Lord, 144,000 Jews will receive the seal of God on their foreheads. Each tribe of Israel will have 12,000 unsaved representatives as these Jews remain on Earth following the Rapture.

o Rev 7:1 And after these things I saw four angels standing on the four corners of the earth, holding the four winds of the earth, that the wind should not blow on the earth, nor on the sea, nor on any tree. o Rev 7:2 And I saw another angel ascending from the east, having the seal of the living God: and he cried with a loud voice to the four angels, to whom it was given to hurt the earth and the sea, o Rev 7:3 Saying, Hurt not the earth, neither the sea, nor the trees, till we have sealed the servants of our God in their foreheads. o Rev 7:4 And I heard the number of them which were sealed: and there were sealed an hundred and forty and four thousand of all the tribes of the children of Israel.

The purpose of the 144,000 is to serve as the first group of Jews saved during the postRapture time period.

o Rev 14:3 And they sung as it were a new song before the throne, and before the four beasts, and the elders: and no man could learn that song but the hundred and forty and four thousand, which were redeemed from the earth. o Rev 14:4 These are they which were not defiled with women; for they are virgins. These are they which follow the Lamb whithersoever he goeth. These were redeemed from among men, being the firstfruits unto God and to the Lamb.

The 7th Seal and the 7 Trumpets After the 7th Seal is opened there is a half hour of silence in Heaven. Following the half hour of silence the Wrath of God begins with seven angels holding seven trumpets appearing before God.

o Rev 8:1 And when he had opened the seventh seal, there was silence in heaven about the space of half an hour. o Rev 8:2 And I saw the seven angels which stood before God; and to them were given seven trumpets.

All seven trumpets are not blown simultaneously. Instead one trumpet is blown followed by a period of time before the next trumpet is blown. After a trumpet is blown a judgment from God will come upon the earth and will prevail until the next trumpet is blown. The trumpet judgments will be horrifying to endure and many people will die from them (except for the 5 months following the sounding of the 5th Trumpet where strange locust creatures will be instructed to torment people, but not kill them).

Some Jews Fight Back The trumpet judgments are not the only problem a severely weakened Antichrist will face. Some Jews will begin to resist the Antichrist via guerilla warfare in the wilderness areas of Israel during the 2nd half of the 70th Week of Daniel. In fact, there are two passages in the Book of Zechariah that indicate there will be a Jewish resistance that will battle Antichrists forces and drive them back to Jerusalem.

o Zec 12:6 In that day will I make the governors of Judah like an hearth of fire among the

wood, and like a torch of fire in a sheaf; and they shall devour all the people round about, on the right hand and on the left: and Jerusalem shall be inhabited again in her own place, even in Jerusalem.

o Zec 14:14 And Judah also shall fight at Jerusalem; and the wealth of all the heathen round about shall be gathered together, gold, and silver, and apparel, in great abundance.

The Two Witnesses Die and Rise At the end of the 70th Week of Daniel, Antichrist and his forces will summon enough strength to kill the Two Witnesses. The death of the Two Witnesses will be a cause of great celebration for those who are followers of the Antichrist because these two individuals punished the inhabitants of Earth for their conduct.

o Rev 11:7 And when they shall have finished their testimony, the beast that ascendeth out of the bottomless pit shall make war against them, and shall overcome them, and kill them. o Rev 11:8 And their dead bodies shall lie in the street of the great city, which spiritually is called Sodom and Egypt, where also our Lord was crucified. o Rev 11:9 And they of the people and kindreds and tongues and nations shall see their dead bodies three days and an half, and shall not suffer their dead bodies to be put in graves. o Rev 11:10 And they that dwell upon the earth shall rejoice over them, and make merry, and shall send gifts one to another; because these two prophets tormented them that dwelt on the earth.

However, three days later the Two Witnesses will rise from the dead and ascend to Heaven to the chagrin of all those who celebrated these mens death.

o Rev 11:11 And after three days and an half the Spirit of life from God entered into them, and they stood upon their feet; and great fear fell upon them which saw them. o Rev 11:12 And they heard a great voice from heaven saying unto them, Come up hither. And they ascended up to heaven in a cloud; and their enemies beheld them. o Rev 11:13 And the same hour was there a great earthquake, and the tenth part of the city fell, and in the earthquake were slain of men seven thousand: and the remnant were affrighted, and gave glory to the God of heaven.

Saving the Jews Despite the existence of a Jewish resistance, many Jews will still die during the 2nd half of the 70th week of Daniel. My current research is indicating that Antichrist may have a concentration camp system in the Middle East that is similar to the system used during the time of the Third Reich. The apparent purpose of this massive hardship is to bring the Jews to the breaking point where they will call upon God to save them after many years of not looking to Him. At the end of the 70th Week of Daniel, Jesus will return to Earth on a quest to gather His people who have been scattered all over the place. He will eventually gather His people who

have been scattered to Jerusalem. In Jerusalem the Jews will finally recognize Jesus Christ as their Messiah and lament how He was treated during His first coming.

o Zec 12:10 And I will pour upon the house of David, and upon the inhabitants of Jerusalem, the spirit of grace and of supplications: and they shall look upon me whom they have pierced, and they shall mourn for him, as one mourneth for his only son, and shall be in bitterness for him, as one that is in bitterness for his firstborn. o Zec 12:11 In that day shall there be a great mourning in Jerusalem, as the mourning of Hadadrimmon in the valley of Megiddon. o Zec 12:12 And the land shall mourn, every family apart; the family of the house of David apart, and their wives apart; the family of the house of Nathan apart, and their wives apart; o Zec 12:13 The family of the house of Levi apart, and their wives apart; the family of Shimei apart, and their wives apart; o Zec 12:14 All the families that remain, every family apart, and their wives apart.

The Jews will finally become saved, and after being saved they will flee for safety as the final part of the Wrath of God will shortly arrive.

o Joe 2:32 And it shall come to pass, that whosoever shall call on the name of the LORD shall be delivered: for in mount Zion and in Jerusalem shall be deliverance, as the LORD hath said, and in the remnant whom the LORD shall call.

o Zec 14:3 Then shall the LORD go forth, and fight against those nations, as when he fought in the day of battle. o Zec 14:4 And his feet shall stand in that day upon the mount of Olives, which is before

Jerusalem on the east, and the mount of Olives shall cleave in the midst thereof toward the east and toward the west, and there shall be a very great valley; and half of the mountain shall remove toward the north, and half of it toward the south. o Zec 14:5 And ye shall flee to the valley of the mountains; for the valley of the mountains shall reach unto Azal: yea, ye shall flee, like as ye fled from before the earthquake in the days of Uzziah king of Judah: and the LORD my God shall come, and all the saints with thee.

The Judgment of the Elect Every person will face judgment one day for what they did, including those who are in the elect.

o 2Co 5:10 For we all must appear before the judgment seat of Christ, so that each one may receive the things done through the body, according to what he did, whether good or bad.

The judgment for the elect will occur following the blowing of the 7th Trumpet.

o Rev 11:15 And the seventh angel sounded; and there were great voices in heaven, saying, The kingdoms of this world are become the kingdoms of our Lord, and of his Christ; and he shall reign for ever and ever. o Rev 11:16 And the four and twenty elders, which sat before God on their seats, fell upon their faces, and worshipped God, o Rev 11:17 Saying, We give thee thanks, O Lord God Almighty, which art, and wast, and art to come; because thou hast taken to thee thy great power, and hast reigned. o Rev 11:18 And the nations were angry, and thy wrath is come, and the time of the dead, that they should be judged, and that thou shouldest give reward unto thy servants the prophets, and to the saints, and them that fear thy name, small and great; and shouldest destroy them which destroy the earth.

The reward given to the elect will be a Crown of Life or everlasting life.

o Rev 2:10 Fear none of those things which thou shalt suffer: behold, the devil shall cast some of you into prison, that ye may be tried; and ye shall have tribulation ten days: be thou faithful unto death, and I will give thee a crown of life.

The 7 Bowl Judgments and Armageddon After the sounding of the seven trumpets there will be seven bowls will be carried out from the Temple of God in Heaven and be prepared to pour onto the earth (Rev 15:6-8 and Rev 16:1). The seven bowl judgments are even more severe than the judgments from the seven trumpets. Following the pouring of the 6th Bowl, Satan, Antichrist, the False Prophet, and their spiritual subordinates will work in unison to convince the kings of the earth and the whole world to gather for the Battle of Armageddon, the battle that will decide everything.

o Rev 16:12 And the sixth angel poured out his vial upon the great river Euphrates; and the water thereof was dried up, that the way of the kings of the east might be prepared. o Rev 16:13 And I saw three unclean spirits like frogs come out of the mouth of the dragon, and out of the mouth of the beast, and out of the mouth of the false prophet.

o Rev 16:14 For they are the spirits of devils, working miracles, which go forth unto the kings of the earth and of the whole world, to gather them to the battle of that great day of God Almighty. o o Rev 16:16 And he gathered them together into a place called in the Hebrew tongue Armageddon.

Antichrists forces will think they stand a chance to defeat Christ and His forces at the start of the Battle of Armageddon. However, Antichrist will have no chance against Christ, who will destroy His opponents by simply opening his mouth as the Word of God is sharper than a double-edge sword.

o Isa 11:4 But with righteousness shall he judge the poor, and reprove with equity for the meek of the earth: and he shall smite the earth with the rod of his mouth, and with the breath of his lips shall he slay the wicked.

o Heb 4:12 For the word of God is quick, and powerful, and sharper than any twoedged sword, piercing even to the dividing asunder of soul and spirit, and of the joints and marrow, and is a discerner of the thoughts and intents of the heart.

o Rev 19:15 And out of his mouth goeth a sharp sword, that with it he should smite the nations: and he shall rule them with a rod of iron: and he treadeth the winepress of the fierceness and wrath of Almighty God.

Antichrist and the False Prophet will be seized and deposited into the Lake of Fire while the

remaining people gathered against Christ will be annihilated by His words.

o Rev 19:19 And I saw the beast, and the kings of the earth, and their armies, gathered together to make war against him that sat on the horse, and against his army. o Rev 19:20 And the beast was taken, and with him the false prophet that wrought miracles before him, with which he deceived them that had received the mark of the beast, and them that worshipped his image. These both were cast alive into a lake of fire burning with brimstone. o Rev 19:21 And the remnant were slain with the sword of him that sat upon the horse, which sword proceeded out of his mouth: and all the fowls were filled with their flesh.

After the Battle of Armageddon, Satan is seized and imprisoned for 1000 years.

o Rev 20:1 And I saw an angel come down from heaven, having the key of the bottomless pit and a great chain in his hand. o Rev 20:2 And he laid hold on the dragon, that old serpent, which is the Devil, and Satan, and bound him a thousand years, o Rev 20:3 And cast him into the bottomless pit, and shut him up, and set a seal upon him, that he should deceive the nations no more, till the thousand years should be fulfilled: and after that he must be loosed a little season.

The Millennium Kingdom The saints (the .them. in Revelation 20:4), including the 5th seal martyrs, will rule along with Jesus for 1000 years.

o Rev 20:4 And I saw thrones, and they sat upon them, and judgment was given unto them: and I saw the souls of them that were beheaded for the witness of Jesus, and for the word of God, and which had not worshipped the beast, neither his image, neither had received his mark upon their foreheads, or in their hands; and they lived and reigned with Christ a thousand years.

The Sheep and the Goats At the start of the Millennium Kingdom the gentile survivors of the Wrath of God will gather to be judged.

o Mat 25:32 And before Him shall be gathered all the nations; and He will separate them from one another, as the shepherd separates the sheep from the goats.

Those who are considered .sheep. will be allowed to enter the Millennium Kingdom while those who are considered .goats. will be condemned.

o Mat 25:33 And indeed He will set the sheep off His right, but the goats off the left hand. o Mat 25:34 Then the King will say to those on His right, Come, the blessed of My Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world.

o Mat 25:41 Then He will also say to those on His left, Go away from Me, cursed ones, into the everlasting fire having been prepared for the Devil and his angels.

o Mat 25:46 And these shall go away into everlasting punishment, but the righteous into everlasting life.

People will be categorized as either a sheep or a goat depending on whether they accepted the Mark of the Beast during the 70th Week of Daniel and how they treat the Jews during their time of peril (Mat 25:42-45).

Make Things New? Many people believe that a new Heaven and new Earth will replace the old ones after the end of the 1000 years. However, I have read some very knowledgeable experts argue that a new Heaven, new Earth, and a New Jerusalem are most likely going to be created at the start of the millennium kingdom. Since this is an overview and not a detailed analysis I will not provide a long list of reasons why a new Heaven, new Earth, and New Jerusalem may be created at the start of the Millennium Kingdom. However, I think it is likely that all three of these things will be created at the start of the Millennium Kingdom because Earth and its atmosphere will be completely wrecked after the seven trumpets and seven bowl judgments. Nevertheless, the Millennium Kingdom will be an era of relative peace and stability. In addition, the Jewish people will thrive as the nations of the earth who have persecuted them throughout history will now live in harmony with them. This will also be an era for prosperity for the Jewish people as the land will consistently produce bumper crops (Eze 34:27 and Eze 36:30).

A 1000 Years Later to Eternity After the end of a 1000 years Satan will be released from bondage and will be given one

last opportunity to oppose God.

o Rev 20:7 And when the thousand years are expired, Satan shall be loosed out of his prison, o Rev 20:8 And shall go out to deceive the nations which are in the four quarters of the earth, Gog and Magog, to gather them together to battle: the number of whom is as the sand of the sea.

Like the Battle of Armageddon, Satans forces are annihilated by God. However, this time, Satan will be thrown into the lake of fire permanently rather than be imprisoned again.

o Rev 20:9 And they went up on the breadth of the earth, and compassed the camp of the saints about, and the beloved city: and fire came down from God out of heaven, and devoured them. o Rev 20:10 And the devil that deceived them was cast into the lake of fire and brimstone, where the beast and the false prophet are, and shall be tormented day and night for ever and ever.

After the casting of Satan into the lake of fire God will judge many people and those whose names are not found in the Book of Life will be condemned for all eternity.

o Rev 20:11 And I saw a great white throne, and him that sat on it, from whose face the earth and the heaven fled away; and there was found no place for them. o Rev 20:12 And I saw the dead, small and great, stand before God; and the books were opened: and another book was opened, which is the book of life: and the dead were judged out of those things which were written in the books, according to their works. o Rev 20:13 And the sea gave up the dead which were in it; and death and hell delivered up the dead which were in them: and they were judged every man according to their works. o Rev 20:14 And death and hell were cast into the lake of fire. This is the second death. o Rev 20:15 And whosoever was not found written in the book of life was cast into the lake of fire.

A description of the New Jerusalem is given in Revelation 21 and Revelation 22. You will be very impressed by the description given by John. This is what awaits you if you do not give into all the lying signs and wonders and remain faithful to Jesus Christ.

20. When Will the End Times Begin? It is all finished. National Socialism is dead and will never rise again! Perhaps in a hundred years a similar idea would arise with the power of a religion and spread throughout the world. But Germany is lost. It actually was not quite ready or quite strong enough for the mission I set for the nation. -Adolf Hitler

Introduction People have attempted to predict when the end times will begin for centuries. Each generation inevitably concludes that they are living in the end times. For instance, here is what one Scottish man wrote in 1848:

.Since the smoke of Waterloo rolled away, no such important events have taken place as those of 1848. The present is a chaos, the future a mystery. Even in Scotland, far from the street fighting of so many continental cities, many of the devout were predicting that =some mighty change, if not the end of time, is at hand and that in a few years =Christ as a King shall appear upon this earth (12)..

This Scottish writer is like many other emotional people who concluded that their generation was living in the end times as they saw their world fall apart around them. Other prognosticators base their claims on calculations that have little to no Biblical basis. Since many people have tried and failed to predict when the end times will begin I have decided to try (and hopefully not fail) it myself. After seven years of research, I am very confident that I have successfully estimated when the end times will begin because my results have a strong Biblical basis. I rely mostly on Biblical details to construct an end times and jubilee calendar. However, before we can proceed you must know what a Sabbath Year and Jubilee Year.

The Sabbath Year Defined A Sabbath Year is a year of rest for the land because farmers are not permitted to work the land. The Sabbath Year is observed once every seven years.

o Lev 25:1 And the LORD spake unto Moses in mount Sinai, saying, o Lev 25:2 Speak unto the children of Israel, and say unto them, When ye come into the land which I give you, then shall the land keep a sabbath unto the LORD. o Lev 25:3 Six years thou shalt sow thy field, and six years thou shalt prune thy vineyard, and gather in the fruit thereof; o Lev 25:4 But in the seventh year shall be a sabbath of rest unto the land, a sabbath for the LORD: thou shalt neither sow thy field, nor prune thy vineyard. o Lev 25:5 That which groweth of its own accord of thy harvest thou shalt not reap, neither gather the grapes of thy vine undressed: for it is a year of rest unto the land. o Lev 25:6 And the sabbath of the land shall be meat for you; for thee, and for thy servant, and for thy maid, and for thy hired servant, and for thy stranger that sojourneth with thee, o Lev 25:7 And for thy cattle, and for the beast that are in thy land, shall all the increase thereof be meat.

The Jubilee Year Defined A Jubilee Year is a special Sabbath observed once every 50 years after the completion of the 7th Sabbath Year. A Jubilee Year begins with Yom Kippur, the Day of Atonement325, with the sounding of a rams horn on Tishri 10 of the Jewish calendar. 325 See Leviticus chapter 16 for more about Yom Kippur

o Lev 25:8 And thou shalt number seven sabbaths of years unto thee, seven times seven years; and the space of the seven sabbaths of years shall be unto thee forty and nine years. o Lev 25:9 Then shalt thou cause the trumpet of the jubile to sound on the tenth day of the seventh month, in the day of atonement shall ye make the trumpet sound throughout all your land. o Lev 25:10 And ye shall hallow the fiftieth year, and proclaim liberty throughout all the land

unto all the inhabitants thereof: it shall be a jubile unto you; and ye shall return every man unto his possession, and ye shall return every man unto his family. o Lev 25:11 A jubile shall that fiftieth year be unto you: ye shall not sow, neither reap that which groweth of itself in it, nor gather the grapes in it of thy vine undressed.

The following table lists the major landmarks in a typical jubilee cycle:

The Jubilee Cycle 7 Years out of 50 Years: 1st Sabbath Year of the Jubilee Cycle 14 Years out of 50 Years: 2nd Sabbath Year of the Jubilee Cycle 21 Years out of 50 Years: 3rd Sabbath Year of the Jubilee Cycle 28 Years out of 50 Years: 4th Sabbath Year of the Jubilee Cycle 35 Years out of 50 Years: 5th Sabbath Year of the Jubilee Cycle 42 Years out of 50 Years: 6th Sabbath Year of the Jubilee Cycle 49 Years out of 50 Years: 7th Sabbath Year of the Jubilee Cycle 50 out of 50 Years: Jubilee Year

At the beginning of a Jubilee Year people are obligated to return items to their original owners, including land, (Lev 25:10, 13, 23-28) and grant freedom to their servants/slaves (Lev 25:39-54). Since a Jubilee Year is another Sabbath Year it is another year of rest for the land (Lev 25:12).

Why the Jubilee Year Matters We should care about finding the next Jubilee Year because there is a strong indication in end time-related verses that the 70th Week of Daniel will end at the beginning of a Jubilee Year (Yom Kippur).326 For example, Isaiah 61:2 shows us that the .acceptable year of Jehovah. (which Bible scholars identify as the Jubilee Year) will occur within the context of the day of vengeance (The Day of the Lord).

326 Recall that the purpose of the 70 Weeks is to atone for the sins of Jerusalem and the Jewish people (Dan 9:24). Since Yom Kippur is the Day of Atonement on the Jewish calendar it is fitting that the final atonement of sins is completed on the Day of Atonement.

o Isa 61:1 The Spirit of the Lord GOD is upon me; because the LORD hath anointed me to preach good tidings unto the meek; he hath sent me to bind up the brokenhearted, to proclaim liberty to the captives, and the opening of the prison to them that are bound; o Isa 61:2 To proclaim the acceptable year of the LORD, and the day of vengeance of our God; to comfort all that mourn; o Isa 61:3 To appoint unto them that mourn in Zion, to give unto them beauty for ashes, the oil of joy for mourning, the garment of praise for the spirit of heaviness; that they might be called trees of righteousness, the planting of the LORD, that he might be glorified.

Isaiah 58 provides further indication that there will be a very significant Jubilee Year during the end times. The chapter opens with a call to blow a rams horn, which is a clear sign

that the events in this chapter occur in context of Yom Kippur, the day when Jubilee Years begin.

o Isa 58:1 Cry aloud, spare not, lift up thy voice like a trumpet, and shew my people their transgression, and the house of Jacob their sins.

Isaiah 58:5 is the key verse of Isaiah 58 since it has a phrase that links the chapter with the notion of the end time Jubilee presented in Isaiah 61:2: .day of delight to Jehovah. (or .day acceptable to the Lord.).

o Isa 58:5 Is it such a fast that I have chosen? a day for a man to afflict his soul? is it to bow down his head as a bulrush, and to spread sackcloth and ashes under him? wilt thou call this a fast, and an acceptable day to the LORD?

o Isa 61:2 To proclaim the acceptable year of the LORD, and the day of vengeance of our God; to comfort all that mourn;

Dr. David L. Baker describes why .day of delight to Jehovah. (or .day acceptable to the Lord.) links Isaiah 58 with the end time Jubilee in Page 10 of an article called The Jubilee and the Millennium. Holy Years in the Bible and Their Relevance Today. If you are interested in learning more about the Jubilee Year references in Isaiah 58 you can download Dr. Bakers complete article by clicking this link. Here is some of what Dr. Baker wrote in page 10.

.Isaiah 58:5 refers to a fast day as =a day acceptable to the Lord (yom raon ladonay), whereas Isaiah 61:2 describes =the year of the LORDS favour (enat raon ladonay).in other words, the year of raon (jubilee year, Isa. 61) will be opened with a day of raon (Day of Atonement, Isa. 58);.

Isaiah 58:6 reveals that the Lord will liberate those that have been oppressed during this special time. This is consistent with the concept of the Jubilee Year where slaves are supposed to be released from bondage (Lev 25:39-54).

o Isa 58:6 Is not this the fast that I have chosen? to loose the bands of wickedness, to undo the heavy burdens, and to let the oppressed go free, and that ye break every yoke?

Isaiah 58:8-58:12 further supports the notion that Isaiah 58 is describing an end time Jubilee Year. These verses reveal that there will be restoration and prosperity after Israel is liberated. Restoration of the land is another condition connected with a Jubilee Year (Lev 25:10, 13, 2328).

o Isa 58:8 Then shall thy light break forth as the morning, and thine health shall spring forth speedily: and thy righteousness shall go before thee; the glory of the LORD shall be thy rereward. o Isa 58:9 Then shalt thou call, and the LORD shall answer; thou shalt cry, and he shall say, Here I am. If thou take away from the midst of thee the yoke, the putting forth of the finger, and speaking vanity; o Isa 58:10 And if thou draw out thy soul to the hungry, and satisfy the afflicted soul; then shall thy light rise in obscurity, and thy darkness be as the noonday: o Isa 58:11 And the LORD shall guide thee continually, and satisfy thy soul in drought, and make fat thy bones: and thou shalt be like a watered garden, and like a spring of water, whose waters fail not. o Isa 58:12 And they that shall be of thee shall build the old waste places: thou shalt raise up the foundations of many generations; and thou shalt be called, The repairer of the breach, The restorer of paths to dwell in.

A final example of why a Jubilee Year will occur during the end times can be found in Luke 4. Jesus read a passage that echoes Isaiah 61 aloud in Nazareth and proclaimed that the

portion he read aloud was fulfilled by His reading of it. The key part of Jesuss announcement is a proclamation that it is the .acceptable year of the Lord. or the Jubilee Year. The reasons why we can conclude that Jesus was proclaiming a Jubilee Year when he read the passage will be explained in the next section.

o Luk 4:16 And he came to Nazareth, where he had been brought up: and, as his custom was, he went into the synagogue on the sabbath day, and stood up for to read. o Luk 4:17 And there was delivered unto him the book of the prophet Esaias. And when he had opened the book, he found the place where it was written, o Luk 4:18 The Spirit of the Lord is upon me, because he hath anointed me to preach the gospel to the poor; he hath sent me to heal the brokenhearted, to preach deliverance to the captives, and recovering of sight to the blind, to set at liberty them that are bruised, o Luk 4:19 To preach the acceptable year of the Lord.

o Luk 4:20 And he closed the book, and he gave it again to the minister, and sat down. And the eyes of all them that were in the synagogue were fastened on him. o Luk 4:21 And he began to say unto them, This day is this scripture fulfilled in your ears.

It is important to note that Jesus stopped reading after proclaiming the .acceptable year of the Lord.. This means that the .day of vengeance. portion of Isaiah 61:2 was not read aloud and is not yet fulfilled. Isaiah 61 is another example of near/far prophecy where the prophecy is partially fulfilled in the past and will ultimately be fulfilled in the future. Jesus will ultimately fulfill Isaiah 61:1-2 during the day of vengeance when he will proclaim an .acceptable year of the Lord. or Jubilee Year.

Building the Jubilee Finder The .Jubilee Finder. is the name of the model/computer program that I have created to identify when Sabbath and Jubilee Years occurred. The Jubilee Finder is built with the help of clues from the Bible and information from historical sources. In this section I will explain how you can build your own replica of the Jubilee Finder.

Finding the Anchor Date The anchor date is a date that we use as a starting point to calculate other dates. The key to an accurate model is to find an anchor date which can help us identify other Sabbath Years and other Jubilee Years. In the previous section I claimed that Jesus declared a Jubilee Year in Luke 4. Now it is time to explain why Jesus proclaimed a Jubilee Year when He read from Isaiah. Vatican writer Albert Vanhoye wrote a very detailed analysis demonstrating why Jesus

proclaimed a Jubilee Year in Luke 4:16-21. Here is an excerpt from his analysis that summarizes his position on Luke 4:16-21.

Very significantly the last line of Isaiah read by Jesus says: "to proclaim the Lord's year of favour" (Lk 4,19; Is 61,2), and immediately afterwards, Jesus' message was a declaration that precisely "this text" was being fulfilled on that day. The expression of Isaiah 61,2 "year of the Lord's favour" clearly refers to the prescriptons in the Book of Leviticus on the jubilee year (Lev 25,10-13). Therefore at Nazareth Jesus was proclaiming a Jubilee year.

The way in which Luke quotes Isaiah presents also details which reveal a certain manner of interpreting the jubilee year. After speaking of "proclaiming (...) to the blind new sight" Luke adds: "to set the downtrodden free", an expression inspired by another passage of Isaiah, (Is 58,6) where its serves to define the "fasting" which pleases God; this authentic fasting does not consist in observing ritual ("hanging your head like a reed, lying down on sackcloth and ashes": Is 58,5), rather, it is "to break unjust fetters and undo the throngs of the yoke, to let the oppressed go free and break every yoke": (Is 58,6). The effect of this addition in the Gospel is therefore greater insistence on the fact that the jubilee year must be a year of liberation

Vanhoyes analysis is sound and very thorough. He continues his analysis by showing how the words .Jubilee. and .Liberation. are synonymous in the Greek translation of the Bible and how this similarity links Leviticus 25 with Luke 4. I was tempted to post more excerpts from his analysis, but I feel I would be quoting too much from his work. However, if you are interested in reading his full analysis, click this link: After we have identified an event where Jesus declared a Jubilee Year we must now find when this event actually occurred. We know from Luke that Jesuss proclamation occurred in the early days of His ministry. We also know from Luke 3 that Jesus was approximately 30 years old (give or take a few months) when He began His ministry.

o Luk 3:21 Now when all the people were baptized, it came to pass, that Jesus also being baptized, and praying, the heaven was opened, o Luk 3:22 And the Holy Ghost descended in a bodily shape like a dove upon him, and a voice came from heaven, which said, Thou art my beloved Son; in thee I am well pleased. o Luk 3:23 And Jesus himself began to be about thirty years of age, being (as was supposed) the son of Joseph, which was the son of Heli,

Some Messianic Jews believe that Jesus was born on the 1st Day of the Feast of Tabernacles in 3 B.C. To save time and space, I will not discuss how they derived this date.

However, rest assured that these Messianic Jews relied on the inerrancy of the Biblical text. Here are a few websites that you can review in case you are interested in reading more about why these Messianic Jews believe that Jesus was born on the 1st Day of the Feast of Tabernacles:

. http://bethhamashiach.com/whenwasYeshuaborn.htm . http://www.messianic.com/articles/dates.htm

Using 3 B.C. as Jesuss birth year, we can narrow the possibilities of when Jesus proclaimed the Jubilee Year to either 28 or 29 A.D. We can also arrive at the same timeframe by using a clue found in the Book of John. John 2 tells us that the first year of Jesuss ministry coincided with 46th year of Herods Temple construction. The construction of Herods Temple began around 19 B.C.

o Joh 2:13 And the Jews' passover was at hand, and Jesus went up to Jerusalem, o Joh 2:14 And found in the temple those that sold oxen and sheep and doves, and the changers of money sitting: o Joh 2:15 And when he had made a scourge of small cords, he drove them all out of the temple, and the sheep, and the oxen; and poured out the changers' money, and overthrew the tables; o Joh 2:16 And said unto them that sold doves, Take these things hence; make not my Father's house an house of merchandise. o Joh 2:17 And his disciples remembered that it was written, The zeal of thine house hath eaten me up. o Joh 2:18 Then answered the Jews and said unto him, What sign shewest thou unto us, seeing that thou doest these things? o Joh 2:19 Jesus answered and said unto them, Destroy this temple, and in three days I will raise it up. o Joh 2:20 Then said the Jews, Forty and six years was this temple in building, and wilt thou rear it up in three days?

We can also arrive at the same timeframe by using another clue found in the Book of Luke. Luke 3 tells us that John the Baptist began his ministry in the 15th year of Tiberius.

o Luk 3:1 Now in the fifteenth year of the reign of Tiberius Caesar, Pontius Pilate being governor of Judaea, and Herod being tetrarch of Galilee, and his brother Philip tetrarch of Ituraea and of the region of Trachonitis, and Lysanias the tetrarch of Abilene,

o Luk 3:2 Annas and Caiaphas being the high priests, the word of God came unto John the son of Zacharias in the wilderness. o Luk 3:3 And he came into all the country about Jordan, preaching the baptism of repentance for the remission of sins; o Luk 3:4 As it is written in the book of the words of Esaias the prophet, saying, The voice of one crying in the wilderness, Prepare ye the way of the Lord, make his paths straight.

Tiberius ascended in August 14 A.D., which means that John the Baptist began his ministry sometime between 28 and 29 A.D. This detail is important because Jesus began his ministry shortly after John the Baptist began his.

Fortunately, there is Bible-based evidence that will enable us to select 28 A.D. over 29A.D. Moses commanded that the Law must be read aloud publicly during the Feast of Tabernacles following the end of the each Sabbath Year.

o Deu 31:10 And Moses commanded them, saying, At the end of every seven years, in the solemnity of the year of release, in the feast of tabernacles, o Deu 31:11 When all Israel is come to appear before the LORD thy God in the place which he shall choose, thou shalt read this law before all Israel in their hearing. o Deu 31:12 Gather the people together, men, and women, and children, and thy stranger that is within thy gates, that they may hear, and that they may learn, and fear the LORD your God, and observe to do all the words of this law: o Deu 31:13 And that their children, which have not known any thing, may hear, and learn to fear the LORD your God, as long as ye live in the land whither ye go over Jordan to possess it.

This detail is important because it will help us adjust the model so we can use it to identify the dates of other Sabbath Years. In an earlier chapter, I proved that the first week of Daniel began on April 19, 444B.C. With this information, we can date when Nehemiah departed from Babylon for Jerusalem and date when Ezra read the Law during the Feast of Tabernacles after Nehemiahs arrival in Jerusalem.

445-444 BC Sabbath Year A Sabbath Year can be identified from the details provided by the Book of Nehemiah. In the 20th Year of Artaxerxes, Nehemiah, the newly appointed governor of Judah, departed from Babylon for Jerusalem after receiving a decree to rebuild Jerusalems walls. This also coincided with the beginning of the 1st week of Daniel, which means Nehemiah departed shortly after April

19, 444 B.C.

o Neh 2:1 And it came to pass in the month Nisan, in the twentieth year of Artaxerxes the king, that wine was before him: and I took up the wine, and gave it unto the king. Now I had not been beforetime sad in his presence. o Neh 2:2 Wherefore the king said unto me, Why is thy countenance sad, seeing thou art not sick? this is nothing else but sorrow of heart. Then I was very sore afraid, o Neh 2:5 And I said unto the king, If it please the king, and if thy servant have found favour in thy sight, that thou wouldest send me unto Judah, unto the city of my fathers' sepulchres, that I may build it.

o Neh 2:6 And the king said unto me, (the queen also sitting by him,) For how long shall thy journey be? and when wilt thou return? So it pleased the king to send me; and I set him a time. o Neh 2:7 Moreover I said unto the king, If it please the king, let letters be given me to the governors beyond the river, that they may convey me over till I come into Judah; o Neh 2:8 And a letter unto Asaph the keeper of the king's forest, that he may give me timber to make beams for the gates of the palace which appertained to the house, and for the wall of the city, and for the house that I shall enter into. And the king granted me, according to the good hand of my God upon me.

The information provided in Nehemiah 6:15 allow us to conclude that the construction of Jerusalems walls began on July 26, 444 B.C. since the walls were completed after 52 days on September 16, 444 B.C.

o Neh 6:15 So the wall was finished in the twenty and fifth day of the month Elul, in fifty and two days.

A few weeks later, men throughout Israel arrived in Jerusalem for the annual celebration of the Feast of Tabernacles. This Feast of Tabernacles was an extra-special celebration because the Law of Moses was read aloud publicly. This is a clear indication that a Sabbath Year had just ended. Therefore, there was a Sabbath Year that spanned from autumn 445 B.C. to autumn 444 B.C.

o Neh 8:14 And they found written in the law which the LORD had commanded by Moses,

that the children of Israel should dwell in booths in the feast of the seventh month: o Neh 8:15 And that they should publish and proclaim in all their cities, and in Jerusalem, saying, Go forth unto the mount, and fetch olive branches, and pine branches, and myrtle branches, and palm branches, and branches of thick trees, to make booths, as it is written. o Neh 8:16 So the people went forth, and brought them, and made themselves booths, every one upon the roof of his house, and in their courts, and in the courts of the house of God, and in the street of the water gate, and in the street of the gate of Ephraim. o Neh 8:17 And all the congregation of them that were come again out of the captivity made booths, and sat under the booths: for since the days of Jeshua the son of Nun unto that day had not the children of Israel done so. And there was very great gladness. o Neh 8:18 Also day by day, from the first day unto the last day, he read in the book of the law of God. And they kept the feast seven days; and on the eighth day was a solemn assembly, according unto the manner.

The Jubilee Finder identifies a Sabbath Year from autumn 445 B.C. to autumn 444 B.C. only when using 28 A.D. as the year when Jesus made the Jubilee Year proclamation. Therefore, 28 A.D. is our anchor date. In sum, Daniels 70 week prophecy and Moses instructions to read the Law during the Feast of Tabernacles following each Sabbath Year requires that we choose 28 A.D. as our Jubilee Year and anchor date.

How to Find Other Sabbath/Jubilee Years Find Pre 28 A.D. Sabbath/Jubilee Years Subtract 1 year from the anchor date to find the 7th Sabbath Year of the Jubilee Cycle. Then subtract another 7 years six more times to find the first Sabbath Year of the Jubilee Cycle.327 Then subtract 7 years from this date and you will have identified the previous Jubilee Year. The following table illustrates how to find the Jubilee Year preceding the one in 28AD. 327 Do not forget to adjust for the fact that there was not a .Year 0..

23 B.C.: Subtract 1 Year to Find the Last Jubilee Year Before 28A.D. 16 B.C.: Subtract 7 Years to Find the 1st Sabbath Year of this new Jubilee Cycle 9 B.C.: Subtract 7 Years to Find the 2nd Sabbath Year of this Jubilee Cycle 2 B.C.: Subtract 7 Years to Find the 3rd Sabbath Year of this Jubilee Cycle 6 A.D.: Subtract 7 Years to Find the 4th Sabbath Year of this Jubilee Cycle 13 A.D.: Subtract 7 Years to Find the 5th Sabbath Year of this Jubilee Cycle 20 A.D.: Subtract 7 Years to Find the 6th Sabbath Year of this Jubilee Cycle 27 A.D.: Subtract 1 Year to Find the 7th Sabbath Year of this Jubilee Cycle 28 A.D.: The Anchor Date (A Jubilee Year)

Repeat this process repeatedly using the most recently calculated Jubilee Year as your new starting point and you will be able to identify the dates of all Sabbath Years and Jubilee Years that occurred before 28 A.D.

Find Pre 28 A.D. Sabbath/Jubilee Years Add 7 years to the anchor date to find first Sabbath Year of the next Jubilee Cycle. Then add another 7 years six more times to find the start of the final Sabbath Year before the next

Jubilee Year. Then add 1 year to this date and you will have identified the start of the next Jubilee Year. The following table illustrates how to find the Jubilee Year following the one in 28AD.

28 A.D.: The Anchor Date (A Jubilee Year) 35 A.D.: Added 7 Years to Find the 1st Sabbath Year of this new Jubilee Cycle 42 A.D.: Added 7 Years to Find the 2nd Sabbath Year of this Jubilee Cycle 49 A.D.: Added 7 Years to Find the 3rd Sabbath Year of this Jubilee Cycle 56 A.D.: Added 7 Years to Find the 4th Sabbath Year of this Jubilee Cycle 63 A.D.: Added 7 Years to Find the 5th Sabbath Year of this Jubilee Cycle 70 A.D.: Added 7 Years to Find the 6th Sabbath Year of this Jubilee Cycle 77 A.D.: Added 7 Years to Find the 7th Sabbath Year of this Jubilee Cycle 78 A.D.: Added 1 Year to Find the Next Jubilee Year After 29A.D.

Repeat this process repeatedly using the most recently calculated Jubilee Year as your new starting point and you will be able to find the dates for Sabbath Years and Jubilee Years that occurred after 28 A.D.

Find the 1sr Jubilee The Lord instructed the Jews to observe a Sabbath Year as soon as they entered (not conquered) the Land of Canaan.

o Lev 25:2 Speak unto the children of Israel, and say unto them, When ye come into the land which I give you, then shall the land keep a sabbath unto the LORD.

The Jews complied with the Lords instructions by living off the leftovers of the land after they arrived in Canaan.

o Jos 5:12 And the manna ceased on the morrow after they had eaten of the old corn of the land; neither had the children of Israel manna any more; but they did eat of the fruit of the land of Canaan that year.

Therefore, we can identify the start of the first Jubilee Year by adding 43 years to year that the Jews arrived in Canaan. The model offers two realistic years that the Jews could have arrived in Canaan: 1466 B.C. and 1416 B.C. Why I choose 1416 B.C. as the date of the 1st Jubilee Year will be explained later.

Accounting for Sabbath and Jubilee Years The Jubilee Finders explanatory power can be gauged by its ability to predict other documented Sabbath and Jubilee Years. Although few, verifiable Sabbath Years have been recorded in history, this model does an excellent job of identifying these Sabbath Years with their estimated historical dates.

Destruction of the 2nd Temple During the siege of Jerusalem by King Nebuchadnezzar, the Lord ordered Jeremiah to tell King Zedekiah that it was time to release the slaves.

o Jer 34:8 This is the word that came unto Jeremiah from the LORD, after that the king Zedekiah had made a covenant with all the people which were at Jerusalem, to proclaim liberty unto them; o Jer 34:9 That every man should let his manservant, and every man his maidservant, being an Hebrew or an Hebrewess, go free; that none should serve himself of them, to wit, of a Jew his brother. o Jer 34:10 Now when all the princes, and all the people, which had entered into the covenant, heard that every one should let his manservant, and every one his maidservant, go free, that none should serve themselves of them any more, then they obeyed, and let them go. o Jer 34:11 But afterward they turned, and caused the servants and the handmaids, whom they had let go free, to return, and brought them into subjection for servants and for handmaids.

The Lord was furious after the Jews disobeyed His order to release the slaves after they initially obeyed them. The Lord explained His anger in Jeremiah 34:12-17, and His explanation reveals that the Jews were suppose to release the slaves to fulfill one of their Sabbath Year obligations. This passage confirms that a Sabbath Year occurred during Nebuchadnezzars siege of Jerusalem.

o Jer 34:13 Thus saith the LORD, the God of Israel; I made a covenant with your fathers in the day that I brought them forth out of the land of Egypt, out of the house of bondmen, saying, o Jer 34:14 At the end of seven years let ye go every man his brother an Hebrew, which hath been sold unto thee; and when he hath served thee six years, thou shalt let him go free from thee: but your fathers hearkened not unto me, neither inclined their ear. o Jer 34:15 And ye were now turned, and had done right in my sight, in proclaiming liberty every man to his neighbour; and ye had made a covenant before me in the house which is called by my name: o Jer 34:16 But ye turned and polluted my name, and caused every man his servant, and every man his handmaid, whom ye had set at liberty at their pleasure, to return, and brought them into subjection, to be unto you for servants and for handmaids. o Jer 34:17 Therefore thus saith the LORD; Ye have not hearkened unto me, in proclaiming liberty, every one to his brother, and every man to his neighbour: behold, I proclaim a liberty for you, saith the LORD, to the sword, to the pestilence, and to the famine; and I will make you to be removed into all the kingdoms of the earth.

Chronologists date the beginning of Nebuchadnezzars siege of Jerusalem around 588 B.C. 2 Kings 25:1 gives us enough chronological details to date the beginning of the siege as January 15, 588 B.C.

o 2Ki 25:1 And it came to pass in the ninth year of his reign, in the tenth month, in the tenth day of the month, that Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon came, he, and all his host, against Jerusalem, and pitched against it; and they built forts against it round about.

The Jubilee Finder predicts that a Sabbath Year spanned from autumn 588 to autumn 587 B.C. Since the Lords orders came at the beginning of the Sabbath Year, there could not have been a Sabbath Year that spanned from autumn 589 to autumn 588 B.C. Therefore, the Jubilee Finders prediction is aligned with the chronological evidence presented in Jeremiah 34 and 2 Kings 25:1. However, how do we know that the Sabbath Year spanned from autumn 587 to autumn 586 B.C. instead of from autumn 588 to autumn 587 B.C.? One Rabbinical writer believes that Solomons Temple was destroyed by Nebuchadnezzar just after the end of a Sabbath Year:

o Tananith 29a: .The First Temple was destroyed in the year following the Sabbathical year.

Solomons Temple was destroyed in 586 B.C. so Rabbinical writer implies that a Sabbath Year that spanned from 588-587 B.C. This clearly is a case where the Jubilee Finder has successfully predicted a Sabbath Year.

Ezras Sabbath Year Reading The Bible and Jewish historian Flavius Josephus indicate that Ezra travelled from Babylon to Jerusalem during a Sabbath Year. Ezra travelled from Babylon during the 7th year of Artaxerxes, which was in 458 B.C.

o Ezr 7:6 This Ezra went up from Babylon; and he was a ready scribe in the law of Moses, which the LORD God of Israel had given: and the king granted him all his request, according to the hand of the LORD his God upon him. o Ezr 7:7 And there went up some of the children of Israel, and of the priests, and the Levites, and the singers, and the porters, and the Nethinims, unto Jerusalem, in the seventh year of Artaxerxes the king. o Ezr 7:8 And he came to Jerusalem in the fifth month, which was in the seventh year of the king. o Ezr 7:9 For upon the first day of the first month began he to go up from Babylon, and on the first day of the fifth month came he to Jerusalem, according to the good hand of his God upon him. o Ezr 7:10 For Ezra had prepared his heart to seek the law of the LORD, and to do it, and to teach in Israel statutes and judgments.

A few months after he arrived, Ezra read the Law of Moses in public at the Feast of Tabernacles. This (again) is significant because the Law of Moses was read publicly during the Feast of Tabernacles following a Sabbath Year.

Book 11, Chapter 5, Section 5: Flavius Josephus .The Antiquities of the Jews. 5. Now when they kept the feast of tabernacles in the seventh month and almost all the people were come together to it, they went up to the open part of the temple, to the gate which looked eastward, and desired of Esdras that the laws of Moses might be read to them. Accordingly, he stood in the midst of the multitude and read them; and this he did from morning to noon. Now, by hearing the laws read to them, they were instructed to be righteous men for the present and for the future; but as for their past offenses, they were displeased at themselves, and proceeded to shed tears on their account, as considering

with themselves that if they had kept the law, they had endured none of these miseries which they had experienced.

Since the Law of Moses was read a few months after Ezra arrived in Jerusalem we can conclude that Ezra arrived in Jerusalem during a Sabbath Year and that a Sabbath Year ended in autumn 458B.C.

Josiahs Jubilee Year Reading The Book of the Law was uncovered in the Temple of Jerusalem during the 18th year of Josiah. The 18th Year of Josiah has been estimated by chronologists to have spanned from 623 to 622 B.C.

o 2Ki 22:3 And it came to pass in the eighteenth year of king Josiah, that the king sent Shaphan the son of Azaliah, the son of Meshullam, the scribe, to the house of the LORD, saying, o 2Ki 22:8 And Hilkiah the high priest said unto Shaphan the scribe, I have found the book of the law in the house of the LORD. And Hilkiah gave the book to Shaphan, and he read it. o 2Ki 22:9 And Shaphan the scribe came to the king, and brought the king word again, and said, Thy servants have gathered the money that was found in the house, and have delivered it into the hand of them that do the work, that have the oversight of the house of the LORD. o 2Ki 22:10 And Shaphan the scribe shewed the king, saying, Hilkiah the priest hath delivered me a book. And Shaphan read it before the king. o 2Ki 22:11 And it came to pass, when the king had heard the words of the book of the law, that he rent his clothes.

After the Book of the Law was found and read to him, Josiah ordered everyone within the Kingdom of Judah to assemble at the Temple in Jerusalem. Once everyone was gathered, Josiah read aloud from the Book of the Law to everyone gathered.

o 2Ki 23:1 And the king sent, and they gathered unto him all the elders of Judah and of Jerusalem. o 2Ki 23:2 And the king went up into the house of the LORD, and all the men of Judah and all the inhabitants of Jerusalem with him, and the priests, and the prophets, and all the people,

both small and great: and he read in their ears all the words of the book of the covenant which was found in the house of the LORD. o 2Ki 23:3 And the king stood by a pillar, and made a covenant before the LORD, to walk after the LORD, and to keep his commandments and his testimonies and his statutes with all their heart and all their soul, to perform the words of this covenant that were written in this book. And all the people stood to the covenant.

Although some Bible scholars argue that Josiahs main purpose in reading the Book of the Law was to reform his kingdom, Josiah would know (after hearing the words of the Law) that the Law could not be read aloud publically until after the end of a Sabbath Year. Therefore, this event occurred following the end of a Sabbath Year at the Feast of Tabernacles. However, how do we know that Josiah read from the Book of the Law during his 19th year instead of his 18th year? Josiah held a giant Passover celebration a few months later. 2 Kings 23:23 informs us that this giant Passover celebration also occurred during the 18th year of Josiah.

o 2Ki 23:21 And the king commanded all the people, saying, Keep the passover unto the LORD your God, as it is written in the book of this covenant. o 2Ki 23:22 Surely there was not holden such a passover from the days of the judges that judged Israel, nor in all the days of the kings of Israel, nor of the kings of Judah; o 2Ki 23:23 But in the eighteenth year of king Josiah, wherein this passover was holden to the LORD in Jerusalem.

Therefore, we can conclude that Josiahs public reading of the Law occurred during his 18th year as King. Since the Feast of Tabernacles occurs during the autumn, we can also conclude that

Josiahs public reading of the Law occurred during the autumn of 623 B.C. The Jubilee Finder confirms that this Feast of Tabernacles celebration occurred after the conclusion of a Sabbath Year in 623 B.C. In fact, the model shows that Josiahs public reading of the Law occurred during a Jubilee Year!

Ezekiels Jubilee Year The prophet Ezekiel often recorded the dates of his visions by using a variety of chronologies. One chronology that Ezekiel used in Ezekiel 1:1 (the 30th year) has remained unclear to Bible scholars because it is unclear what Ezekiel is referring to. However, the reference in Ezekiel 1:2 reveals that Ezekiel recorded his first vision in 593 B.C.

o Eze 1:1 Now it came to pass in the thirtieth year, in the fourth month, in the fifth day of the month, as I was among the captives by the river of Chebar, that the heavens were opened, and I saw visions of God. o Eze 1:2 In the fifth day of the month, which was the fifth year of king Jehoiachin's captivity,

If Ezekiel is referring to the Jubilee Cycle in Ezekiel 1:1, which is not out of the realm of possibility since he was a priest, then there should be a Jubilee Year beginning in 573 B.C. Ezekiel received a vision regarding the Temple of the Millennium Kingdom during the 14th Year after the destruction of Jerusalem (573 B.C.). Notice that Ezekiel records that it is the beginning of the year even though it is already the 10th day of the month. Only Jubilee Years begin on the 10th day of the month (of Tishri), so it is highly likely that Ezekiel is hinting that he is receiving this vision at the start of a Jubilee Year. It is also important to note that Ezekiel no longer uses the .unclear. chronology that he used in verse 1:1. This omission may signify that 573 B.C. was a Jubilee Year because the Jubilee Cycle was about to reach its completion.

o Eze 40:1 In the five and twentieth year of our captivity, in the beginning of the year, in the tenth day of the month, in the fourteenth year after that the city was smitten, in the selfsame day the hand of the LORD was upon me, and brought me thither.

The Jubilee Finder predicts that there was a Jubilee Year starting in autumn 573 B.C., which gives credence to the argument that Ezekiel was referring to the amount of time passed (30 years) in the Jubilee Cycle in verse 1:1. In fact, the model has identified two consecutive

Jubilee Years: 623 B.C. and 573 B.C. This shows us that the Jubilee Finder is accurate because it would not have been able to identify two consecutive Jubilee Years if it was inaccurate (the model would identify one Jubilee and one Sabbath Year). The models findings are further supported by Talmud. The Talmud states that the Josiahs Great Passover (Megillah 14b) and the vision of Ezekiel 40 occurred in Jubilee Years. The passage below is what the Talmud says about Ezekiel 40:1:

"In which year is the New Year celebrated on the tenth of Tishri (and not at its usual time on the first of that month)? This was the Jubilee year [the fiftieth year in the count of sabbatical years, see Leviticus 25:9], fourteen years after the destruction of the Temple and twenty-five years after the exile of Jehoiachin" (Rashi ad loc. and Erchin 12a).

Alexanders Tax Exemption Alexander the Great conquered Judea before heading down to conquer Egypt. After conquering Judea, Alexander met with some inhabitants of Jerusalem. The inhabitants of Jerusalem asked Alexander to exempt them from paying taxes on the Sabbath Year.

Book 11, Chapter 8, Section 5 & 6. Flavius Josephus. .The Antiquities of the Jews. .5. And when he [Alexander] went up into the temple, he offered sacrifice to God, according to the high priest's direction, and magnificently treated both the high priest and the priests. And when the Book of Daniel was showed him wherein Daniel declared that one of the Greeks should destroy the empire of the Persians, he supposed that himself was the person intended. And as he was then glad, he dismissed the multitude for the present; but the next day he called them to him, and bid them ask what favors they pleased of him; whereupon the high priest desired that they might enjoy the laws of their forefathers, and might pay no tribute on the seventh year. He granted all they desired.

6. And when they petitioned that he would remit the tribute of the seventh year to them, because they did but sow thereon, he asked who they were that made such a petition; and when they said that they were Hebrews, but had the name of Sidonians, living at Shechem, he asked them again whether they were Jews; and when they said they were not Jews, "It was to the Jews," said he, "that I granted that privilege; however, when I return, and am thoroughly informed by you of this matter, I will do what I shall think proper."

Josephus does not indicate whether it was a Sabbath Year when Alexander agreed to exempt Jews from paying taxes. However, the model shows that a Sabbath Year began in autumn 331 B.C., which is around the time where historians date Alexanders conquest of Judea.

St. Jeromes Jubilee Year St. Jerome identifies a Jubilee Year in the 2nd year of Probus, which was between October 277 and October 278 A.D (Dwyer). The model confirms St. Jeromes assertions because it predicts that a Jubilee Year began in autumn 278 A.D.

The List of Sabbath & Jubilee Years Here are the Sabbath/Jubilee Years that the Jubilee Finder predicts. What is amazing is that the next Jubilee Year is projected to occur in autumn 2028. This upcoming Jubilee will be the 69th Jubilee

How to Read the List All B.C. Dates Have Negative Signs Jubilee Years are signified by a * next to the date. The dates displayed in the table represent the start of the Sabbath or Jubilee Year. For instance, .-1416.7. signifies that a Sabbath Year began in the autumn of 1416 B.C. and ended in the autumn of 1415 B.C. .*578.7. signifies that a Jubilee Year began in the autumn of 578.7 A.D. and ended in the autumn of 579.7 A.D.

Exodus Date: Spring 1455 B.C. Jubilee Cycle 1 Jubilee Cycle 2 Jubilee Cycle 3 Jubilee Cycle 4 Jubilee Cycle 5 -1416.7328 -1366.7 -1316.7 -1266.7 -1216.7 -1409.7

-1359.7 -1309.7 -1259.7 -1209.7 -1402.7 -1352.7 -1302.7 -1252.7 -1202.7 -1395.7 -1345.7 -1295.7 -1245.7 -1195.7 -1388.7 -1338.7 -1288.7 -1238.7 -1188.7 -1381.7 -1331.7 -1281.7 -1231.7

-1181.7 -1374.7 -1324.7 -1274.7 -1224.7 -1174.7 *-1373.7 *-1323.7 *-1273.7 *-1223.7 *-1173.7 Jubilee Cycle 6 Jubilee Cycle 7 Jubilee Cycle 8 Jubilee Cycle 9 Jubilee Cycle 10 -1166.7 -1116.7 -1066.7 -1016.7 -966.7 -1159.7 -1109.7

-1059.7 -1009.7 -959.7 -1152.7 -1102.7 -1052.7 -1002.7 -952.7 -1145.7 -1095.7 -1045.7 -995.7 -945.7 -1138.7 -1088.7 -1038.7 -988.7 -938.7 -1131.7 -1081.7 -1031.7 -981.7 -931.7

-1124.7 -1074.7 -1024.7 -974.7 -924.7 *-1123.7 *-1073.7 *-1023.7 *-973.7 *-923.7 Jubilee Cycle 11 Jubilee Cycle 12 Jubilee Cycle 13 Jubilee Cycle 14 Jubilee Cycle 15 -916.7 -866.7 -816.7 -766.7 -716.7 -909.7 -859.7 -809.7

-759.7 -709.7 -902.7 -852.7 -802.7 -752.7 -702.7

328 The Jews arrived in Canaan in spring 1415B.C. after spending 40 years in the wilderness. However, the Jews observed a Sabbath Year as soon as they arrived in Canaan. Therefore, the Jews observance is the equivalent of observing a Sabbath Year that began in autumn 1416 B.C.

-895.7 -845.7 -795.7 -745.7 -695.7 -888.7 -838.7 -788.7 -738.7 -688.7 -881.7 -831.7 -781.7 -731.7 -681.7 -874.7 -824.7 -774.7 -724.7 -674.7 *-873.7 *-823.7 *-773.7

*-723.7 *-673.7 Jubilee Cycle 16 Jubilee Cycle 17 Jubilee Cycle 18 Jubilee Cycle 19 Jubilee Cycle 20 -666.7 -616.7 -566.7 -516.7 -466.7 -659.7 -609.7 -559.7 -509.7 -459.7 -652.7 -602.7 -552.7 -502.7 -452.7 -645.7

-595.7 -545.7 -495.7 -445.7 -638.7 -588.7 -538.7 -488.7 -438.7 -631.7 -581.7 -531.7 -481.7 -431.7 -624.7 -574.7 -524.7 -474.7 -424.7 *-623.7 *-573.7 *-523.7 *-473.7

*-423.7 Jubilee Cycle 21 Jubilee Cycle 22 Jubilee Cycle 23 Jubilee Cycle 24 Jubilee Cycle 25 -416.7 -366.7 -316.7 -266.7 -216.7 -409.7 -359.7 -309.7 -259.7 -209.7 -402.7 -352.7 -302.7 -252.7 -202.7 -395.7 -345.7

-295.7 -245.7 -195.7 -388.7 -338.7 -288.7 -238.7 -188.7 -381.7 -331.7 -281.7 -231.7 -181.7 -374.7 -324.7 -274.7 -224.7 -174.7 *-373.7 *-323.7 *-273.7 *-223.7 *-173.7

Jubilee Cycle 26 Jubilee Cycle 27 Jubilee Cycle 28 Jubilee Cycle 29 Jubilee Cycle 30 -166.7 -116.7 -66.7 -16.7 35.7 -159.7 -109.7 -59.7 -9.7 42.7 -152.7 -102.7 -52.7 -2.7 49.7 -145.7 -95.7 -45.7

6.7 56.7 -138.7 -88.7 -38.7 13.7 63.7 -131.7 -81.7 -31.7 20.7 70.7 -124.7 -74.7 -24.7 27.7 77.7 *-123.7 *-73.7 *-23.7 *28.7 *78.7 Jubilee Cycle 31

Jubilee Cycle 32 Jubilee Cycle 33 Jubilee Cycle 34 Jubilee Cycle 35 85.7 135.7 185.7 235.7 285.7 92.7 142.7 192.7 242.7 292.7 99.7 149.7 199.7 249.7 299.7 106.7 156.7 206.7 256.7

306.7 113.7 163.7 213.7 263.7 313.7 120.7 170.7 220.7 270.7 320.7 127.7 177.7 227.7 277.7 327.7 *128.7 *178.7 *228.7 *278.7 *328.7 Jubilee Cycle 36 Jubilee 37

Jubilee 38 Jubilee 39 Jubilee Cycle 40 335.7 385.7 435.7 485.7 535.7 342.7 392.7 442.7 492.7 542.7 349.7 399.7 449.7 499.7 549.7

356.7 406.7 456.7 506.7 556.7 363.7 413.7 463.7 513.7 563.7 370.7 420.7 470.7 520.7 570.7 377.7 427.7 477.7 527.7 577.7 *378.7 *428.7 *478.7

*528.7 *578.7 Jubilee Cycle 41 Jubilee Cycle 42 Jubilee Cycle 43 Jubilee Cycle 44 Jubilee Cycle 45 585.7 635.7 685.7 735.7 785.7 592.7 642.7 692.7 742.7 792.7 599.7 649.7 699.7 749.7 799.7 606.7

656.7 706.7 756.7 806.7 613.7 663.7 713.7 763.7 813.7 620.7 670.7 720.7 770.7 820.7 627.7 677.7 727.7 777.7 827.7 *628.7 *678.7 *728.7 *778.7

*828.7 Jubilee Cycle 46 Jubilee Cycle 47 Jubilee Cycle 48 Jubilee Cycle 49 Jubilee Cycle 50 835.7 885.7 935.7 985.7 1035.7 842.7 892.7 942.7 992.7 1042.7 849.7 899.7 949.7 999.7 1049.7 856.7 906.7

956.7 1006.7 1056.7 863.7 913.7 963.7 1013.7 1063.7 870.7 920.7 970.7 1020.7 1070.7 877.7 927.7 977.7 1027.7 1077.7 *878.7 *928.7 *978.7 *1028.7 *1078.7

Jubilee Cycle 51 Jubilee Cycle 52 Jubilee Cycle 53 Jubilee Cycle 54 Jubilee Cycle 55 1085.7 1135.7 1185.7 1235.7 1285.7 1092.7 1142.7 1192.7 1242.7 1292.7 1099.7 1149.7 1199.7 1249.7 1299.7 1106.7 1156.7 1206.7

1256.7 1306.7 1113.7 1163.7 1213.7 1263.7 1313.7 1120.7 1170.7 1220.7 1270.7 1320.7 1127.7 1177.7 1227.7 1277.7 1327.7 *1128.7 *1178.7 *1228.7 *1278.7 *1328.7 Jubilee Cycle 56

Jubilee Cycle 57 Jubilee Cycle 58 Jubilee Cycle 59 Jubilee Cycle 60 1335.7 1385.7 1435.7 1485.7 1535.7 1342.7 1392.7 1442.7 1492.7 1542.7 1349.7 1399.7 1449.7 1499.7 1549.7 1356.7 1406.7 1456.7 1506.7

1556.7 1363.7 1413.7 1463.7 1513.7 1563.7 1370.7 1420.7 1470.7 1520.7 1570.7 1377.7 1427.7 1477.7 1527.7 1577.7 *1378.7 *1428.7 *1478.7 *1528.7 *1578.7 Jubilee Cycle 61 Jubilee Cycle 62

Jubilee Cycle 63 Jubilee Cycle 64 Jubilee Cycle 65 1585.7 1635.7 1685.7 1735.7 1785.7 1592.7 1642.7 1692.7 1742.7 1792.7 1599.7 1649.7 1699.7 1749.7 1799.7

1606.7 1656.7 1706.7 1756.7 1806.7 1613.7 1663.7 1713.7 1763.7 1813.7 1620.7 1670.7 1720.7 1770.7 1820.7 1627.7 1677.7 1727.7 1777.7 1827.7 *1628.7 *1678.7 *1728.7

*1778.7 *1828.7 Jubilee Cycle 66 Jubilee Cycle 67 Jubilee Cycle 68 Jubilee Cycle 69

1835.7 1885.7 1935.7 1985.7

1842.7 1892.7 1942.7 1992.7

1849.7 1899.7 1949.7 1999.7

1856.7

1906.7 1956.7 2006.7

1863.7 1913.7 1963.7 2013.7

1870.7 1920.7 1970.7 2020.7

1877.7 1927.7 1977.7 2027.7

*1878.7 *1928.7 *1978.7 *2028.7

The table below is a schedule of when some major events will occur during the 70th Week of Daniel using the Jubilee Finders results if we assume, which I do, that the next Jubilee Year will end the 70th week of Daniel.

Estimated Dates of the 70th Week of Daniel Event Date/Gregorian Date/Jewish Beginning of the 70th Week November 6, 2021 Kislev 2, 5782 Middle of the 70th Week April 19, 2025 Nisan 21, 5785 End of the 70th Week/Jubilee Year Start September 30, 2028 Tishri 10, 5789 Feast of Tabernacles October 5, 2028 Tishri 15, 5789

End of the Day of the Lord October 30, 2028 Heshvan 10, 5789

Fallen Angel Confirmation Fallen Angel Djwhal Khul revealed that our current time is a preparatory period and that the year when we are likely to see the physical appearance of Satans spiritual hierarchy [Satans team of fallen angels including the Antichrist] is 2025.

.Thus a great and new movement is proceeding and a tremendously increased interplay and interaction is taking place. This will go on until A.D. 2025. During the years intervening between now and then very great changes will be seen taking place, and at the great General Assembly of the Hierarchy - held as usual every century - in 2025 the

date in all probability will be set for the first stage of the externalization of the Hierarchy..329 329 Bailey, Alice. The Externalization of the Hierarchy. New York: Lucis Trust. 1957. 530

The physical appearance of Satans spiritual hierarchy in the year 2025 is exactly what the Jubilee Finder is indicating. The halfway point of the 70th Week of Daniel, where the Antichrist will reveal his true identity to the world and will introduce Satans fallen angels to the world, is projected by the model to occur in April 2025!

Conclusion People have attempted to predict when the end times will begin for centuries. Many people have made emotion predictions that their generation was living in the end times as they saw their world fall apart around them. Other people have based their claims on calculations that have little to no Biblical basis. Regardless of what method is used, each generation inevitably concludes that they are living in the end times. I base my prediction that the 70th week of Daniel will begin around autumn 2021 on calculations that have a strong Biblical basis. In addition, I have confirmation from a fallen angel telling his followers what to expect. The potential of having the 70th week of Daniel begin within 12 years from now is a very startling notion. If the 70th week of Daniel begins in autumn 2021 then global conditions must deteriorate dramatically in a very short period of time. Global change must so quick and violent that it is almost assured that you will not recognize this world ten years from now. If you read my chapter about the Roadmap to the Rise of the New World Order you know that such change is coming.

Bibliography Baker, David L. .The Jubilee and the Millennium. Holy Years in the Bible and Their Relevance Today,. Themelios 24.1 (October 1998): 44-69. Blainey, Geoffrey. The Causes of War. New York: Free Press. 1988. Dwyer, David. .Chronology of Jubilees.. 2007. Last Accessed 04 Jul. 08. http://www.creationanswers.com/chronoj.htm. Josephus, Flavius. .The Antiquities of the Jews.. Trans. William Whiston

Vanhoye, Albert. .The Jubilee Year in the Gospel of Luke.. Theological Historical Commission. 1997. Last Accessed 04 Jul. 08 http://www.vatican.va/jubilee_2000/magazine/documents/ju_mag_01031997_p22_en.html.

Appendix The Jubilee Finders results imply that Jesuss ministry was between 4 and 5 years in length since He began His ministry in 28 A.D. and was crucified in 33 A.D. Many Christian ministers argue that Jesuss ministry was 3 years in length. However, there is nothing in the Bible that tells us that Jesuss ministry was exactly 3 years in length. The Bible indicates that Jesuss ministry was at least three years in length because He observed at least 3 Passovers in His ministry. The Jubilee Finder is unable to consistently predict Sabbath Years after the time of Alexander the Great. The primary reason why the Jubilee Finder cannot predict Sabbath Years consistently after Alexander the Great is because the Jews seemingly stopped observing Jubilee Years around this time period. The ultimate test of the Jubilee Finders viability is whether its findings can be used to create an accurate Bible chronology that supports the inerrancy of the Biblical text. For instance, the Jubilee Finder predicts that the construction of Solomons Temple began in 976 B.C. since it began in the 480th year after 1455 B.C. Exodus. The Jubilee Finder is viable if an accurate timeline can be constructed that dates events like the beginning of construction of Solomons Temple in the year predicted by the Jubilee Finder. I am very confident that the Jubilee Finder can pass this test because I have already seen some people develop Biblical chronologies that dates events around the same year as the Jubilee Finder. For instance, Thomas J. Short created a Bible chronology that has many key dates within a year of the dates predicted by the Jubilee Finder. The reason for this one year difference is that Short uses a 587 B.C. date for the

destruction of Solomons Temple instead of 586 B.C. If Short used 586 B.C. instead of 587 B.C as his anchor date and change some of his assumptions330 then his chronology would perfectly support the Jubilee Finders results. You can download Shorts chronology by clicking this link. 330 This includes Shorts incorrect interpretation of the 70 Weeks of Daniel prophecy The reason why I created a calendar that has the 69th Jubilee as the next Jubilee Year is that this enables the Jubilee Finder to date events that are nearby the dates of other timelines. The idea of having the 70th Week of Daniel end at the beginning of the 70th Jubilee Year is a very appealing idea, but there is nothing in the Bible that says the 70th week of Daniel must end on the 70th Jubilee Year. Nevertheless, there will be a 70th Jubilee Year at some point in the future because Ezekiel 46 indicates that the Jubilee Cycle will continue during the Millennium Kingdom.

o Eze 46:17 But if he give a gift of his inheritance to one of his servants, then it shall be his to the year of liberty; after it shall return to the prince: but his inheritance shall be his sons' for them.

David Dwyers article .Chronology of Jubilees. was very helpful in enabling me to identify instances of Sabbath Years and Jubilee Years. You can access his studying by clicking this link.

21. What Can You Do About it All?

A prudent man foresees the difficulties ahead and prepares for them; the simpleton goes blindly on and suffers the consequences. Proverbs 22:3

Introduction If you are new to studying the prophecy or know everything about it you have probably asked yourself something along the lines of, .What can I do? Surely, there has to be something I can do with this information. at some point. I have heard multiple people tell me that there is nothing that you can do. I feel this conclusion is complete nonsense and is used as an excuse to avoid facing up to reality. In fact, the Bible tells us that it is wise to prepare for difficulties we foresee and foolish not to.

o Pro: 22:3 A prudent man foresees the difficulties ahead and prepares for them; the simpleton goes blindly on and suffers the consequences.

This chapter is devoted to providing you with information and resources to help you survive not only the oncoming crisis period but also the end times.

Get Saved First and foremost, if you are not a Christian please become one and get saved right away! Here is a website that will help you get saved. . http://www.jesus-is-lord.com/2_heaven.htm

If you are an unsaved Jew reading this you can still retain your ethnic Jewish identity while becoming a Christian. A Jewish Christian is known as a .Messianic Jew.. Jews for Jesus is an organization spreading the gospel to Jews around the world. Here is a section of their website devoted to helping unsaved Jews get saved: . http://jewsforjesus.org/getsaved

Warn Others You should attempt to warn others about what is to come in the future so that they do not fall into Satans various traps that I have highlighted throughout my book. You must realize that you are being armed with knowledge that few people will ever discover exists. Therefore, you have the potential to make a big difference in influencing the eventual fate of individuals with the choices you make about dispersing this knowledge. Only a small number of people will learn this knowledge, but it is highly unlikely that they will learn this knowledge studying on their own or by listening to mainstream Bible Prophecy teachers. Therefore, you should spread this knowledge to others so that those who are meant to learn this knowledge can actually learn it. Daniel 12:3 hints that the award is great for those who are wise and those who lead others .to righteousness..

o Dan 12:3 And they that be wise shall shine as the brightness of the firmament; and they that turn many to righteousness as the stars for ever and ever.

Contribute Your Insights You can help to contribute to our understanding of the past, the present, and the future by sharing your insights with others. I have established a collaboration group where you can contribute your insights so that others can potentially learn from what you have to say. You do not have to be an expert to make a valuable contribution. Past, current, and future events cannot be understood fully without also having at least an understanding in economics, finance, politics, and several other subjects. For example, your knowledge about the earths magnetic field may help us understand what is actually happening when the heavens roll up like a scroll during the 6th Seal. You can find this group by clicking this link.

Make Preparations You need to approach the next several years as a prolonged disaster. People generally prepare for oncoming disasters that they know are coming in advance so it is common sense that you do the same for the upcoming crisis period.

Preparing for Hyperinflation In my Roadmap to the Rise of the New World Order chapter, I demonstrated that global hyperinflation is on its way. Hyperinflation is a devastating phenomenon that will impoverish

anyone who is unprepared for it. Even though the start of the 70th Week of Daniel is still many years away, your life will be so miserable that it might as well be the end for you and your family if you are caught unprepared for hyperinflation. Here are a couple of websites that provide ideas of what you can do to prepare you and your family for hyperinflation: . http://www.ehow.com/how_4546748_survive-sudden-economic-collapse.html . http://www.reuters.com/article/pressRelease/idUS176694+02-Apr2009+PRN20090402

Preparing for Nuclear War Also in my Roadmap to the Rise of the New World Order chapter, I also demonstrated that there must be a very destructive global war preceding the rise of Antichrist. I anticipate this global war will involve the use of conventional weapons at the beginning, but at some point escalate to the point that nuclear weapons are used as they are the weapons that cause the most damage to a belligerent enemy. Here are a couple of websites that provide ideas of what you can do to prepare for nuclear war and its aftermath: . http://nuclearsurvivalist.com/Prepare.cfm . http://www.secretsofsurvival.com/survival/nuclear_winter.html

Preparing for Other Disasters During the time leading to the beginning of the 70th Week of Daniel we are going to see an increase in natural disasters i.e. earthquakes and an increase in the prevalence of pestilence. Below are two links to give you ideas how to survive a major earthquake, a link to help you survive a global flu pandemic, and a link to help you survive a biological/chemical attack. . http://geology.com/articles/earthquake-safety.shtml . http://www.bt.cdc.gov/disasters/earthquakes/ . http://www.survival-spot.com/survival-blog/survive-a-flu-outbreak/

. http://www.sightm1911.com/lib/other/nbc.htm

Preparing for the Great Tribulation Dr. Charles Cooper wrote a book analyzing a Christians prospects in surviving the Great Tribulation. While I have not read the book, a pamphlet was sent to me from his ministry

summarizing the main message of his book. The pamphlet revealed that Cooper believes it is futile to resist Antichrist because the forces of evil will have too much technology. While I agree that it will be extremely difficult to survive the Great Tribulation with Antichrists advanced technology, rabid followers, and fallen angels roaming the earth, I do not believe that resistance is completely futile in one area of the world (see my message to Messianic Jews below for a complete explanation). At this moment, I think that the Great Tribulation is slated to last between one and two years. During this time buying essentials like food and water will be nearly impossible with the Mark of the Beast system in place, with people willing to snitch on other people, and with some fallen angels likely posing as humans. Therefore, you likely need over a years worth of supplies prepositioned in a safe area to give you and your family the best chance to survive the Great Tribulation. However, there is perhaps one potential way to circumvent the Mark of the Beast system. Ezekiel 7:19 and Zephaniah 1:18 indicate that gold and silver will be used as currency by people as people will be carrying both items around with them on the streets.

o Eze 7:19 They shall cast their silver in the streets, and their gold shall be removed: their silver and their gold shall not be able to deliver them in the day of the wrath of the LORD: they shall not satisfy their souls, neither fill their bowels: because it is the stumblingblock of their iniquity.

o Zep 1:18 Neither their silver nor their gold shall be able to deliver them in the day of the LORD'S wrath; but the whole land shall be devoured by the fire of his jealousy: for he shall make even a speedy riddance of all them that dwell in the land.

It may be possible to pay off some people during the Great Tribulation to provide you with essential supplies by using gold and silver. However, I would not advise doing something like this unless there are no other alternatives. Enduring more than a year without the ability to purchase the essentials of life is a very daunting task for anyone. However, you may be given divine assistance to help you endure the Great Tribulation. Christs message to the Church of Philadelphia in Revelation 3 promises that those who keep the Word of God and remain patient will be kept .out of the hour of trial..

o Rev 3:7 And to the angel of the church in Philadelphia write; These things saith he that is holy, he that is true, he that hath the key of David, he that openeth, and no man shutteth; and shutteth, and no man openeth; o Rev 3:8 I know thy works: behold, I have set before thee an open door, and no man can shut it: for thou hast a little strength, and hast kept my word, and hast not denied my name.

o Rev 3:9 Behold, I will make them of the synagogue of Satan, which say they are Jews, and are not, but do lie; behold, I will make them to come and worship before thy feet, and to know that I have loved thee. o Rev 3:10 Because thou hast kept the word of my patience, I also will keep thee from the hour of temptation, which shall come upon all the world, to try them that dwell upon the earth. o Rev 3:11 Behold, I come quickly: hold that fast which thou hast, that no man take thy crown.

This passage does not mean that Christians will be removed or .raptured out. before the Great Tribulation begins. According to the late Robert Van Kampen, .=Keep in this context, translates a Greek verb that carries the basic idea of protection while within a sphere of danger, and .from., a bad translation of the Greek word ek, has the basic meaning of deliverance =out of or =out from within this dangerous time..331 In other words, faithful believers will be given a degree of divine protection from the dangers that exist in .the hour of testing. or the Great Tribulation. Van Kampen, Robert Van. The Sign (Updated Edition). Wheaton: Crossway Books, 1999: 34

A Message to Messianic Jews If you are Messianic Jew I suggest that you try to warn people about what is going to come in the future and to try to get unsaved Jews saved. You and non-Jewish Christians will face many challenges evangelizing as the end times approaches, but Jesus instructs you to persevere through all the difficulties you will face with hostile people.

o Mar 13:9 But take heed to yourselves: for they shall deliver you up to councils; and in the synagogues ye shall be beaten: and ye shall be brought before rulers and kings for my sake,

for a testimony against them. o Mar 13:11 But when they shall lead you, and deliver you up, take no thought beforehand what ye shall speak, neither do ye premeditate: but whatsoever shall be given you in that hour, that speak ye: for it is not ye that speak, but the Holy Ghost. o Mar 13:12 Now the brother shall betray the brother to death, and the father the son; and children shall rise up against their parents, and shall cause them to be put to death. o Mar 13:13 And ye shall be hated of all men for my name's sake: but he that shall endure unto the end, the same shall be saved.

Recall that the Jews will begin to resist the Antichrist via guerilla warfare in the wilderness areas of Israel during the 2nd half of the 70th Week of Daniel (Zech 12:6 and 14:14). For a Jewish resistance to have the capacity to inflict major damage on Antichrists forces there almost has to be some preplanning and preparations made before the fight begins. Therefore, I think it would be wise to not only attempt to save unsaved Jews but to also urge people to plan and make preparations for a future counter resistance against Antichrist in the wilderness areas of Israel.

A Forecast of the Future Current 5-Year Forecast Below is a general description of some events/trends I think you will see happen/develop within the next five years. I plan on expanding on some of these listings in future editions of this book or future research reports.

Political/Geopolitical . The Republican Party will make huge political gains in the 2010 Mid-Term Election. . There will be a Civil War in Iraq leading to the dissolution of the country into potentially 3 pieces . China and Taiwan will be much closer to reuniting . The 2012 U.S. Presidential Election will occur during the most tumultuous time in our nations history. . There will be a viable 3rd party in American politics by the 2012 Election

Economic . Standards of living will decline significantly in Western countries . Long-term interest rates will at least rise to levels that havent been seen since the early 1980s . Increased government interference in our economy and much higher taxes. . The overall stock market (measured by the S&P 500) will underperform many asset classes, especially commodities. o This does not mean that the stock market wont go up. This simply means that someone invested in the market will not be able to keep up with the rise in prices of commodities such as natural gas. . The dollar will lose its status as the international reserve currency . The deflationary period that the worlds economy is currently experiencing will continue for a little bit longer. Afterwards the U.S. will experience a Weimar Germany style hyperinflation followed up by a global hyperinflation, which will completely destroy the value of money worldwide.

. Global economic growth outside the U.S. will be hampered by a shortfall in oil and natural gas production

Social . Increase social unrest in Western Europe and the U.S. . Continued decline in moral values . Increased tensions between the wealthy and the poor

Long-Range Forecast Below is a general description of some events/trends I think you will see happen/develop within the next 6 to 10 years. I plan on expanding on some of these listings in future editions of this book or future research reports.

Political/Geopolitical . Increased frequency of conflict: regional wars and eventually world war over dwindling resources . Russia will become extremely powerful as it uses its energy supplies and control of pipelines to blackmail Europe . China will seek control of the natural resources of Siberia . The U.S. will slip into a period of political chaos where there could potentially be multiple changes in leadership in short period of time (sometimes peaceful and sometimes violent), but in the end democracy will be replaced by authoritarianism. . Authoritarian regimes should be on the rise throughout the globe while the number of democratic regimes should be on the decline.

Economic & Finance . The wealthiest countries of the world will be in Asia-not Europe . Most people worldwide will be impoverished and will be happy to receive the minimum necessities to live. . There will be significant restrictions on financial speculation and perhaps the outright elimination of some markets like the commodities market. . There will be a new monetary system based on barter

Social . Jews will become the scapegoat for the economic problems seen globally

. Jews living in regions experiencing economic turmoil will flee to live in Israel . Tensions between different ethnic communities will escalate to the point that ethnicmotivated violence will become one of the most frequent crimes committed (especially in the U.S.) . Many laws will no longer be adhered to in countries that experience economic and social unrest like the U.S. . Morals are thrown out the window as survival becomes most peoples primary concern . By 2019 humanity will be badly shattered and will be in desperate need for someone to save them.

Spiritual Forecast of the Future Here is a summary of the deceptive tactics I believe Satan will use in chronological order to deceive the people on Earth from the present to the end times.

. UFO sightings continue to erode at the confidence of Christians and believers from other religions. . Fallen Angels posing as .ministers of light. deceive people to adopt unbiblical practices and to turn away from Christianity. . The Ascended Masters continue to pave the way for the rise of Antichrist, the False Prophet, and the return of fallen angels. . Antichrist fools people by making people believe he is peaceful while he hides his true identity . Antichrist deceives the world by claiming that he is resurrected from the dead when he really is not. . False Prophet stuns unsuspecting Christians by claiming that he is the real Jesus when he is actually a fallen angel. . Many fallen angels that are cast to Earth will blend into the human population by adopting human form. Other fallen angels will appear to people as false prophets and Messiahs. . Kill anyone who opposes Antichrist

Simplified End Times Timeline This section is meant to help those new to end times prophecy to understand where/when events described in the Bible will occur. Not every event that will occur during the end times or has occurred in the past has been included in this timeline. If I added every event that is projected to occur, this timeline may last forever! However, I have attempted to include every major event possible in this timeline. Studying the end times is like putting a puzzle together. Sometimes you have to rearrange things to make fit better, so this timeline is subject to change.

Daniels First 69 Weeks: April 19, 444BC to May 13, 33AD (The Date Christ Ascended to Heaven) . Daniel 9:24-26 . Nehemiah 2:1, 5

The Book of Revelation is Written: Likely During the Time of Nero

The Scattering of the Jews/Beginning of the 7th Curse: Roman Invasion of Jerusalem in 70AD . Daniel 9:26 . Deuteronomy 28:64-67

The Brief Appearance of the Mysterious 7th King of Revelation 17: Adolf Hitler (19331945) . Revelation 17:10

The End of the Final Curse and the Reappearance of Israel (1948) . Deuteronomy 30:1-30:5

The Latter Times (Distinct from the End Times): Shaping the World for the End Times to Begin . False Teachers and False Messiahs o Matthew 24:4-5 o Mark 13:5-6

o Luke 21:8 o 1 Timothy 4:1-3

. Wars and Rumors of Wars o Matthew 24:6-7 o Mark 13:7-8 o Luke 21:9-10

. Political Instability o Luke 21:9

. Jews Worldwide Relocate to Israel o Ezkiel 38:12

. 3 Kingdoms Overthrown o Daniel 7:24 o Ezekiel 38:2 (Potential Identity of the 3 Kingdoms)

1st Seal: Beginning of the 70th Week of Daniel (The End Times Begin)

. Appearance of the Antichrist and the Signing of the 7 Year Treaty o Daniel 9:27 o Isaiah 28:14-15 o Revelation 6:1-6:2

2nd Seal: War

Antichrist adding other countries to his empire through war and political positioning . Revelation 6:3-4 . Daniel 11:35-11:43 . Ezekiel 38:1-17 . War in Heaven/Fallen Angel Invasion

o Revelation 12:7-12:11

Antichrist Breaks the Covenant Half Way (3 Yrs or 1260 Days) through Daniels 70th Week . Daniel 9:27 . Daniel 11:44 . Isaiah 28:18 . Isaiah 22

. Antichrist Establishes the Abomination that Causes Desolation o Daniel 9:27 o Matthew 24:15 o Mark 13:14 o Luke 21:20 o Daniel 12:11

. Antichrist Reveals His True Identity in the Third Jewish Temple in Jerusalem (which hasnt been built yet), Stuns Most of the World, and Demands the World to Worship Him o Daniel 11:45 o Revelation 17:8 o 2 Thessalonians 2:3-2:4 o Isaiah 28:19 o Revelation 13:3-6

. The Appearance of the Two Witnesses in Jerusalem: Elijah and Probably Moses o Revelation 11:3-6, 8

o Zechariah Ch. 4 o Malachi 4:5 (Elijah) o Jude 1:9 (Moses)

. The Appearance of the False Prophet o Revelation 13:11-15

. Great Tribulation or Wrath of Satan is underway o Revelation 12:12, 17 o Revelation 13:7-13:10 o Matthew 24:9-13, 21-26 o Mark 13:9, 11-13, 19-23 o Luke 21:12-19, 24 o Daniel 7:25

3rd Seal: Rationing . Revelation 6:5-6 . One World Religion Established o Rev. 17:4-5 . The Antichrists Mark System is Established o Revelation 13:16-18

4th Seal: Death: Great Tribulation Continues . Revelation 6:7-8

5th Seal: Martyrs: Great Tribulation is still not complete . Revelation 6:9-11 . Kingdom of Heaven that John the Baptist Foreshadowed is Preached to the World o Matthew 3:1-3:12 o Matthew 24:14 o Mark 13:10 o Revelation 14:6-7

. The Largest Army of All-Time is brought to The Valley of Decision (Jerusalem) o Joel 2:1-2:11 o Joel 3:11-3:15

6th Seal

Rapture/Great Tribulation Ends (Projected to be 4 Years through the 70th Week of Daniel)

. Heavenly Signs o Revelation 6:12-6:14 o Matthew 24:29 o Mark 13:24-25 o Luke 21:25-26 o 2 Peter 3:10 o Joel 3:14-15

. The Lord Appears to the Entire Planet o Revelation 6:15-17 o Matthew 24:30-51 o Revelation 14:14-16 o Mark 13:26-37 o Luke 21:27-38 o 1 Thessalonians 4:15-18

. Antichrist is Significantly Weakened by Christs Appearance o 2 Thessalonians 2:8

. 144,000 Sealed o Revelation 7:1-8

. Gathering of the Raptured in Heaven o Revelation 7:9-17

7th Seal/Day of the Lord/Wrath of God is Triggered . Revelation 8:1-8:6

1st Trumpet . Revelation 8:7

2nd Trumpet . Revelation 8:8-9

3rd Trumpet . Revelation 8:10-11

4th Trumpet Revelation 8:12-13

5th Trumpet (5 Months of Locusts) . Revelation 9:1-12

6th Trumpet . Likely Another Global War o Revelation 9:13-9:21 o Zechariah 1:17-21

End of the 70th Week of Daniel-Yom Kippur (Daniel 9:24 and Leviticus 26:39-42) . Beginning of the Jubilee Year o Leviticus Ch. 25 o Isaiah 61:1-3 o Isaiah 63:4 o Other Versus . Jesuss 3rd coming to Save the Surviving Jews o Revelation Ch. 10 (Debatable) o Hosea 6:3 o Micah 2:12-13 o Isaiah 63:1-3

. Two Witnesses Killed o Revelation 11:7-10

. The Remnant of Israel is Officially Saved in Jerusalem o Zechariah 12:7-14 o Revelation 14:1-5

. Two Witnesses Resurrected o Revelation 11:11-14 . The Lord Splits Mt. Olives to Provide a Hiding Place for the Jews o Zechariah 14:4-5

7th Trumpet . Revelation 11:15-19 o Judgment of the Elect

. Revelation Ch 15

1st Bowl

. Revelation 16:1-2

2nd Bowl . Revelation 16:3

3rd Bowl . Revelation 16:4-7

4th Bowl . Revelation 16:8-9

5th Bowl Revelation 16:10-11

6th Bowl (Nations Assemble to Megiddo for the Battle of Armageddon) . Revelation 16:12-16

7th Bowl . The Destruction of Babylon the Great o Revelation 17:16-17 o Revelation Ch: 18

. The Battle of Armageddon o Ezekiel 38:18-23 o Ezekiel Ch 39 o Revelation 19:11-21 o Revelation 11:19 o Revelation 14:17-20

End of the Day of the Lord (30 Days after the End of Daniels 70th Week)

. Daniel 9:27 . Daniel 12:1

1000 Year Kingdom . Revelation 20:4-10

. Sheep and Goat Judgment o Matthew 25:32-46

. New Heaven, Earth and Jerusalem o Revelation Ch 21-Ch 22

. Final Judgment o Revelation 20:11-15

Glossary of Terms Here I attempt to define some of the most frequently used terms throughout my book.

Adolf Hitler: Leader of the Third Reich (the 7th Beast Empire) and the mastermind of the Holocaust. Ascended Master Djwhal Khul states that Hitlers body was controlled by one of the highest-level evil spirits that Satan has at his disposal. Benjamin Creme even goes far to state that Hitler possessed Antichrist energy. Hitler, in my mind, is the most likely candidate to be king from Revelation 17 that is restored to be Antichrist the man.

Alice Bailey: One of the most prolific New Age authors in history. She wrote 24 books while being in telepathic communication with Ascended Master Djwhal Khul (basically, Bailey wrote the words that Khul placed into her mind). Bailey also founded several occult organizations, including, Lucis Trust (formerly known as Lucifer Trust) and the Arcane School. Baileys work is the backbone of the teachings of many New Age teachers.

Antichrist: A deceiving spirit that claims Jesus is not the Christ, that He did not come in flesh, and is not the Son of God. This spirit has been around for thousands of years, including during the time of the New Testament (see 1 John Ch. 2 and Ch. 4). The spirit will ultimately manifest itself in a man one day who will claim that he is god and will demand the world to worship him (see Maitreya).

Ascended Masters: A title given in the New Age Movement to spiritual beings who amount to high-level fallen angels. Ascended Masters role is to serve as Satans top lieutenants in charge

of implementing his diabolical plan. They work with other fallen angels and mankind so that mankind is deceived and that Satans agenda is advanced. During the end times the Ascended Masters will physically transform to mimic famous religious figures to deceive people into accepting the New Age Religion.

Babylon the Great, Mother of Harlots: a false religious system whose roots originated in ancient Babylon and whose practices also have permeated in other religious systems as Babylon is the mother (the originator) of the abominations of the earth. Babylon the Great represents the New Age Religion whose has its roots in the ancient mystery schools of ancient Babylon.

Babylon the Great City: The capital city of the world during the reign of the Antichrist. The city receives its status because it rules over the leaders of all other countries. Jerusalem, not Rome, is most likely going to be Babylon the Great City as it is the only city in the Book of Revelation that is described as a .great city.. In addition, Daniel 11:44-45 notes that Antichrist will set up his .palace tents. or home in the holy mountain, Mount Zion, which is located in Jerusalem. Finally, the Antichrist is prophesized in 2 Thessalonians 2:3-4 to sit in the Temple of Jerusalem and will declare himself to be god.

Seven Beast Empires/Kings: Satan has used several rulers/empires in an attempt to prevent the birth and eventual eternal reign of Jesus Christ. To prevent the birth of this child and his eventual reign, Satan has persecuted and attempted to annihilate the Jewish people. The kings and empires/kingdoms that Satan has used to try to achieve his goal are presented in the table below: The Seven Empires and Rulers of Revelation 17:10 Ruler Empire/Kingdom What He is Notorious For Verse Pharaoh Ahmoses I Egyptian Kingdom Seeking to Kill All Jewish Males Exodus 1:10-16, 1920, 22

Sennacherib Assyrian Empire Seeking to Destroy the Royal Line of Israel and Scattering the Ten Northern Tribes of Israel 2 Kings 18:17-35 Nebuchadnezzar Babylonian Empire Destroying the First Temple, Deporting Jews to Babylon Daniel 2:37-38, 2 Chron 36:6-7, 2 Kings 25:8-9, Jer 52:28-30 Haman Persia Empire Seeking to Kill All the Jews living in the Persian Empire Esther 3:8-14 Antiochus Epiphanies IV Seleucid Kingdom Seeking to Destroy the Jewish Religion and Persecuting the Jews Daniel 11:1-34, Book of Maccabbees Nero

Roman Empire The King Alive at Johns Time Revelation 17:10 Adolf Hitler Third Reich Killing 6 Million Jews, Seeking to Destroy Christianity Revelation 17:10

Benjamin Creme: Benjamin Creme is a British artist and official spokesperson for Maitreya, a being he and his predecessors claim is the long-awaited Messiah for Christians, Jews, Muslims, Hindus, and Buddhists and a being who I consider to be the spirit of Antichrist spoken of in 1 John 4. Since 1977 Creme has preached the message of Maitreya and his Ascended Master counterparts. He has written several books and runs a UN sponsored organization called Share International. Creme also travels around the world to provide his message to people in person. Christians that attend Cremes lectures leave no longer doubting that this man is empowered by evil.

Birth Pangs: A time period prior to the end times (described in Matthew 24, Mark 13, and Luke 21) where there will be political instability, wars, rumors of war, famine, earthquakes, etc. The birth pangs analogy is a very important one to analyze because it reveals about how severe this time period will be. Birth pangs begin with initial pain followed by a period of relative painlessness. However, as time goes on the frequency that the pain is felt increases. Therefore, the frequency of war will increase, the frequency where there are rumors of war will increase, the frequency of revolutions will increase, etc as we approach the start of the end times.

Covenant with Death: A seven year treaty that the man who will be the Antichrist will present to Israel and non-Israelis involved in peace talks at the start of the 70th week of Daniel. The treaty will cover at least four areas: the status of Jerusalem, worship on the Temple Mount, Palestinian Independence, and Israeli sovereignty. In addition, the treaty may also involve the Antichrist guarantying the security of Israel. Isaiah 28:15 indicates that Israelis leaders will be so overconfident that they will be protected by this covenant that they believe they will not be harmed even the world is collapsing around them. The leaders of Israel will be stunned when the Antichrist will break the treaty way through the 70th week of Daniel.

Day of the Lord: A term synonymous with the Wrath of God spanning the Seven Trumpet Judgments and the Seven Bowl Judgments. During this time God will punish the earth and nonbelievers for their acceptance of the Antichrist and will destroy the Antichrist and his empire.

Deflation: A decline in the supply of money and credit in the economy. A symptom of deflation

is declining asset prices for assets like houses, stocks, art, etc. People typically define deflation as falling prices, but that definition characterizes the symptoms of deflation instead of the causes of deflation. Deflation benefits those who save because the value of their savings increase while those who owe money are hurt as the real value of what they owe increases.

The Divine Plan: A euphemism used by New Agers to describe the plan that Satan has devised for the time he will cast to Earth. The purpose of Satans plan is to maximize the number of people he fools and the number of opponents he kills in the limited time he will be given. The plan includes the Antichrist ruling the world through a one-world government and oneworld economy, fooling people to accept the New Age Religion by having fallen angels to pose as famous religious figures (like Jesus) to persuade people to adopt the religion, and unleashing UFOs to persuade people to also follow the Antichrist and his religion. Of course, most New Agers are completely unaware of what Satan truly has planned because they believe the lies that this plan is benevolent.

Djwhal Khul: An Ascended Master (Fallen Angel) who telepathetically wrote books through Alice Bailey (Djwhal Khul communicated the words and Bailey wrote them) between 1919 and 1949. In New Age circles Djwhal Khul is known as .the Tibetan. for his physical resemblance to a man from Tibet.

The Elect: The group of believers who will survive the Great Tribulation so that Jesus will have a remnant left on Earth to rescue when the Rapture comes.

End Times: A time period when major prophetic events described in the scriptures are occurring with frequency. The end times begin with the 70th week of Daniel and continue on through the establishment of the Millennium Kingdom.

Fallen Angel: An angel that has been expelled from Heaven. Most fallen angels joined Satan during his original fall from grace while others fell afterwards. Fallen angels have the ability to shape-shift into different physical forms, which enable them to deceive people into believing that they are someone else. Fallen angels are key contributors to Satans plan as they are used as entities of worship and pose as famous religious figures, such as Jesus and the Virgin Mary (see Jesus Sananda Immanuel).

False Prophet: The individual who will deceive many people on Earth and to bring them to worship the Antichrist. He is also known as the beast of the earth; however, what is very interesting about the beasts description is that he resembles a lamb, but speaks like a dragon. The False Prophet is able to convince many people to worship Antichrist by performing great

signs, such as causing fire to come down from heaven. Interestingly enough, Satan has a representative who fits the description given of the False Prophet in Revelation 13 perfectly. Satans representative is a fallen angel/Ascended Master who calls himself .Jesus Sananda Immanuel. (Sananda for short) or the .Master Jesus.. Sananda is an imposter for Jesus of Nazareth, is described by Benjamin Creme as Maitreyas right-hand man, and is said to be interested in unifying the worlds religions. Sananda also seems to be the False Prophet because he will physically remind people of Jesus so much that people will believe that it is actually Him.

Great Tribulation: a period of time when Jews and Christians will be severely persecuted for their religious beliefs. Revelation 12, Revelation 13, and Daniel 7 describe this period as a time when Satan (through Antichrist) will make war with believers. Revelation 13:7 and Daniel 7:21 even go as far as to say that Antichrist will be able to .overcome. saints (or those who uphold

.the testimony of Jesus Christ..332 The Great Tribulation will begin at the halfway point of the 70th Week of Daniel and will continue until the time of the Rapture, which is after the opening of the 6th Seal and before the opening of the 7th Seal. 332 Revelation 14:12 proves that .saints. and those who uphold .testimony of Jesus Christ. are the same group of people: Rev 14:12 Here is the patience of the saints; here are the ones keeping the commands of God, and the faith of Jesus. 333 Judge, William Q. .Authorship of the Secret Doctrine.. The Path. 1893. <http://www.blavatsky.net/theosophy/judge/articles/authorship-of-secret-doctrine.htm>.

Gog: A biblical name given in Ezekiel 38 and 39 for the man who will be Antichrist.

Helena P. Blavatsky: The Russian women who I consider to be the founder of the New Age Movement. In 1875 Blavatsky founded the Theosophical Society, which still remains one of the premiere occult organizations today that supposedly teaches divine secrets. Blavatsky is most well-known for writing the occult books Isis Unveiled and The Secret Doctrine, which was a book that Adolf Hitler revered. Blavatskys works appear to be satanically inspired since she claimed to have received special training from the Ascended Masters and to have received help from them, particularly an Ascended Master named Koot Hoomi, when writing them.333 In fact, there is a photo of Blavatsky posing with Koot Hoomi and two other Ascended Masters, which can be accessed by clicking this link.

Hyperinflation: A period of rapid increases in the supply of money and/or credit. Hyperinflation is accomplied by rapidly rising prices of all assets. Hyperinflation is devastating

to a society because it destroys the value of money. The people who save their money and creditors are the most impoverished by hyperinflation while those who own money benefit the most as the real value of the money they owe is virtually reduce to nothing. Global hyperinflation appears to be the mechanism that will destroy the value of all currencies and will usher in a need to adopt a new global currency.

Jesus Sananda Immanuel: An Ascended Master who is the New Age counterfeit of Jesus of Nazareth (also goes by the Master Jesus). He is most likely the False Prophet since he is supposed to work in very close conjunction with Maitreya and is primarily interested in linking all faiths together into a one-world religion. In fact, the plan is for Sananda to have direct control over the papacy as he works to persuade Christians to accept Maitreya. Thus, he fulfills Revelation 13:12 where he looks like a lamb physically but speaks like a dragon.

Jubilee Year: A special Sabbath Year observed once every 50 years after the completion of the 7th Sabbath Year. A Jubilee Year begins on Yom Kippur (Tishri 10 on the Jewish calendar) with the sounding of a rams horn. At the beginning of a Jubilee Year people are obligated to return items to their original owners, including land, (Lev 25:10, 13, 23-28) and grant freedom to their servants/slaves (Lev 25:39-54). Since a Jubilee Year is another Sabbath Year it is another year of rest for the land (Lev 25:12). There is a strong indication in end-time prophecy that the 70th week of Daniel will end at the beginning of a Jubilee Year (See Isa 61:2, Isa 58, and Luke 4).

Latter Times (en husterois kairois in Greek): A time period different from the end-times because the conditions described during this time are different from the conditions that will be prevalent in the .last days. (en eschatais hemerais in Greek). The world of the latter times is described by Paul as having people leaving their faith for alternative religions that teach people amongst other things to not to marry and not to eat meat. Birth pangs also begin during this time period.

Magog, Land of: The geographic region where the people who represented the peoplegroup Magog live and the region where man who will ultimately be the Antichrist will originate from. According to Josephus, the Magogites were Scythians-a tribe that lived throughout Eurasia. Over the centuries, the Scythians died off and intermingled with other tribes. However, the people who live in now Russian-controlled Ossetia claim that they are the direct descendants of the Scythians. The man who will ultimately be Antichrist is expected to arise from Ossetia, take over Russia (Rosh), and then take control of Armenia (Meshech) and the Republic of Georgia (Tubal).

Maitreya: The name of the spirit of the Antichrist referred to by John. In New Age circles Maitreya is the Messiah expected by Christians, Jews, Muslims, Hindus, and Buddhists. Hitler referred to him as the .coming man. and the .Messiah. who would arise after him.

Mark of the Beast: The Mark of the Beast is an imprint that will be placed on a persons right hand or forehead after he or she participates in a special initiation process that will stealthily link their loyalty to Satan. The mark will be used as proof that a person took the initiation, and no person may buy or sell without having the mark. The mark will either be the name of the Antichrist or the number of the Antichrist. Maitreyas name calculates to 666 when using Hebrew and Greek gemetria (seven different spelling variation of Maitreyas name in Hebrew equal 666).

Meshech: The geographic region where the people who represented the people-group Meshech live. The area where Meshech lives now will be one of the ten countries that will be part of the Antichrists Empire and one of the three countries that Antichrist will begin with first. The territory of Meshech corresponds to the territory of modern day country of Armenia.

Mid-Tribulation Rapture (Mid-Trib): a viewpoint that posits that the Rapture will take place when the Antichrist reveals his true identity halfway through a seven year period. Those who believe in this viewpoint believe the Wrath of God will begin immediately after the Antichrist reveals himself and establishes his earthly kingdom. The Mid-Trib position is flawed because the Wrath of Satan-not the Wrath of God-will begin 3 and years through the 70th week of Daniel when Antichrist will desecrate a Temple in Jerusalem. Another major problem for the Mid-Trib position is that it sets an exact time for the Rapture to occur (when Antichrist reveals his true identity) which Jesus said cannot be known.

New Age Movement: a religious movement synthesizing all of the worlds religions to create a one-world religious system and government. Followers of the movement promote the unification of Eastern Religions with Western Religion as they claim that all paths lead to God. The New Age Movements attempt to merge the worlds religions to create one universal religion is essentially an attempt by Satan to reassemble the ancient Babylonian mystery religion as the religious practices followers of the New Age Movement adhere to are simply the same practices that followers of the ancient Babylon religion followed (see Babylon the Great, Mother of Harlots)

New Group of World Servers: An organization founded in 1922 comprising a loose network of individuals who serve the effort to create a one world government, religion, economy, etc. The group helps bring a one-world government, religion, economy, etc by influencing public opinion to the point where the public demands leaders from all fields to bring global unity. There are several million people associated with this group, including some very influential, wealthy, and well-known individuals and organizations. Most people are unaware that they are working for evil while a small, inner circle work under direct supervision of the Ascended Masters.

New World Order: A future, one-world political, economic, financial, and religious system under the control of Antichrist. The economic and financial component will have Antichrist controlling the excess resources of countries, pricing, business activity, and currency. The political aspect of the New World Order will have the Antichrist strongly influencing the United Nations, which will be the worlds lawmaking body. In fact, the worlds leaders will actually agree to surrender their power to the Antichrist. Finally, Antichrist and the False Prophet will demand that people undergo an initiation ceremony into the New Age Religion.

Post-Tribulation Rapture (Post-Trib): A Rapture viewpoint that posits that the Rapture will not occur until after a seven year tribulation period. While this position acknowledges that the Church will be persecuted by the Antichrist, it overstates how long the Church will face the persecution of the Antichrist. In fact, the Post-Trib position has the Church enduring the Wrath of God and the Wrath of Satan. However, 1 Thessalonians 1:9-10 and 5:9 says that the Church will not endure the Wrath of God.

Pre-Tribulation Rapture (Pre-Trib): A Rapture viewpoint that posits that the church will be rescued from the upcoming wrath and will not have to endure any persecution. This viewpoint by far dominates the thinking of nearly all prominent self-proclaimed prophecy experts. As a consequence, the Pre-Trib viewpoint is the primarily Rapture position that is taught in churches. The viewpoint is incorrect in my opinion because it appears to have originated with a deceptive vision devised by the forces of darkness, but even when not considering its dubious origins the viewpoint falls flat on its own scriptural merits.

Pre-Wrath Rapture (Pre-Wrath): A Rapture viewpoint that posits that the Rapture will take place after the Wrath of Satan (the Great Tribulation) is finished and before the Wrath of God begins. The Pre-Wrath viewpoint emphasizes that there is a brief tribulation period within 2nd half of a seven year period. The Pre-Wrath Rapture viewpoint is a descendant of a viewpoint that was held by most of the Church from its inception up until the time that the PreTribulation Rapture viewpoint became popular.

Rapture: The event when Jesus will return to Earth on a cloud to bring His Church to Heaven before the arrival of the Wrath of God. The first to be taken up will be those who are dead and after them the people that survived the persecution of the Antichrist. The Rapture will take place after the opening of the 6th Seal and before the opening of the 7th Seal.

Rosh: The geographic region where the people who represented the people-group Rosh live. Some argue that there was never a people group called .Rosh., but scholars like C.F. Keil believe there is no reason to question the existence of this people group. The area where Rosh lives now will be one of the ten countries that will be part of the Antichrists Empire and one of the three countries that Antichrist will begin with first. The territory of Rosh corresponds to the territory of modern day country of Russia.

Sabbath Year: The Sabbath Year is a special year that is observed once every seven years. A Sabbath Year is a year of rest for the land because farmers are not permitted to work the land.

The Saints: Believers in God and His Word. The saints will be severely persecuted during the Great Tribulation to the point where the saints are asked to remain patient and to endure.

Sanat Kumara: Sanat Kumara is the name of the New Age god. Kumara is known as the .Lord of the World., which is a title that the Bible gives to Satan in John 12:31-32, John 14:2930, 2 Corinthians 4:3-4, and Ephesians 2:1-3. Satan is known as the ruler of this world because he has dominion over all the kingdoms of the earth. Therefore, Sanat Kumara and Satan are the same entity.

Spiritual Hierarchy: a multitier spiritual, satanic organization consisting of various fallen angels and demons with different levels of tasks and responsibilities. Paul writes in Ephesians 6:12 that this spiritual hierarchy consists of four levels: .principalities., .powers.,. rulers of the darkness of this world., and .spiritual wickedness in high places.. The spiritual wickedness in high places is a category that describes the elite beings in Satans evil hierarchy. Highranking fallen angels like Ascended Masters fall into this category since they have been entrusted with the most important tasks of Satans plan. The term .rulers of darkness of this world. refers to powerful, evil beings that oversee countries. Powers are the beings that serve as the muscle behind evil. If Satan has a specific order he wants done these beings are responsible for actually performing the tasks necessary to get the order done. Finally, .principalities. are fallen angels assigned to territories like places of worship.

Seventy Weeks of Daniel: A group of 70 periods each lasting 7 prophetic years or 2520 days.

Gabriel tells Daniel in chapter 9 of the Book of Daniel that 70 weeks have been given to the people of Israel and the city of Jerusalem to end their disobedience, atone for their sins, and to be saved. The first 69 weeks spanned from April 19, 444BC to May 13, 33AD when Christ ascended to Heaven. The final week is still to come in the future.

Seventieth Week of Daniel: The final seven year period or prophetic week in Daniels 70 week prophecy. Daniels 70th week is divided into two halves. In the first half Antichrist will make and keep a covenant with Israel, but will break it halfway through the seven and desolate the Third Temple in Jerusalem. The 2nd half of the week is a period of severe hardship for Israel.

Sons of God: The biblical term for fallen angels. The term is first used in Genesis 6 where fallen angels mated with human women to create .giants. or Nephilim. The term also appears in the Book of Job where the Sons of God joined Satan in Heaven when he was debating God.

Third Temple: a place of worship that will exist in Jerusalem during the end times. The covenant with death will call for the building of the Third Temple on the Temple Mount where there is just the Al-Aqsa Mosque today. However, a likely major detail of this treaty is going to make the Third Temple not only a place of worship for Jews exclusively. A man who infiltrated a high-level Theosophical Society meeting was told that this Third Temple is intended to be a place of worship for Jews, Muslims, and Christians. 3 years through the 70th Week of Daniel Antichrist will enter the Third Temple and declare himself to be god.

Tubal: The geographic region where the people who represented the people-group Tubal live. The area where Tubal lives now will be one of the ten countries that will be part of the Antichrists Empire and one of the three countries that Antichrist will begin with first. The territory of Tubal corresponds to the territory of modern day Republic of Georgia.

Two Witnesses: Two individuals who will preach to the world from Jerusalem during the 2nd half of the 70th week of Daniel. The two individuals are likely to be Elijah and Moses. The two witnesses will kill anyone that harms them and will have the power to cause a drought throughout the earth during their time on Earth. After the end of the 70th week of Daniel, Antichrist will kill them, but they will be resurrected and ascend to Heaven three days later to the dismay of the earth.

Week, Prophetic: A seven prophetic year period lasting 2520 days or 72 prophetic months that last 30 days each. The 70th week of Daniel is the final prophetic week that is to come.

Wrath of God: A time period when God will execute His vengeance on the earth. The Wrath of God begins after the Rapture following the opening of the 6th and 7th seals. The Wrath of God encompasses the seven Trumpets and the seven Bowl Judgments.

Wrath of Satan: A term used in Revelation 12:12 describing the reaction of Satan after losing the War in Heaven and being cast to the Earth. The time period when Satan unleashes his wrath will correspond with the length of the Great Tribulation, which begins way through the

70th week of Daniel. During this time Satan will give 110% effort towards seeking vengeance because he does not have much time to execute vengeance. He will persecute Jews and Christians.

Year, Prophetic: A time period of 360 days or 12 months of 30 day intervals. Each prophetic week consists of seven prophetic years.

Index 70 Weeks of Daniel, 15, 49, 50, 252, 280 70th Week of Daniel, 51, 55, 56, 78, 129, 130, 221, 250, 251, 252, 274, 275, 277, 278, 280, 281, 282 Antichrist, 31, 32, 37, 38, 41, 45, 51, 55, 56, 71, 72, 77, 81, 82, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 111, 113, 114, 119, 120, 123, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 134, 137, 138, 139, 140, 141, 144, 148, 149, 153, 154, 155, 156, 157, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 165, 168, 171, 174, 175, 180, 181, 183, 184, 185, 187, 188, 191, 192, 193, 194, 195, 196, 199, 200, 201, 202, 205, 207, 210, 213, 214, 215, 218, 220, 221, 223, 224, 250, 251, 256, 257, 259, 262, 264, 265, 266, 267, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 277, 278, 279, 280, 281 Babylon the Great, 167, 168, 174, 175, 179, 187, 270, 272, 273, 278 Bailey, Alice, 40, 77, 81, 103, 113, 114, 141, 162, 179, 180, 213, 272, 275 Beast Empires, 28, 273 Birth Pangs, 274 Blavatsky, Helena P., 39, 276 Covenant with Death, 130, 274 Creme, Benjamin, 33, 35, 41, 42, 77, 81, 103, 117, 129, 131, 141, 142, 158, 163, 172, 185, 191, 193, 272, 273, 275 Day of the Lord, 47, 129, 189, 211, 219, 230, 250, 267, 270, 274 Deflation, 122, 274

End Times, 1, 14, 24, 228, 263, 264, 275 Fallen Angel, 35, 40, 77, 81, 82, 103, 113, 119, 120, 124, 127, 134, 162, 179, 181, 182, 250, 264, 275 False Prophet, 31, 37, 38, 157, 158, 159, 161, 184, 185, 193, 195, 223, 224, 262, 265, 275, 276, 278 Gog, 98, 99, 100, 103, 226, 276 Great Tribulation, 191, 192, 194, 196, 202, 205, 208, 209, 212, 214, 216, 217, 256, 257, 258, 266, 267, 275, 279, 280, 281 Hitler, Adolf, 39, 43, 67, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 102, 139, 141, 143, 151, 152, 153, 154, 156, 174, 177, 178, 228, 263, 272, 273, 276, 277 Hyperinflation, 22, 255, 276 Jubilee Year, 228, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 238, 239, 240, 243, 244, 245, 246, 247, 250, 252, 268, 277 Khul, Djwhal, 34, 40, 77, 81, 82, 96, 103, 104, 105, 113, 114, 115, 117, 119, 120, 123, 124, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 169, 173, 179, 180, 181, 182, 183, 186, 250, 272, 275 Latter Times, 277 Magog, 98, 99, 100, 102, 103, 226, 277 Maitreya, 32, 34 Antichrist Spirit, 32, 34, 36, 37, 41, 42, 43, 44, 103, 114, 115, 118, 122, 123, 125, 126, 127, 129, 131, 141, 142, 143, 144, 153, 154, 155, 156, 158, 159, 160, 165, 166, 167, 168, 170, 171, 180, 181,

182, 184, 185, 272, 273, 275, 276, 277 Mark of the Beast, 161, 185, 226, 257, 277 Masters, Ascended, 33, 36, 39, 40, 41, 44, 115, 141, 262, 272, 276, 278, 280 Meshech, 98, 99, 100, 103, 106, 107, 277, 278 Mid-Tribulation Rapture, 278 New Age, 21, 22, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 81, 82, 103, 104, 105, 114, 118, 119, 130, 141, 143, 154, 162, 168, 169, 173, 174, 179, 180, 182, 183, 184, 185, 186, 189, 192, 194, 195, 196, 197, 199, 212, 213, 214, 217, 272, 274, 275, 276, 277, 278,.280 New Group of World Servers, 114, 118, 119, 278 New World Order NWO, 21, 32, 113, 114, 117, 119, 121, 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 130, 161, 162, 171, 173, 197, 213, 251, 255, 256, 278 Plan, 33, 93, 113, 114, 118, 120, 121, 158, 159, 193, 274

Post-Tribulation Rapture, 279 Pre-Tribulation Rapture Pre-Trib, 279 Pre-Wrath Rapture Pre-Wrath, 202, 279 Rapture, The, 197, 198, 199, 200, 201, 202, 203, 205, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216, 217, 218, 219, 267, 275, 276, 278, 279, 281 Rosh, 98, 100, 102, 103, 106, 277, 279 Sabbath Year, 228, 229, 230, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243, 244, 245, 246, 247, 277, 279 Saints, the, 280 Sananda, Jesus Immanuel, 34, 36. 158, 159, 160, 161, 199, 217, 218, 275, 276 Master Jesus, 275, 276 Sanat Kumara, 32, 81, 114, 115, 162, 280 Sons of God, 115, 116, 281 Spiritual Hierarchy Hierarchy, The, 103, 117, 162, 280 The Elect, 275 Third Temple, 191 Temple in Jerusalem, 131, 280, 281 Tubal, 98, 99, 100, 103, 106, 108, 277, 281 Two Witnesses, 189, 190, 221, 265, 269,

281 Wrath of God, 189, 197, 200, 201, 202, 211, 212, 219, 220, 222, 225, 267, 274, 278, 279, 281 Wrath of Satan, 200, 202, 266, 278, 279, 281